C 2 UG

CAESAR II 2011 R1 User Guide
Copyright
Copyright 1985 - 2012 Intergraph CAS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3. Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation P.O. Box 240000 Huntsville, AL 35813
Terms of Use
Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, noncommercial use. The documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
Warranties and Liabilities

All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software or applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT. Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, INtools, ISOGEN, MARIAN, SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, SupportModeler, COADE, CAESAR II, CADWorx, PV Elite, CODECALC, and TANK are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1
What is CAESAR II? ................................................................................................................................ 1-2 What are the Applications of CAESAR II? .............................................................................................. 1-3 What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe Stress Packages? ....................................................... 1-4 About the CAESAR II Documentation..................................................................................................... 1-5 Program Support/User Assistance ............................................................................................................ 1-6 Software Revision Procedures .................................................................................................................. 1-8 Identifying Builds .......................................................................................................................... 1-8 Can Builds Be Applied To Any Version? ..................................................................................... 1-8 Announcing Builds ........................................................................................................................ 1-8 Obtaining Builds............................................................................................................................ 1-8 What is Contained In A Specific Build?........................................................................................ 1-8 Installing Builds ............................................................................................................................ 1-9 Detecting/Checking Builds............................................................................................................ 1-9 Archiving and Reinstalling an Old, Patched Version .................................................................... 1-9 Updates and License Types .................................................................................................................... 1-10 Full Run ....................................................................................................................................... 1-10 Lease............................................................................................................................................ 1-10 Limited Run................................................................................................................................. 1-10
Chapter 2
Quick Start and Basic Operation
2-1
CAESAR II Quick Reference ................................................................................................................... 2-2 Starting CAESAR II ...................................................................................................................... 2-2 Basic Operation ........................................................................................................................................ 2-7 Piping Input Generation ................................................................................................................ 2-7 Error Checking the Model ........................................................................................................... 2-11 Building Load Cases.................................................................................................................... 2-13 Executing Static Analysis ............................................................................................................ 2-15 Static Output Review................................................................................................................... 2-16
Chapter 3
Main Menu
3-1
The CAESAR II Main Menu .................................................................................................................... 3-2 File Menu.................................................................................................................................................. 3-3 Input Menu................................................................................................................................................ 3-6 Analysis Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 3-7 3D Graphics Highlights: Temperature and Pressure................................................................................. 3-9 Output Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 3-10 Tools Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 3-11 C2Isogen Export .......................................................................................................................... 3-12 Diagnostics Menu ................................................................................................................................... 3-16 ESL Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 3-17 View Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 3-18 Help Menu .............................................................................................................................................. 3-19
Chapter 4
Piping Input
4-1
Contents Spreadsheet Overview .............................................................................................................................. 4-2 Customize Toolbar ........................................................................................................................ 4-3 Data Fields ................................................................................................................................................ 4-4 Node Numbers............................................................................................................................... 4-4 Element Lengths ............................................................................................................................ 4-4 Element Direction Cosines ............................................................................................................ 4-5 Pipe Section Properties.................................................................................................................. 4-5 Operating Conditions: Temperatures and Pressures ...................................................................... 4-6 Special Element Information ......................................................................................................... 4-7 Boundary Conditions ..................................................................................................................... 4-8 Loading Conditions ....................................................................................................................... 4-8 Piping Material .............................................................................................................................. 4-8 Material Elastic Properties ............................................................................................................ 4-9 Densities ........................................................................................................................................ 4-9 Auxiliary Data Area................................................................................................................................ 4-10 Flange Checks - Equipment Screening ........................................................................................ 4-10 Bend Data .................................................................................................................................... 4-11 Rigid Weight ............................................................................................................................... 4-12 Restraints ..................................................................................................................................... 4-13 Expansion Joint ........................................................................................................................... 4-14 Displacements ............................................................................................................................. 4-15 Equipment Checks/Screening ...................................................................................................... 4-16 Forces .......................................................................................................................................... 4-17 Entering Line Numbers ............................................................................................................... 4-18 Uniform Loads ............................................................................................................................ 4-19 Wind/Wave.................................................................................................................................. 4-20 Allowable Stresses ...................................................................................................................... 4-21 Stress Intensification Factors/Tees .............................................................................................. 4-23 Flexible Nozzles .......................................................................................................................... 4-24 Hangers........................................................................................................................................ 4-25 Node Names ................................................................................................................................ 4-26 Offsets ......................................................................................................................................... 4-27 Menu Commands .................................................................................................................................... 4-28 File Menu .................................................................................................................................... 4-28 Edit Menu .................................................................................................................................... 4-30 Model Menu ................................................................................................................................ 4-35 Break ........................................................................................................................................... 4-35 Environment Menu ...................................................................................................................... 4-38 Tools Menu.................................................................................................................................. 4-63 3-D Modeler............................................................................................................................................ 4-69 3D Graphics Configuration ......................................................................................................... 4-74 User Options ................................................................................................................................ 4-77 HOOPS Toolbar Manipulations .................................................................................................. 4-79 3D Graphic Highlights: Diameters, Wall, Insulation, Cladding & Refractory Thickness, Materials, Piping Codes ........................................................................................................................................... 4-80 3D Graphics Highlights: Corrosion and Densities ...................................................................... 4-81 3D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, Wind/Wave Loads............... 4-83 Limiting the Amount of Displayed Info; Find Node, Range & Cutting Plane ............................ 4-85 Save an Image for Later Presentation: TIF, HTML, BMP, JPEG and PDF ................................ 4-87 3D Graphics Interactive Feature: Walk Through ........................................................................ 4-89 Resizing Models ......................................................................................................................... 4-89
Chapter 5
Error Checking and Static Load Cases
5-1
Error Checking.......................................................................................................................................... 5-2 Fatal Error Message....................................................................................................................... 5-3 Warning Message .......................................................................................................................... 5-4
Contents
Note Message ................................................................................................................................ 5-5 Static Load Case Editor ............................................................................................................................ 5-6 Building Static Load Cases ....................................................................................................................... 5-8 Load Case Definition in CAESAR II ............................................................................................ 5-8 Load Cases with Hanger Design ................................................................................................... 5-9 Load Cases with Thermal Displacements...................................................................................... 5-9 Load Cases with Thermal Displacements and Settlement ........................................................... 5-10 Load Cases with Pitch and Roll................................................................................................... 5-10 Load Cases for Other Types of Occasional Loads ...................................................................... 5-11 Static Seismic Load Cases ........................................................................................................... 5-13 Providing Wind Data .............................................................................................................................. 5-17 Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters.................................................................................................... 5-19 Execution of Static Analysis ................................................................................................................... 5-20 Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases .......................................................................................................... 5-23 Definition of a Load Case........................................................................................................... 5-23 Load Case Options Tab ............................................................................................................... 5-28 User Control of Produced Results Data....................................................................................... 5-29 Output Status ............................................................................................................................... 5-29 Output Type................................................................................................................................. 5-29 Snubbers Active?......................................................................................................................... 5-29 Hanger Stiffness .......................................................................................................................... 5-29 Friction Multiplier ....................................................................................................................... 5-30 Elastic Modulus ........................................................................................................................... 5-30 User-Controlled Combination Methods ...................................................................................... 5-31 Algebraic ..................................................................................................................................... 5-31 Scalar ........................................................................................................................................... 5-31 SRSS............................................................................................................................................ 5-31 ABS ............................................................................................................................................. 5-31 Max.............................................................................................................................................. 5-32 Min .............................................................................................................................................. 5-32 SignMax ...................................................................................................................................... 5-32 SignMin ....................................................................................................................................... 5-32 Recommended Load Cases.......................................................................................................... 5-33 Recommended Load Cases for Hanger Selection........................................................................ 5-34
Chapter 6
Static Output Processor
6-1
Entering the Static Output Processor ........................................................................................................ 6-2 Standard Toolbar ...................................................................................................................................... 6-4 Reports Navigation Toolbar...................................................................................................................... 6-6 Custom Reports Toolbar ........................................................................................................................... 6-8 Report Template Editor ............................................................................................................................ 6-9 Filtering Reports ..................................................................................................................................... 6-12 Report Options ........................................................................................................................................ 6-14 Displacements ............................................................................................................................. 6-14 Restraints ..................................................................................................................................... 6-15 Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates........................................................................ 6-16 Restraint Summary ...................................................................................................................... 6-18 Nozzle Check Report................................................................................................................... 6-19 Flange Reports............................................................................................................................. 6-20 Global Element Forces ................................................................................................................ 6-21 Local Element Forces .................................................................................................................. 6-22 Stresses ........................................................................................................................................ 6-23 Stress Summary ........................................................................................................................... 6-24 Code Compliance Report ............................................................................................................ 6-25 Cumulative Usage Report............................................................................................................ 6-26
Contents General Computed Results ..................................................................................................................... 6-27 Load Case Report ........................................................................................................................ 6-27 Hanger Table with Text ............................................................................................................... 6-28 Input Echo ................................................................................................................................... 6-28 Miscellaneous Data ..................................................................................................................... 6-29 Warnings ..................................................................................................................................... 6-30 Output Viewer Wizard ............................................................................................................................ 6-31 Printing or Saving Reports to File Notes ................................................................................................ 6-32 3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output Processor ............................................................................. 6-34 Animation of Static Results Notes .......................................................................................................... 6-38
Chapter 7
Dynamic Input and Analysis
7-1
Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II ....................................................................................................... 7-2 Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis ................................................................................. 7-3 Major Steps in Dynamic Input....................................................................................................... 7-5 Dynamic Analysis Input Processor Overview .......................................................................................... 7-6 Entering the Dynamic Analysis Input Menu ................................................................................. 7-6 Input Overview Based on Analysis Category ........................................................................................... 7-8 Modal ............................................................................................................................................ 7-8 Specifying the Loads ..................................................................................................................... 7-8 Snubbers ........................................................................................................................................ 7-8 DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard ........................................................................ 7-9 Save to File .................................................................................................................................. 7-10 OK ............................................................................................................................................... 7-10 Cancel .......................................................................................................................................... 7-10 Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 7-12 Importance Factor........................................................................................................................ 7-13 Seismic Coefficient Ca ................................................................................................................ 7-13 Seismic Coefficient Cv ................................................................................................................ 7-13 Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 7-14 Importance Factor Ip .................................................................................................................... 7-15 Site Coefficient Fa ....................................................................................................................... 7-15 Site Coefficient Fv....................................................................................................................... 7-15 Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS)...................................................................................... 7-15 Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)....................................................................................... 7-15 Response Modification Rp ........................................................................................................... 7-15 Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 7-16 Importance Factor........................................................................................................................ 7-17 Site Coefficient Fa ....................................................................................................................... 7-17 Site Coefficient Fv....................................................................................................................... 7-17 Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS)...................................................................................... 7-17 Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)....................................................................................... 7-17 Response Modification R ............................................................................................................ 7-17 Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 7-21 Opening Time (milliseconds) ...................................................................................................... 7-21 Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 7-23 Max. Table Frequency................................................................................................................. 7-23 Number of Points......................................................................................................................... 7-23 Enter Pulse Data .......................................................................................................................... 7-23 Generate Spectrum ...................................................................................................................... 7-24 Control Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 7-28 Advanced Parameters Show Screen ............................................................................................ 7-28 Harmonic ................................................................................................................................................ 7-29 Specifying the Loads ................................................................................................................... 7-29 Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model.......................................................................................... 7-30 Control Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 7-31
Contents
Earthquake (Spectrum) ........................................................................................................................... 7-32 Specifying the Loads ................................................................................................................... 7-32 Spectrum Load Cases .................................................................................................................. 7-34 Static/Dynamic Combinations ..................................................................................................... 7-35 Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model.......................................................................................... 7-36 Control Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 7-36 Advanced Parameters .................................................................................................................. 7-36 Relief Loads (Spectrum) ......................................................................................................................... 7-37 Specifying the Loads ................................................................................................................... 7-37 Relief Load Synthesis .................................................................................................................. 7-37 Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum) ................................................................................................... 7-38 Specifying the Load..................................................................................................................... 7-38 Pulse Table/DLF Spectrum Generation ....................................................................................... 7-38 Spectrum Definitions ................................................................................................................... 7-38 Force Sets .................................................................................................................................... 7-38 Spectrum Load Cases .................................................................................................................. 7-38 Static/Dynamic Combinations ..................................................................................................... 7-38 Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model.......................................................................................... 7-38 Time History ........................................................................................................................................... 7-39 Specifying The Load ................................................................................................................... 7-39 Time History Profile Definitions ................................................................................................. 7-39 Force Sets .................................................................................................................................... 7-39 Time History Load Cases ............................................................................................................ 7-40 Static/Dynamic Combinations ..................................................................................................... 7-40 Modifying Mass and Stiffness Models ........................................................................................ 7-40 Control Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 7-40 Advanced ..................................................................................................................................... 7-41 Error Handling and Analyzing the Job ................................................................................................... 7-42 Performing the Analysis .............................................................................................................. 7-42 Modes .......................................................................................................................................... 7-42 Harmonic ..................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Selection of Phase Angles ........................................................................................................... 7-44 Spectrum...................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Time History................................................................................................................................ 7-44
Chapter 8
Dynamic Output Processing
8-1
Entry into the Processor ............................................................................................................................ 8-2 Report Types............................................................................................................................................. 8-4 Displacements ............................................................................................................................... 8-4 Restraints ....................................................................................................................................... 8-4 Local Forces .................................................................................................................................. 8-6 Global Forces ................................................................................................................................ 8-7 Stresses .......................................................................................................................................... 8-8 Forces/Stresses .............................................................................................................................. 8-9 Cumulative Usage ....................................................................................................................... 8-10 Mass Participation Factors .......................................................................................................... 8-11 Natural Frequencies ..................................................................................................................... 8-12 Modes Mass Normalized ............................................................................................................. 8-12 Modes Unity Normalized ............................................................................................................ 8-13 Included Mass Data ..................................................................................................................... 8-14 Input Listing ................................................................................................................................ 8-14 Mass Model ................................................................................................................................. 8-15 Boundary Conditions ................................................................................................................... 8-16 Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File ........................................................................................ 8-17 3D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation Processor .................................................................................. 8-18
Contents Save Animation to File ................................................................................................................ 8-19 Animation of Static Results - Displacements .............................................................................. 8-20 Animation of Dynamic Results Modal/Spectrum..................................................................... 8-21 Animation of Dynamic Results Harmonic ............................................................................... 8-21 Animation of Dynamic Results Time History .......................................................................... 8-21
Chapter 9
Structural Steel Modeler
9-1
Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II.................................................................................... 9-2 3D/HOOPS Graphics ................................................................................................................................ 9-8 Sample Input ........................................................................................................................................... 9-10 Structural Steel Example #1.................................................................................................................... 9-11 Structural Steel Example #2.................................................................................................................... 9-18 Structural Steel Example #3.................................................................................................................... 9-31
Chapter 10
Buried Pipe Modeling
10-1
Modeler Overview .................................................................................................................................. 10-2 Using the Underground Pipe Modeler .................................................................................................... 10-3 Notes on the Soil Model ......................................................................................................................... 10-9 CAESAR II Basic Model (Peng) ............................................................................................... 10-10 American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model ................................................................................... 10-12 Recommended Procedures.................................................................................................................... 10-17 Example ................................................................................................................................................ 10-18
Chapter 11
Equipment Component and Compliance
11-1
Equipment and Component Evaluation .................................................................................................. 11-2 Intersection Stress Intensification Factors .............................................................................................. 11-3 Bend Stress Intensification Factors......................................................................................................... 11-6 Pressure Stiffening ...................................................................................................................... 11-8 Flanges Attached to Bend Ends ................................................................................................... 11-8 Bends with Trunnions.................................................................................................................. 11-8 Stress Concentrations and Intensification.................................................................................... 11-9 WRC 107 Vessel Stresses ..................................................................................................................... 11-10 WRC 107 Stress Summations.................................................................................................... 11-15 WRC Bulletin 297 ................................................................................................................................ 11-17 Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations ..................................................................................................... 11-18 Bolt Tightening Stress Notes ..................................................................................................... 11-23 Using the CAESAR II Flange Modeler ..................................................................................... 11-24 Leak Pressure Ratio ................................................................................................................... 11-24 Effective Gasket Modulus ......................................................................................................... 11-24 Flange Rating ............................................................................................................................ 11-24 Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines B31G ................................................................................ 11-27 Expansion Joint Rating ......................................................................................................................... 11-31 Structural Steel Checks - AISC............................................................................................................. 11-38 Global Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 11-38 Structural Code .......................................................................................................................... 11-39 Allowable Stress Increase Factor .............................................................................................. 11-39 Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz ................................................................................... 11-39 Youngs Modulus ...................................................................................................................... 11-39 Material Yield Strength ............................................................................................................. 11-39 Bending Coefficient................................................................................................................... 11-39 Form Factor Qa ......................................................................................................................... 11-39 Allow Sidesway......................................................................................................................... 11-40
Contents
Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . .................................................................... 11-40 Minimum Desired Unity Check ................................................................................................ 11-40 Maximum Desired Unity Check ................................................................................................ 11-40 Local Member Data ................................................................................................................... 11-41 Member Start Node ................................................................................................................... 11-42 Member End Node .................................................................................................................... 11-42 Member Type ............................................................................................................................ 11-42 In- And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz.............................................................. 11-42 Unsupported Axial Length ........................................................................................................ 11-43 Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending)................................................................................... 11-43 Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending) .......................................................................... 11-43 Double Angle Spacing............................................................................................................... 11-43 Youngs Modulus ...................................................................................................................... 11-43 Material Yield Strength ............................................................................................................. 11-43 Axial Member Force.................................................................................................................. 11-43 In-Plane Bending Moment ........................................................................................................ 11-43 Out-of-Plane Bending Moment ................................................................................................. 11-43 In-Plane Small Bending Moment........................................................................................... 11-43 In-Plane Large Bending Moment........................................................................................... 11-43 Out-of-Plane Small Bending Moment ................................................................................... 11-44 Out-of-Plane Large Bending Moment ................................................................................... 11-44 AISC Output Reports ................................................................................................................ 11-44 Differences Between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Codes .............................................................. 11-45 NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) ........................................................................................................... 11-46 NEMA Turbine Example .......................................................................................................... 11-47 API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) ............................................................................................................... 11-53 Vertical In-Line Pumps ............................................................................................................. 11-58 API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) ..................................................................................................... 11-59 API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) ............................................................................................... 11-61 Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed Feedwater Heaters ........................................................ 11-66 API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services) ....................................................................... 11-67
Chapter 1 Introduction In This Chapter

What is CAESAR II? ............................................................ 1-2 What are the Applications of CAESAR II? .......................... 1-3
What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe Stress Packages?1-4
About the CAESAR II Documentation................................. 1-5 Program Support/User Assistance ........................................ 1-6 Software Revision Procedures .............................................. 1-8 Updates and License Types................................................... 1-10
1-2
Introduction
What is CAESAR II?

CAESAR II is a PC-based pipe stress analysis software program developed, marketed and sold by Intergraph CAS. This software package is an engineering tool used in the mechanical design and analysis of piping systems. The CAESAR II user creates a model of the piping system using simple beam elements and defines the loading conditions imposed on the system. With this input, CAESAR II produces results in the form of displacements, loads, and stresses throughout the system. Additionally, CAESAR II compares these results to limits specified by recognized codes and standards. The popularity of CAESAR II is a reflection of our expertise in programming and engineering, as well as our dedication to service and quality.
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-3
What are the Applications of CAESAR II?

CAESAR II is most often used for the mechanical design of new piping systems. Hot piping systems present a unique problem to the mechanical engineer. These irregular structures experience great thermal strain that must be absorbed by the piping, supports, and attached equipment. These structures must be stiff enough to support their own weight and also flexible enough to accept thermal growth. The loads, displacements, and stresses can be estimated through analysis of the piping model in CAESAR II. To aid in this design by analysis, CAESAR II incorporates many of the limitations placed on these systems and their attached equipment. These limits are typically specified by engineering bodies (such as the ASME B31 committees, ASME Section VIII, and the Welding Research Council) or by manufacturers of piping-related equipment (API, NEMA, or EJMA). CAESAR II is not limited to thermal analysis of piping systems. CAESAR II also has the capability of modeling and analyzing the full range of static and dynamic loads, which may be imposed on the system. Therefore, CAESAR II is not only a tool for new design but it is also valuable in troubleshooting or redesigning existing systems. Here, one can determine the cause of failure or evaluate the severity of unanticipated operating conditions such as fluid/piping interaction or mechanical vibration caused by rotating equipment.
1-4
Introduction
What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe Stress Packages?

Intergraph CAS treats CAESAR II more as a service than a product. Our staff of experienced pipe stress engineers are involved in day-to-day software development, program support, and training. This approach has produced a program, which most closely fits todays requirements of the pipe stress industry. Data entry is simple and straight forward through annotated input screens and/or spreadsheets. CAESAR II provides the widest range of modeling and analysis capabilities without becoming too complicated for simple system analysis. Users may tailor their CAESAR II installation through default setting and customized databases. Comprehensive input graphics confirms the model construction before the analysis is made. The programs interactive output processor presents results on the monitor for quick review or sends complete reports to a file or printer. CAESAR II not only uses standard analysis guidelines, and provides the latest recognized opinions for these analyses. CAESAR II also offers seamless interaction with our CADWorx/Plant, an AutoCAD based design and drafting system for creating orthographic, isometric, and 3D piping drawings. The two-way-link automatically generates stress analysis models of piping layouts, or creates spectacular stress isometrics in minutes from CAESAR II models. CAESAR II is a field-proven engineering analysis program. It is a widely recognized product with a large customer base and an excellent support and development record. Intergraph CAS is a strong and stable company where service is a major commitment.
1-5
About the CAESAR II Documentation

To address the sheer volume of information available on CAESAR II and present it in a concise and useful manner to the analyst the program documentation is presented in four separate manuals: 1. The User Guide describes the basic operation and flow of the many routines found in CAESAR II. This manual gives an overview of the program capabilities, and introduces model creation, analysis, and output review. It is intended as a general road map for the program. This general document is the first source of information. 2. The Technical Reference Manual explains the function of, input for, and output from each module of the program. This manual also explains much of the theory behind CAESAR II calculations. The Technical Reference Manual should be referred to whenever the user needs more information than is provided by the User Guide. 3. The Application Guide provides examples of how to use CAESAR II. These examples illustrate methods of modeling individual piping components as well as complete piping systems. Here one can find tutorials on system modeling and analysis. The Application Guide is a reference providing quick how to information on specific subjects. 4. The Quick Reference Guide provides the user with version and technical change details in addition to installation, and commonly referenced information.
Users can view and print any of the above manuals by clicking the HELP/ONLINE DOCUMENTATION from the Main Menu found in CAESAR II.
1-6
Introduction
Program Support/User Assistance

Our staff understands that CAESAR II is not only a complex analysis tool but also, at times, an elaborate process. One that may not be obvious to the casual user. While our documentation is intended to address the questions raised regarding piping analysis, system modeling, and results interpretation, not all the answers can be quickly found in these volumes. Intergraph CAS understands the engineers need to produce efficient, economical, and expeditious designs. To that end, Intergraph CAS has a staff of helpful professionals ready to address any CAESAR II issues raised by all users. CAESAR II support is available by telephone, fax, by mail, and the internet. To further aid internet users when contacting technical support, Intergraph CAS has added an option that generates an e-mail template with the basic machine and CAESAR II version details for a user. This information is typically what is needed to resolve technical support issues. To use this option, from the Help Menu select Email CAESAR II Support.
1-7
This selection launches the default e-mail client and populates an e-mail with the information displayed in the figure below. Note, your information will vary.
Note that the e-mail is properly addressed to Technical Support and contains all information relevant to your CAESAR II installation. You enter the problem description at the Type Message Here prompt and attach any necessary files. Intergraph CAS provides program support at no additional charge to the user. It is expected, however, that questions focus on the current version of the program. Formal training in CAESAR II and pipe stress analysis is also available from Intergraph CAS. Intergraph CAS conducts regular training classes in Houston and provides in-house and open attendance courses around the world. These courses focus on the expertise available at Intergraph CAS for modeling, analysis, and design. Intergraph CAS Technical Support: Phone: 281-890-4566 Fax: 281-890-3301 E-mail: caesarii@intergraph.com Web: www.coade.com
1-8
Introduction
Software Revision Procedures

Intergraph CAS software products are not static; they are changed continually to reflect engineering code addenda, operational enhancements, user requests, operating system modifications, and corrections. New versions are planned and targeted for a specific release date. However, there may be corrections necessary to the currently shipping version, before the next version can be released. When this occurs, a correction to the currently shipping version is made. This correction is referred to as a Build. Changes and corrections are accumulated until an error producing incorrect results is found. When this occurs, the build is finalized, announced, and posted to the web site. Some Intergraph CAS users have expressed concern over tracking, archiving, and distributing the various builds generated between major releases. To alleviate this problem for our users, all maintenance builds for new releases contain all previous builds. In other words, Build Y contains Build X. This increases the download size and time required to obtain the build, but only one build is required at any given time.
Identifying Builds
When posted on the Web, builds are identified with the program identifier and the date the Build was generated for example C2YYY-YYMMDD.EXE.
Can Builds Be Applied To Any Version?

No! As new versions are released, additional input items become necessary and must be stored in the program data files. In addition, file formats change; databases grow, and so on. A build is intended for one specific version of the software. Using a Build on a different version (without specific advice from Intergraph CAS personnel) is a sure way to cripple the software.
Announcing Builds
When a Build becomes available, the NEWS file maintained on the Web site is updated. All entries in this news file are dated for ease of reference. You should check one of these news files at least once a month to ensure they stay current with the software. Corrections and builds are also published in the Intergraph CAS newsletter, Mechanical Engineering News. If users register with an e-mail address, they will be notified via e-mail of all new builds.
Obtaining Builds
Builds are posted to our website at http://www.coade.com and are arranged in subdirectories by program. Each file contained in the directory includes a description defining what it contains, its size, and the date it was created. Decide which build file you need and download it.
What is Contained In A Specific Build?

Each patch file contains a file named BUILD.TXT. This is a plain ASCII text file that can be viewed with any text editor or sent to the system printer. This text file contains a description of all corrections and enhancements made, which are contained in the current patch. When necessary, additional usage instructions may be found in this file.
1-9
Installing Builds
Builds distributed for Windows applications use a Windows installation procedure. The executable is a selfextracting archive, which extracts to a number of sub-directories; each containing sufficient files to fit on a CD. The CD contains a standard SETUP.EXE program to actually install the Build. This procedure ensures that necessary files are registered with the system and that the Uninstall utility can perform its task.
Detecting/Checking Builds
When a Build is ready to be released, the Main Menu module is revised to reflect the Build level. This allows the user to see, on the Main Program menu, which Build is in use. To see which program modules have been modified, you can run an Intergraph CAS utility program from within the program directory. From the Diagnostics menu, select the Build Version option. This option scans each of the EXE modules in the program directory and lists its size, memory requirements, and build level. A sample display from this utility is shown in the table below. By reviewing the following table, users can determine which modules have been patched and to what level.
Archiving and Reinstalling an Old, Patched Version

When a new version of the software is released, what should be done with the old, existing version? The distribution disks sent from Intergraph CAS should obviously be saved. Additionally, any Builds obtained should also be archived. This will allow full usage of this version at some later time, if it becomes necessary. To reinstall an older version of the software, the distribution CDs from Intergraph CAS should be installed first. Then, the last Build should be installed. Each Build includes the modifications made in all prior Builds.
1-10
Introduction
Updates and License Types

Users can identify CAESAR II update sets by their version number. The current release is CAESAR II 2011. Intergraph CAS schedules and distributes these updates approximately every nine months, depending on their scope and necessity. The type of CAESAR II license determines whether or not a user receives these updates. There are three types of CAESAR II Licenses.
Full Run
A full run provides unlimited access to CAESAR II and one year of updates, maintenance, and support. Updates, maintenance, and support are available on an annual basis after the first year.
Lease
A lease provides unlimited access to CAESAR II with updates, maintenance, and support provided as long as the lease is in effect.
Limited Run
A limited run provides 50 static or dynamic analyses of piping system models over an unlimited period of time, but does not include program updates. The user is upgraded (if necessary) whenever a new set of 50 runs is purchased. Intergraph CAS only ships the current version of CAESAR II, no matter which type of license. Updates are automatically delivered to all lease users and to full run users who purchase updates, maintenance, and support, and all lease users.
Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation In This Chapter

CAESAR II Quick Reference ............................................... 2-2 Basic Operation ..................................................................... 2-7
2-2
CAESAR II Quick Reference

This chapter explains the basics of CAESAR II operation, to enable users to quickly perform a static piping analysis. All necessary user operations are discussed; however, details have been kept to a minimum. Each topic includes references to other sections of the CAESAR II User Guide for additional detailed information. The use of CAESAR II assumes that the software has been installed as per the instructions detailed in the Quick Reference Guide. There are several steps required to perform a static analysis, the major steps (and the chapters in which they are described) display below. These steps are explained briefly in this chapter. START CAESAR II (Chapter 4) GENERATE INPUT (Chapter 5) PERFORM ERROR CHECKING (Chapter 6) BUILD LOAD CASES (Chapter 6) EXECUTE STATIC ANALYSIS (Chapter 6) REVIEW OUTPUT (Chapter 7)
Note: A complete tutorial is provided in the CAESAR II Applications Guide. Starting CAESAR II
Launch CAESAR II by double-clicking the CAESAR II icon, which should point to the program C2.EXE in the CAESAR II Installation directory. Note that launching any of the other executable programs in the CAESAR II Installation directory can result in unpredictable behavior, at this point the Main Menu displays. It is from the Main Menu that users select jobs, analysis types, invoke executions, and initiate output reviews. Main Menu options are described in detail in Chapter 4 of this documentfor the purposes of this Quick Start chapter, only the File, Input, Analysis, and Output menus are used.
M ain M enu
Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation
2-3
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposessubsequent input, analysis, or output review references the job name specified. The job name is selected using the File menu, using one of three methods.
New J ob Na me Dialog
Whenever users wish to begin a new job, selecting File-New (or clicking the New icon from the toolbar) requires the user to enter a job name and data directory. For the purposes of this example, users should enter a name, select Piping Input, and select an alternate directory for the file, if desired.
Note: Selecting FILE-OPEN (or clicking the Open icon on the toolbar) presents users with a dialog to select an existing file. Select recently used files from the RECENT PIPING/STRUCTURAL FILE option on the File Menu.
2-4
Note: Enabling Structural Input opens the Structural Steel Wizard. See Chapter 4 of the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for more information.
Selecting a job name does not open the file; as noted, it indicates the job on which input modeling, analysis, output review, or other operations will be done. Users must still select one of these operations from the menu.
Open Dialog
File Open / Job Roll-Back:

The File Open dialog has been improved to permit the roll-back to earlier revisions of the (piping) input. This procedure is illustrated in the following figures.
Open Dialog
2-5
Click FILE/OPEN from the Main Menu, then click on the desired job. Once a job has been selected, if there are earlier revisions available, they are listed in the lower right corner of the dialog. Only 25 revisions are saved, with the oldest being deleted if necessary.
To revert to an earlier revision, select the desired input from the list, based on the date stamp.
2-6
Clicking Open displays a confirmation dialog. Clicking Yes here restores the selected revision. CAESAR II gives users the option to archive input files. Enter a password between 6 and 24 characters in length. You are prompted to repeat this information to eliminate the possibility of incorrectly entering the password. Archived input files cannot be altered and/or saved without this password however; they can be opened and reviewed.
Ar chive Passwor d Dialog
2-7
Basic Operation
Once you have started the program and opened the file, you will choose the required operation.
Piping Input Generation

After specifying the job name users can launch the interactive model builder by selecting INPUT-PIPING from the Main Menu. Input generation of the model consists of describing the piping elements, as well as any external influences (boundary conditions or loads) acting on those elements. Each pipe element is identified by two node numbers, and requires the specification of geometric, cross sectional, and material data. The preferred method of data entry is the Piping Spreadsheet.
Piping Input Spr eadsheet
2-8
Each pipe element is described on its own spreadsheet. Data, which is likely to be constant, is automatically duplicated by CAESAR II to subsequent spreadsheets. This means that for many elements, the user must only confirm the numbers and enter the delta-dimensions. When necessary, point specific data can easily be entered on the appropriate elements spreadsheet. The menus, toolbars, and accelerators offer a number of additional commands that users can invoke to enter auxiliary processors or use special modelers or databases. The commands and general input instructions of the piping spreadsheet are discussed in detail in Chapter 5.
Entering the First Element (Element 10-20) of a Simple Model:
1 Enter the value 10-0 (10 ft) in the DX field. 2 Enter the value 8 (8-in. nominal) in the Diameter field. The program automatically converts this value to the actual diameter. 3 Enter S (standard schedule pipe wall) in the Wt/Sch field. This is automatically converted to wall thickness. 4 Enter 600 (degrees Fahrenheit) in the Temp 1 field. 5 Enter 150 (psig) in the Pressure 1 field. 6 Double-click the Bend check box. The Bends tab displays. This adds a long radius bend at the end of the element, and adds intermediate nodes 18 and 19 at the near weld and mid points of the bend respectively (node 20 physically represents the far weld point of the bend).
7 Double-click the Restraint check box. The Restraint tab displays. In the first Node field enter 10; then select ANC from the first Type drop list.
2-9
8 Select A106 B from the Material drop list. This selection fills in the material parameters such as density and modulus elasticity. 9 Double-click the Allowable Stress check box and select the B31.3 code from the Code drop list.
Note: Allowable stresses for the given material, temperature, and code display automatically.
10 Enter 0.85SG (0.85 specific gravity) in the Fluid Density field. The program automatically converts this value to density. To enter the second element of the model, press Alt-C, or click the Skip to Next Element icon, or use the Edit-Continue button to move to the spreadsheet for a new element, element 20-30.
Note: Node numbers are automatically generated, distributed and data is carried forward from previous spreadsheets.
11 Enter the value 10-0 (10 feet) in the DY field. 12 Double-click the Restraint check box. In the first Node field, enter 30; then select ANC from the first Type drop list.
The two-element model (an ell-configuration anchored at each end) is now complete.
2-10
The piping preprocessor also provides interactive graphics and listing functions to facilitate model editing and verification. The CAESAR Ii Piping Preprocessor is designed to make these tasks intuitive and efficient. Model verification can be performed using either the Graphics or List utilities, although a combination of both modes is recommended. The Graphics and List utilities are discussed in Chapter 5 of this manual. The CAESAR II Graphics screen, displays by default, next to the input spreadsheet. However, the spreadsheet can be collapsed to provide maximum graphic space as shown below.
CAESAR II Input Gr a phics Scr een
Once the model is completed, it must be checked for errors before analysis is permitted. This can be done using the File-Error Check menu option or the Error Check icon on the toolbar.
2-11
Error Checking the Model

The two main functions of this error checker; is first to verify the users input data, and second to build the execution data files utilized by the remainder of CAESAR II. Verification of the users input data consists of checking each individual piping element for consistency. Errors discovered which would prevent CAESAR II from running (such as a corrosion allowance greater than the wall thickness) are flagged as fatal errors to the user. Unusual items (such as a change of direction without a bend or intersection) are flagged as warnings to the user.
Other messages, of an informational type, may show intermediate calculations or general notes. Error messages display in red text, Notes display in blue text and Warnings display in green text. All messages display in the Error Window next to the model graphics. Clicking on an error or warning message highlights the associated element on the graphic display and positions the spreadsheet to that element. Users may review all the messages generated by using the scroll bar on the right side of the toolbar or arrow keys. Users can sort error messages by Message Number, Element or Node Number and Message Text, by clicking the column titles. Users can print the entire error report or selected sections by clicking the Print button. Users can choose to display only fatal errors or all errors by clicking the arrow beside the Error Checker icon.
If there is an error, users can return to the input module by clicking the Classic Piping Input tab. If the error check process completes without fatal errors, a center of gravity report is presented and the analysis data files can be generated and then the solution phase can commence.
2-12
Center of Gr avity Repor t
If fatal errors exist, the analysis data files are not generated and the solution phase cannot begin. Users must make corrections and rerun the Error Checker successfully before analysis is permitted.
2-13
Building Load Cases

A static analysis can be started from the Main Menu, or the Piping Input, once the analysis data files have been generated by the error checker. The first stage of a static analysis is to set up the load cases. For new jobs (no previous solution files available), the static analysis module recommends load cases to the user based on the load types encountered in the input file. These recommended load cases are usually sufficient to satisfy the piping code requirements for the Sustained and Expansion load cases. If the recommended load cases are not satisfactory, the user has the option of directly modifying them. Selecting the Analysis-Statics option from the Main Menu, or selecting the EDIT-EDIT STATIC LOAD CASES option from the piping preprocessor, launches the Load Case Builder.
Loa d Case Builder
2-14
Loads can be built two waysby 1) combining the load components defined in the input (weight, displacements, thermal cases, etc.) into load cases (basic cases), and 2) combining pre-existing load cases into new load cases (combination cases). Users can build the basic cases by selecting (one or more load components), dragging, and dropping load components from the Loads Defined in Input list (in the left hand column) to the Load Cases list on the right or by typing on any of the individual lines. Stress Types (indicating which code equations should be used to calculate and check the stresses) can be selected from the Stress Type list on each line. Combination cases, if present, must always follow the basic cases. Users can build combination cases by selecting (one or more load components), dragging, and dropping basic load cases from earlier in the load case list to combine cases (or blank load cases) later in the Load Cases list.
Note: The number of allowed static load cases has been increased to 999.
2-15
Executing Static Analysis

Once the load cases have been defined, the user begins the actual finite element solution through the use of the File-Analyze command on the toolbar, or by clicking the Start Run icon on the toolbar located in the Static Load Case Builder. The solution phase commences with the generation of the element stiffness matrices and load vectors, and solves for displacements, forces and moments, reactions, and stresses. This solution phase also performs the design and selection of spring hangers, and iterative stiffness matrix modifications for nonlinear restraints. The user is kept apprised of the solution status throughout the calculation.
2-16
Static Output Review

A review of the static analysis results is possible immediately after a static solution or at a later time by selecting the Output-Static option of the CAESAR II Main Menu. The static output processor presents the user with an interactive selection menu from which load cases and report options can be selected.
Eile
1/iew Fdt'i!'S Reports Qptions elotOptions PlotVie!:\' 2_how '11/indow
eJ g
I iieIl
I E lI W J W
li
Standa1dRepo1ts
Q
Gene1alComputedResults Input Echo Miscellaneous Data Load Case Repo1t Wamings Output Viewe1Wiza1d
_lSI X
Load Cases Analyzed 1 [OPE) W+Tl+P1 2[SUS)W+P1 3 [EXP) L3=L112
Displacements Resllaints Resllaints Extended Resllaint Summa1y Resllaint Summa1y Extended Flanges GlobalElement F01ces GlobalElement Fo1ces Extend LocalElement Fo1ces Stlesses Stlesses Extended Stless Summa1 y Code Compliance Code Compla i nce Extended
II
r. Send to Sc1een r Send toMS W01d r Send to P1inte1 r Send to Text [ASCII) File P Gene1ate Table olContents [TOC)
I II <..Remove I
>Add
Show these1epo1ts in this o1de1:
II
Custom Repo1ts Miscellaneous Option
Clea1AII
P Use1lnte1action
Units: ENGLISH.FIL
I
II
Less
Finish
I
Move Up
Move Down
CAESAR IIOutput Processor
CAP NUM SCRL
2-17
Results can be reviewed by selecting one or more load cases along with one or more reports (selection is done by clicking, Ctrl-clicking, and Shift-clicking the mouse). The results can be reviewed on the terminal, printed, or sent to a file, by using the View Reports, MS Word, File-Save/SaveAs, or File-Print menu commands and/or toolbars. The user can also use the View-Plot menu command or the Plot toolbar to review the analytic results in graphics mode, which can produce displaced shapes, stress distributions, and restraint actions.
Out put Gr a phics Scr een
The actual study of the results depends on the purpose of each load case, and the reason for the analysis. Usually the review checks that the system stresses are below their allowables, restraint loads are acceptable, and displacements are not excessive. Additional post processing (such as equipment, nozzle, and structural steel checks) may be required depending on the model and type of analysis. Once the review of the output is finished, the user can return to the main CAESAR II menu by exiting the output review module.
Chapter 3 Main Menu In This Chapter

The CAESAR II Main Menu ................................................ 3-2 File Menu .............................................................................. 3-3 Input Menu ............................................................................ 3-6 Analysis Menu ...................................................................... 3-7 3D Graphics Highlights: Temperature and Pressure............. 3-9 Output Menu ......................................................................... 3-10 Tools Menu ........................................................................... 3-11 Diagnostics Menu ................................................................. 3-16 ESL Menu ............................................................................. 3-17 View Menu............................................................................ 3-18 Help Menu............................................................................. 3-19
3-2
Main Menu
The CAESAR II Main Menu
CAESAR II M ain M enu
CAESAR II may be started by double-clicking the CAESAR II icon, or by running C2.EXE from the CAESAR II Installation directory. After starting CAESAR II, the Main Menu appears. It is recommended that this screen be kept at its minimal size (as shown above). This allows access to the toolbar while freeing most of the screen for other applications. The Main Menu is used to direct the actions of CAESAR II. As elsewhere in CAESAR II commands may be accessed from menus, as well as toolbars and/or keystroke combinations. The available menu options are briefly described here with further detail available elsewhere in this document or in the CAESAR II Technical Reference Guide.
Chapter 3 Main Menu
3-3
File Menu
The File menu may be used to do the following: Set Default Data DirectorySets the default data (project) directory without selecting a specific job file. Some CAESAR II options do not require that a job be selected, but must know in which directory to work.
Note The selection of the data directory is very important since any configuration, units, or other data files found in that directory are considered to be local to that job.
NewStarts a new piping or structural job. When New is selected, the user must designate whether this job is for a piping or structural model. The data directory where the file is to be placed must be selected, either by entering it directly or by browsing.
Note: Selecting Structural Input launches the Structural Steel Wizard. For more information, see Chapter 4 of the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for details.
File New Dialog Box
3-4
Main Menu
OpenOpens an existing piping or structural job. When Open is chosen, the user is prompted to select an existing job file. Files of type Piping, Pre-version 3.24 piping, or Structural may be displayed for selection (see below).
File Open / Job Roll-Back:

The File Open dialog box has been improved to permit the roll-back to earlier revisions of the (piping) input. This procedure is illustrated in the following figures.
Open Dialog Box
Chapter 3 Main Menu
3-5
Click FILE/OPEN from the Main Menu, then click on the needed job. Once a job has been selected, if there are earlier revisions available, they are listed in the lower, right corner of the dialog. Only 25 revisions are saved, with the oldest being deleted, if necessary.
To revert to an earlier revision, select the desired input from the list based on the date stamp.
Clicking Open displays a confirmation dialog. Clicking Yes here restores the selected revision. Recent Piping or Recent Structural Files Displays the four most recently-used piping or structural files in the File menu. ExitCloses CAESAR II.
\
3-6
Main Menu
Input Menu
Input M enu
Once a file is selected, the Input Menu indicates the available modules for the selected file type.
Option Description
Piping Underground Structural Steel
Inputs a CAESAR II Piping Model (see Chapter 5). Converts existing piping model to buried pipe (see Chapter 11). Inputs a CAESAR II Structural Model (see Chapter 10).
Chapter 3 Main Menu
3-7
Analysis Menu
Analysis M enu
The Analysis Menu allows the user to select from the different calculations available.
Option Description
Statics Dynamics SIFs WRC 107/297 Flanges B31.G Expansion Joint Rating AISC NEMA SM23
Performs Static analysis of pipe and/or structure. Available after error checking the input files (see Chapter 6). Performs Dynamic analysis of pipe and/or structure. Available after error checking the input files (see Chapter 8). Displays scratch pads used to calculate stress intensification factors at intersections and bends. Calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping (see Chapter 12). Performs flange stress and leakage calculations (see Chapter 12). Estimates pipeline remaining life (see Chapter 12). Evaluates expansion joints using EJMA equations (see Chapter 12). Performs AISC code check on structural steel elements (see Chapter 12). Evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles (see Chapter 12).
3-8
Main Menu
Option
Description
API 610 API 617 API 661 HEI Standard API 560
Evaluates piping loads on centrifugal pumps (see Chapter 12). Evaluates piping loads on compressors (see Chapter 12). Evaluates piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers (see Chapter 12). Evaluates piping loads on feedwater heaters (see Chapter 12). Evaluates piping loads on fired heaters (see Chapter 12).
Chapter 3 Main Menu
3-9
3D Graphics Highlights: Temperature and Pressure

Button and Name Description
Temperatures
Highlight the pipe elements for a particular temperature vector in a different color. A color key (legend) is included on the left side of the plot in a separate window. This option can be used to quickly see temperature variations throughout the system. This is a good way to verify that temperature changes have been made where appropriate. When more than one operating temperature has been specified, a drop list is presented so that the single desired temperature vector can be used in coloring the model. Clicking the Pressure button produces results similar to the ones described in the Temperature section, the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. When more than one operating pressure has been defined, a drop list with up to 9 pressures and a hydro pressure, HYD, as defined choices appears.
Pressure
Note: Only the pressures and temperatures that were actually defined in the input will appear in the toolbar as a choice. Note: The legend window may be resized, docked, and/or dragged away from the view. Note: While in the described highlighted mode, the model can still be zoomed, panned and rotated. Any of orthographic projections and single line/volume modes can still be used without affecting the model highlighted state. Note: Clicking the same button twice will deactivate the coloring effect. Note: The same functionality may be achieved from the Options Menu by selecting the Temperatures or Pressures menu options. Alternatively, the Temperatures can be accessed by pressing keyboard number buttons 1 through 9. Note: When the model is being printed using FILE MENU/ PRINT while in one of the highlighted modes described herein, the color key legend displays in the upper left corner of the page. This is always true, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the view.
3-10
Main Menu
Output Menu
Out put M enu
The user is presented with all available output of piping and/or structural calculations, which may be selected for review.
Option Description
Statics Harmonic Spectrum Modal Time History Animation
Displays Static results (see Chapter 7). Displays Harmonic Loading results (see Chapter 9). Displays Natural Frequency/Mode Shape calculations or Uniform/Force Spectrum Loading results (see Chapter 9). Displays Time History Load Simulation results (see Chapter 9). Displays Animated Graphic simulations of any of the above results.
Chapter 3 Main Menu
3-11
Tools Menu
Tools M enu
The Tools Menu includes various CAESAR II supporting utilities.

Option Description
Configure/Setup
Customizes the behavior of CAESAR II on a directory by directory basis. Enables users to consider items such as treatment of corrosion, pressure stiffening, and so on. differently for each directory, due to project or client considerations. Launches an on-screen calculator. Creates custom sets of units. Edits or adds to the CAESAR II Material Data Base. Activates or customizes job accounting or generates accounting reports. Enables the user to run a stream of jobs without operator intervention. Displays the interfaces to and from third party software (both CAD and analytical). Starts Isogen Isometrics. Starts I-Configure. Opens the CAESAR II System Folder.
Calculator Make Units files Material Data Base Accounting Multi-Job Analysis External Interfaces Isogen Isometrics I-Configure Explore System Folder
3-12
Main Menu
C2Isogen Export Using the Split option within C2Isogen in CAESAR II

Enables users to generate several isometric drawings separated at predefined nodes. This procedure assumes users have previous experience using Isogen in CAESAR II. 1. Start C2Isogen by clicking the Generate Stress Isometrics menu. button on the CAESAR II Main
2. Click Edit Stress Annotation and the Stress Isometric Annotations screen displays to the right. 3. Click the Split tab to display a list of nodes locations that can be the location for splitting.
Chapter 3 Main Menu
3-13
4. Enable the Node 22 check box so that the entire isometric drawing will be cut at the middle of the riser.
3-14
Main Menu
5. Click Create Isometric Drawing, then click OK to accept the default setting.
6. Two .dwg files are created. Highlight the first one and then click View to open it.
Chapter 3 Main Menu
3-15
7. Repeat the step above to view the second drawing. The two .dwg files are shown in DWG TrueView. The reference indicates that the two drawings are connected at node 22.
3-16
Main Menu
Diagnostics Menu
Diagnostics M enu
Diagnostics are provided to help trouble-shoot problem installations.

Option Description
CRC Check Build Version Error Review DLL Version Check
Verifies program files are not corrupted. Determines the build version of CAESAR II files. Reviews description of CAESAR II errors. Provides version information on library files used by CAESAR II.
Chapter 3 Main Menu
3-17
ESL Menu
ESL M enu
The ESL Menu gives access to utilities, which interact with the External Software Lock.
Option Description
Show Data Generate Access Codes
Displays data stored on the ESL. Allows runs to be added or other ESL changes, to be made either through Fax or E-mail (in conjunction with option below).
Enter re-authorization (See option above). Codes Check HASP Device Verifies the location and version of the ESL. Status Install HASP Device Driver Installs the ESL Drivers.
3-18
Main Menu
View Menu
View M enu
The View Menu allows users to enable the status bar and all toolbars.
Option Description
Toolbar Status Bar
Enable users to display and/or customize a toolbar. Enables users to display a status bar at the bottom of the window.
Chapter 3 Main Menu
3-19
Help Menu
Help M enu
Option
Description
On Line Documentation Desktop On-Line Help
Displays CAESAR II documentation in HTML or PDF format. Launches Intergraph CAS online technical support.
On-Line Registration Enables users with Internet access to register electronically with Intergraph CAS. Information Provides information on the best ways to contact Intergraph CAS personnel for technical support and provides Internet links for Intergraph CAS downloads and information. Enables users to verify the most current version of CAESAR II is installed. Displays CAESAR II version and copyright information.
Check for Upgrades About CAESAR II
Throughout CAESAR II context-sensitive, on-screen help is available by clicking ? or [F1] while the cursor is in any input field. A help screen displays showing a discussion and the required units, if applicable.
Chapter 4 Piping Input In This Chapter

Spreadsheet Overview........................................................... 4-2 Data Fields ............................................................................ 4-4 Auxiliary Data Area .............................................................. 4-10 Menu Commands .................................................................. 4-28 3-D Modeler .......................................................................... 4-47
4-2
Piping Input
Spreadsheet Overview
In order to input a piping model, you must either open a new or existing piping file from the Main Menu, or then choose INPUT-PIPING. The CAESAR II Piping Input spreadsheet then appears.
Input Spr eadsheet
This spreadsheet is used to describe the piping on an element-by-element basis. It consists of menu commands/toolbars, which can be used to perform a number of supporting operations and data fields used to enter information about each piping element. A graphic representation of the model automatically plots on the right and updates as new elements are added.
Chapter 4 Piping Input
4-3
Customize Toolbar
CAESAR II enables the user to customize the Spreadsheet and 3D Graphic toolbars. You can determine which buttons display and their locations, by right-clicking the mouse on the toolbar, which displays the following dialog
Cust omize T oolba r
Alternatively, users can customize the toolbar by pressing the <Shift> key, clicking a button and dragging it to the new position. CAESAR II allows users to undo any changes by right clicking on the toolbar, which causes the Customize Toolbar dialog to appear, and clicking the Reset button.
4-4
Piping Input
Data Fields
Data fields are grouped logically into blocks of related data on the left side of the screen. The right side of the screen offers an auxiliary area; with changing data-fields that support items entered through check boxes (pressing [F12] alternatively displays the various auxiliary screens). The data fields may be torn apart by doubleclicking the [>>] button in the upper right corner of each group. They can be arranged in any order, this aids in conserving window real estate and increasing space for graphics. The following are the data-field blocks:
Node Numbers
Each element is identified by its end node number. Since each input screen represents a piping element, the element end points - the From node and To node - must be entered. These points are used as locations at which information may be entered or extracted. The From node and To node are both required data fields.
Note: CAESAR II can generate both values if the AUTO_NODE_INCREMENT directive is set to other than zero using the Tools-Configure/Setup option of the Main Menu. Element Lengths
Lengths of the elements are entered as delta dimensions according to the X, Y, and Z rectangular coordinate system established for the piping system (note that the Y-axis represents the vertical axis). The delta dimensions DX, DY, and DZ, are the measurements along the X, Y, and Z-axes between the From node and To node. In most cases only one of the three cells will be used as the piping usually runs along the global axes. Where the piping element is skewed two or three entries must be made. One or more entries must be made for all elements except zero length expansion joints.
Note: When using feet and inches for compound length and length units, valid entries in this (and most other length fields) include formats such as: 3-6, 3 ft. -6 in, and 3-6-3/16.
Offsets can be used to modify the stiffness of the current element by adjusting its length and the orientation of its neutral axis in 3-D space.
4-5
Element Direction Cosines
Clicking the Ellipsis (...) button to the right of the element lengths (DX, DY, and DZ) displays the Element dialog. The Element dialog displays the total Length and Direction Cosines. Changes made to the total element Length, or Direction Cosines may affect one or all of the element lengths (DX, DY, and DZ). Changes made to any of the element lengths (DX, DY, and DZ) will affect both the total element Length and Direction Cosines.
Pipe Section Properties
The elements outside diameter, wall thickness, mill tolerance (plus mill tolerance is used for IGE/TD/12 piping code only), and seam weld (IGE/TD/12 piping code only); corrosion allowance, and insulation thickness are entered in this block. These data fields carry forward from one screen to the next during the input session and need only be entered for those elements at which a change occurs. Nominal pipe sizes and schedules may be specified; CAESAR II converts these values to actual outside diameter and wall thickness. Outside diameter and wall thickness are required data inputs.
Note: Nominal diameters, thicknesses, and schedule numbers are a function of the pipe size specification. ANSI, JIS, or DIN is set via the TOOLS-CONFIGURE/SETUP option of the Main Menu or the Setup toolbar button.
4-6
Piping Input
Operating Conditions: Temperatures and Pressures
Up to nine temperatures and ten pressures (one extra for the hydrostatic test pressure) can be specified for each piping element. (The button with the ellipses dots is used to activate a window showing extended operating conditions input). The temperatures are actual temperatures (not changes from ambient). CAESAR II uses these temperatures to obtain the thermal strain and allowable stresses for the element from the Material Database. As an alternative, the thermal strains may be specified directly (see the discussion of ALPHA TOLERANCE in the Technical Reference Manual). Thermal strains have absolute values on the order of 0.002, and are unitless. Pressures are entered as gauge values and may not be negative. Each temperature and each pressure entered creates a loading for use when building load cases. Both thermal and pressure data carries forward from one element to the next until changed. Entering a value in the Hydro Pressure field causes CAESAR II to build a Hydro case in the set of recommended load cases.
Note: CAESAR II uses an ambient temperature of 70F, unless changed using the Special Execution Parameters Option.
4-7
Special Element Information
Special components such as bends, rigid elements, expansion joints and tees require additional information, which can be defined by enabling the component and entering data in the auxiliary screen. If the element described by the spreadsheet ends in a bend, elbow or mitered joint, the Bend check box should be set by double-clicking. This entry opens up the auxiliary data field on the right hand side of the input screen to accept additional data regarding the bend. CAESAR II usually assigns three nodes to a bend (giving near, mid, and far node on the bend). Double-clicking the Rigid check box (indicating an element that is much stiffer than the connecting pipe such as a flange or valve) opens an auxiliary data field to collect the component weight. For rigid elements, CAESAR II follows these rules: When the rigid element weight is entered, i.e. not zero, CAESAR II computes any extra weight due to insulation and contained fluid, and adds it to the user-entered weight value. The weight of fluid added to a non-zero weight rigid element is equal to the same weight that would be computed for an equivalent straight pipe. The weight of insulation added is equal to the same weight that would be computed for an equivalent straight pipe times 1.75. If the weight of a rigid element is zero or blank, CAESAR II assumes the element is an artificial construction element rather than an actual piping element, so no insulation or fluid weight is computed for that element. The stiffness of the rigid element is relative to the diameter (and wall & thickness) entered. Make sure that the diameter entered on a rigid element spreadsheet is indicative of the rigid stiffness that should be generated. If an element is an expansion joint, double-clicking that check box brings up an auxiliary screen, which prompts for stiffness parameters and effective diameter. Expansion joints may be modeled as zero-length (with all stiffnesses acting at a single point) or as finite-length (with the stiffnesses acting over a continuous element). In the former case, all stiffness must be entered, in the latter; either the lateral or angular stiffness must be omitted. Checking the SIF & Tees check box allows the user to specify any component having special stress intensification factors (SIF). CAESAR II automatically calculates these factors for each component.
Note: Bends, rigids, and expansion joints are mutually exclusive. Refer to the Valve/Flange and Expansion Joint database discussions later in this chapter for quick entry of rigid element and expansion joint data.
4-8
Piping Input
Boundary Conditions
The checkboxes in this block open the auxiliary data field to allow the input of items, which restrain (or impose movement on) the pipe restraints, hangers, flexible nozzles or displacements. Though not required, it is recommended that such information be supplied on the input screen which has that point as the From node or To node. (This will be of benefit if the data must be located for modification). The auxiliary data fields allow specification of up to 4 restraints (devices which in some way modify the free motion of the system), one hanger, one nozzle, or two sets of nodal displacements per element. If needed, additional items for any node can be input on other element screens.
Loading Conditions
The check boxes in this block allow you to define loadings acting on the pipe. These loads may be individual forces or moments acting at discrete points, distributed uniform loads (which can be specified on force per unit length, or gravitational body forces), or wind loadings (wind loadings are entered by specifying a wind shape factorthe loads themselves are specified when building the load cases. The uniform load and the wind shape factor check boxes will be unchecked on subsequent input screens. This does not mean that the loads were removed from these elements; instead, this implies that the loads do not change on subsequent screens.
Note: You can specify uniform loads in g-values by setting a parameter in the Special Execution Options. Piping Material
CAESAR II requires the specification of the pipe materials elastic modulus, Poissons ratio, density, and (in most cases) expansion coefficient. The program provides a database containing the parameters for many common piping materials. This information is retrieved by picking a material from the drop list, by entering the material number, or by typing the entire material name and then picking it from the match list. (The coefficient of expansion does not appear on the input screen, but it can be reviewed during error checking.) Note that materials 18 and 19 represent cold spring properties, cut short and cut long respectively; material 20 activates CAESAR IIs orthotropic model for use with materials such as fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe. Material 21 permits a totally user defined material. Using a material with a number greater than 100 permits the use of allowable stresses from the database.
4-9
Material Elastic Properties
This block is used to enter or override the elastic modulus and Poissons ratio of the material, if the value in the database is not correct. These values must be entered for Material type 21 (user specified).
Note: Material properties in the database may be changed permanently using the CAESAR II Material Database editor. Densities
The densities of the piping material, insulation, and fluid contents are specified in this block. The piping material density is a required entry and is usually extracted from the Material Database. You can also enter Fluid density in terms of specific gravity, if convenient, by following the input immediately with the letters: SG, e.g. 0.85SG (there can be no spaces between the number and the SG).
Note: If an insulation thickness is specified (in the pipe section properties block) but no insulation density is entered, CAESAR II defaults to the density of calcium silicate.
4-10
Piping Input
Auxiliary Data Area

The Auxiliary data area is used to display or enter extended data associated with the check box fields. The data in this area can be displayed by single clicking the appropriate box, or by toggling through the screens with the use of the [F12] key or by clicking the appropriate tabs.
Note: When there is no auxiliary data, the model status screen appears. Flange Checks - Equipment Screening
This auxiliary screen is used to enter flange information for In-Line Flange evaluation. The dialog changes to accommodate input for the two different methods of flange analysis available in CAESAR II. Values for both the Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G can be Read from File if a user selects ASME 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box . The G values are in the text file ASME-2003.G located in system folder of users application data directory.
4-11
Bend Data
This auxiliary screen is used to enter information regarding bend radius, miter cuts, fitting wall thickness, stiffness factor (K-Factor), or attached flanges. Intermediate node points may be placed at specified angles along the bend, or at the bend mid-point (M).
4-12
Piping Input
Rigid Weight
This auxiliary screen is used to enter the weight of a rigid element. If no weight is entered CAESAR II models the element as a weightless construction element.
Note: Rigid weights are entered automatically if the Valve and Flange database is used.
4-13
Restraints
This auxiliary screen is used to enter data for up to four restraints per spreadsheet. Node number and restraint Type are required; all other information is optional (omitting the stiffness entry defaults to rigid). Restraint types may be selected from the drop list or typed in.
Note: Skewed restraints may be entered by entering direction cosines with the type, such as X (1,0,1) for a restraint running at 45 in the X-Z plane.
4-14
Piping Input
Expansion Joint
This auxiliary screen is used to enter the expansion joint stiffness parameters and effective diameter. For a nonzero length expansion joint, either the transverse or bending stiffness must be omitted.
Note: Setting the effective diameter to zero de-activates the pressure thrust load. This method may be used (in conjunction with setting a large axial stiffness) to simulate the effect of axial tie-rods.
4-15
Displacements
This auxiliary screen is used to enter imposed displacements for up to two nodes per spreadsheet. Up to nine displacement vectors may be entered (load components D1 through D9). If a displacement value is entered for any vector, this direction is considered to be fixed for any other non-specified vectors.
Note: Leaving a direction blank for all nine vectors models the system as being free to move in that direction. Specifying 0.0 implies that the system is fully restrained in that direction.
4-16
Piping Input
Equipment Checks/Screening
Equipment nozzle evaluation is one of the most important tasks in analyzing a piping system. The various nozzle loads, when subjected to the operating criteria of the piping system, must be less than their associated allowable loads. Verification of the nozzle loads is a time consuming task, which cant be performed until the pipe stress requirements are met. CAESAR II enables users to define overall nozzle limits in the input, which then permits a first pass screening to be performed. Actual detailed nozzle evaluation can then be focused on those nozzles that fail this initial screening. To illustrate this procedure, consider the limits defined for a nozzle displayed below
The data above specifies the nozzle limits and how the resulting loads (from the analysis) will be compared to the limits. Once the analysis has been performed and the results are available, users can select the specific load case the nozzle must be evaluated against as well as the Nozzle Check report. For more information on the Nozzle Check report see the Equipment Report.
4-17
Forces
This auxiliary screen is used to enter imposed forces and/or moments for up to two nodes per spreadsheet. Up to nine force vectors may be entered (load components F1 through F9).
4-18
Piping Input
Entering Line Numbers

You can enter line numbers on an element spreadsheet or at the Line Number Auxillary box under the auxiliary data area.
Line numbers carry forward to successive elements so its only necessary to enter data on the first element of a new line. To assign a line number name from the Line Number Auxillary you can perform one of the following steps:
Move the cursor to the line number box or use the Quick Jump shortcut<F9> and type. If youd like CAESAR II to automatically assign a name, click the down arrow and select <New..> . The line number is named Line Number X, where X is a sequential number. Use the auto-complete feature that populates with the nearest match as you type. For example, if you have a line named 8-300-123 and you want to assign 8-150-124, Type 8 and the box automatically fills with the first line number that matches what you have typed. Press the <End> key to change the last character.
4-19
Uniform Loads
This auxiliary screen is used to enter up to three uniform load vectors (load components U1, U2 and U3). These uniform loads are applied to the entire current element, as well as all subsequent elements in the model, until explicitly changed or zeroed out with a later entry.
4-20
Piping Input
Wind/Wave
This auxiliary screen is used to specify whether this portion of the pipe is exposed to wind or wave loading. (Note that the pipe may not be exposed to both.) Selecting Wind exposes the pipe to wind loading; selecting Wave exposes the pipe to wave, current, and buoyancy loadings; selecting Off turns off both types of loading. This screen is also used to enter the Wind Shape Factor (when Wind is specified) and various wave coefficients (if left blank they will be program-computed) when Wave Loading is specified. Entries on this auxiliary screen apply to all subsequent piping, until changed on a later spreadsheet.
Note: Specific wind and wave load cases are built using the Static Load Case Editor.
4-21
Allowable Stresses
4-22
Piping Input
This auxiliary screen is used to select the piping code (from a drop list) and to enter any data required for the code check. Allowable stresses are automatically updated for material, temperature and code if available in the Material Database. Enter Material Fatigue Curve data by clicking the Fatigue Curve button. A dialog displays where users may enter stress vs. cycle data with up to 8 points per curve.
Note: IGE/TD/12 requires the entry of five fatigue curves representing fatigue classes D, E, F, G, and W.
The Fatigue Curve data may also be read in from a Intergraph CAS-supplied or user-created file. Users can access these file by clicking the Read from Files button on the Fatigue Curve dialog.
4-23
Stress Intensification Factors/Tees
This auxiliary screen is used to enter stress intensification factors, or fitting types for up to two nodes per spreadsheet. If components are selected from the drop list, CAESAR II automatically calculates the SIF values as per the applicable code (unless overridden by the user). Certain fittings and certain codes require additional data as shown. Fields are enabled as appropriate for the selected fitting.
4-24
Piping Input
Flexible Nozzles
This auxiliary screen is used to describe flexible nozzle connections. When entered using this dialog, CAESAR II automatically calculates the flexibilities and inserts them at this location. CAESAR II calculates nozzle loads according to WRC 297, API 650 or BS 5500 criteria.
4-25
Hangers
This auxiliary screen is used to describe hanger installations. Hanger data may be fully completed by the user, or the hanger may be designed by CAESAR II. In this case, two special load cases are run, the results of which are used as design parameters which are used to select the springs from the user specified catalog.
Note: CAESAR II provides catalogs for over 25 different spring hanger vendors.
4-26
Piping Input
Node Names
Activating this check box allows the user to enter text names for the From and/or To nodes (up to ten characters). These names display instead of the node numbers on the graphic plots and in the reports (note some of the names may be truncated when space is not available).
4-27
Offsets
This auxiliary screen is used to specify offsets to correct modeled element length and orientation to actual length and orientation. Offsets may be specified at From and/or To nodes.
4-28
Piping Input
Menu Commands
The CAESAR II Piping Input processor provides many commands, which can be run from the menu, toolbars or accelerator keys. The menu options are:
File Menu
The File menu is used to perform actions associated with opening, closing and running the job file.
File M enu for the Piping Input Scr een
Button and Name
Description
New Open Save Save As
Creates a new CAESAR II job. CAESAR II prompts for the name of the new model. Opens an existing CAESAR II job. CAESAR II prompts for the name Saves the current CAESAR II job under its current name. Saves the current CAESAR II job under a new name.
Save As Graphic Image Saves the current CAESAR II job as an HTML page, .TIFF, .BMP, or .JPG file. Archive Error Check Allows the user to assign a password to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or to enter the password to unlock the file. Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the first step of analysis, followed by the building of the static or dynamic load cases (see Chapter 6).
4-29
Button and Name
Description
Batch Run
Error checks the model in a non-interactive way and halts only for fatal errors; uses the existing or default static load cases, and performs the static analysis). The next step is the output processor. Allows the user to print out an input listing. CAESAR II prompts the user for the data items to include. Provides print preview of input listing. Sets up the printer for the input listing. Open a file from the list of most recently used jobs.
Print Print Preview Print Setup Recent Piping Files
4-30
Piping Input
Edit Menu
The Edit menu provides commands for cutting and pasting, navigating through the spreadsheets, and performing a few small utilities.
Button and Name Descri
Continue Duplicate
Moves the spreadsheet to the next element in the model, adding a new element if there is no next element. Duplicates elements in a block. Displays the Block Duplicate dialog box. You can make identical copies of the block. You can also make a mirror image by flipping the chosen elements in one of the orthogonal planes. Mirror imaging is done on the piping delta dimensions only. That is, restraints are copied but not mirror imaged. A +Y restraint does not become a -Y restraint when mirrored in the XZ plane.
Chapter 4 Piping Input Button and Name Descr
4-31
Change Sequence Changes or rearranges the sequence (order) of elements while preserving the geometry. Typically, the Elements dialog box displays by the order of elements entered during the input process. The order in the list is important because when you specify some particular input values for an element in the list, that value propagates to all the elements in the list following it UNTIL that value is explicitly changed. When you import piping model data (in the form of PCFs) from other piping input design software such as Intergraph Smart3D, CAESAR II imports the elements in one sequence. However, that sequence may not be what you want. For example, you may want all the high pressure elements to be listed together. This reduces the number of unique input fields to verify and can help you to logically organize the model. You can re-organize elements in a way so that those with similar carry-forward properties are placed consecutively. Invert Assigns new From Node and To Node values to the selected block of elements. The Invert command reverses the order of the elements in the selected group as well as the node numbering while preserving the geometry of the input model. Note: Contiguous segments (sets of elements) may be selected in either the Elements dialog box, the 3D Graphics pane, or the Line Numbers dialog box. The Invert command can be very helpful when you have imported a new piping input model from an external source, such as a Piping Component File (PCF), and you want to re-assign node numbers. For example, for an imported run from a termination to a tee, invert it to run from the tee to the termination. Renumber Rearrange the node numbers in the block. You can use this feature to clean up part or all of the piping system. It is not unusual to put the entire model in one block and do a full renumber of all the nodes. Caution: Make copies of any large jobs before renumbering them. Be particularly careful when renumbering systems containing large numbers of interconnected restraints with CNodes. It is common for CAESAR II not to renumber a CNode in a block. This is because the CNode is connected to a node outside the block. The CNodes are not renumbered if they do not connect to a node in the block and on the piping system. Tip: Any possible confusion can be avoided in these instances by starting the renumbering at a node greater than the largest node in the model. If all of the nodes are renumbered successfully (that is, there are not any dangling CNodes), then the node Increment command can be issued with a negative increment to shift the newly renumbered nodes back into the original range. Typically, you may graphically select multiple blocks to renumber. However CAESAR II can only perform the renumber operation for the first block. In this case, CAESAR II displays a message box with information about which block will be renumbered. You can then continue to renumber the second block and so on until all blocks are renumbered. Insert Inserts an element either before or after the current element.
4-32
Piping Input
Button and Name
Description
Delete
Deletes the selected block of elements. A confirmation message displays before the delete action is taken.
Button and Name
Description
Find
Allows the user to find an element containing one or more named nodes (if two nodes are entered, the element must contain both nodes). Enabling the Zoom To check box will display the element if found.
Button and Name
Description
Global Close Loop Increment Distance List
Prompts the user to enter global (absolute) coordinates for the first node of any disconnected segments. Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes on the spreadsheet. Gives the user the opportunity to change the automatic node increment. Calculates the distance between the origin and a node, or between two nodes. Presents the input data in an alternative, list format that displays a drop down menu where users can select any list. This provides the benefit of showing all of the element data in a context setting. The list format also permits block operations such as Duplicate, Delete, Copy, Renumber on the element data. For more information on the list input format, see the Technical Reference Manual.
4-33
List Input For mat
Button and Name
Description
Next Element Previous Element First Element Last Element
Skips to the Next Element. Goes to the Previous Element. Goes to the First Element. Goes to the Last Element.
4-34
Piping Input
Button and Name
Description
Undo
Reverses/Cancels any modeling steps done in the CAESAR II Input module one at a time. This can also be accomplished by using the he Ctrl-Z hot key or selecting Edit/Undo from the Main Menu. An unlimited number of steps (limited only by amount of available memory) may be undone. Note that making any input change while in the middle of the "undo stack" of course resets the "redo" stack.
Redo
Repeats the last step. An unlimited number of steps (limited only by amount of available memory) may be undone. Note that making any input change while in the middle of the "undo stack" of course resets the "redo" stack. Note that making any input change while in the middle of the "undo stack" of course resets the "redo" stack. Opens the Static Load Case Editor window. This button is enabled when the job is error checked. Opens the Dynamic Load Case Editor window. This button is enabled when the job is error checked.
Edit Static Load Case
Edit Dynamic Load Case Review Current Units
Located on the Edit Menu it allows users to review units used to create the report file. Changing units in the configuration file will not affect the input. To change Input units from the Main Menu use Tools-Convert Input to New Units.
4-35
Model Menu
The Model menu contains modeling aids, as well as means for entering associated, system-wide information.
M odel M enu
Button and Name
Description
Break
Allows you to break the element into two unequal length elements or into many equal length elements. A single node may be placed as a break point anywhere along the element, or multiple nodes may be placed at equal intervals the node step interval between the FROM and TO nodes determines the number of nodes placed.
Break
Br ea k Element
Note: Restraint configurations may be automatically copied from any other node in the system to the new nodes.
4-36
Piping Input
Button and Name
Description
Valve
Allows you to model a valve or flange from one of the CAESAR II databases. Choosing a combination of Rigid Type, End Type, Class and insertion point constructs a rigid element with the length and weight extracted from the database.
Valve and Fla nge Data base
Note: Selecting FLG in the CADWORX database adds the length and weight of two flanges (and two gaskets) into the selected valve.
Activates the Expansion Joint Modeler which automatically builds a complete assembly of Expansion Joints the selected expansion joint style, using the bellows stiffnesses and rigid element weights extracted from the vendors expansion joint catalogs.
Expansion J oints
4-37
Button and Name
Description
Title
Allows the user to enter a job title up to sixty lines long.
Title
Button and Name
Description
Hanger Design Control Data
Prompts the user for system - wide hanger design criteria.
Ha nger Design C ont rol Dat a
Note: System-wide hanger design criteria are used for all hanger designs unless overruled at specific hanger locations.
4-38
Piping Input
Environment Menu
The Environment menu provides some miscellaneous items.
Button and Name
Description
Allows the user to run what if tests on the Stress Intensification Factors of intersections. Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes Allows the user to run what if tests on the Stress Intensification Factors of selected bends. Review SIFs at Bend Nodes Allows the user to set options affecting the analysis of the current job. Items covered include ambient temperature, pressure stiffening, displacements due to pressure (Bourdon effect), Z-axis orientation, etc.
Special Execution Parameters
4-39
Special Execution Par a met er s
Include Piping Input FilesAllows the user to include other piping models in the current model.
Include Piping Files
4-40
Piping Input
The same file may be included more than once by highlighting it in the list, then changing the rotation angle (ROTY) or nodal increment (Inc) before clicking Add. Include Structural Input FilesAllows the incorporation of structural models into the piping model.
Include Struct ural Files
Button and Name
Description
Show Informational Messages Reset View or Refresh
Allows the user to specify whether or not you receive information messages when CAESAR II converts nominal diameter and thicknesses to actual diameter and thicknesses. Allows users to control the way graphics behave when adding new or modifying existing elements. Opens the configuration file for review and editing.
CAESAR II Configuration Option and View menu choices list graphic controls and manipulation commands.
Advanced PCF Import (APCF)

The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) option provides an interactive, customizable way of importing Piping Component Files (PCFs) to the CAESAR II piping environment. Provides more control and flexibility over element sequencing and node numbering Provides the capability to build and verify the model in an incremental way Provides the capability to selectively update the CAESAR II model An interactive interface is built directly into the CAESAR II input environment that: Does everything that the PCF batch process does (See PCF/Intergraph Smart 3D PCF doc in External Interfaces section) Builds the piping input model on a line-by-line basis if needed Provides the ability to define and control node numbering Uses the Block Operations modeling tools to ease modeling changes. You can perform the APCF function to create a new model or add to any existing job model. The CAESAR II input model constructed from the PCFs assumes the Units System of the current job, plus automatically attach/intersect the piping generated from the PCF to the existing piping, if appropriate.
4-41
The PCF file format is a standard drawing exchange format developed by Alias Ltd. A PCF is a flat text file containing detailed information about the piping system components. The information is extracted from a CAD system. Details on the format of the PCF and its capabilities can be obtained from Alias.
Converting the PCF

1. Before you begin the conversion, determine:
Which files will be converted How they should be combined How they should be numbered on the first conversion process.
2.
Click Environment > Advanced PCF Import (APCF) to begin the conversion of a PCF(s) to a CAESAR II Piping Input file. The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box displays.
3. 4.
Click Choose Files. Select the PCF(s) to convert. A PCF has a file extension of .pcf.
4-42
Piping Input
PCFs may be selected all at once or each one may be added to the conversion list just prior to being converted. Only those files with the check box selected are processed.
5.
Files can be arranged in the order you want to process them by dragging-and-dropping the file names to the desired position in the conversion list. In the example, the elements of the header, which includes files TPA-551-0012, 551-00513, 521-90100_BL, 52190100, and 521-90102, are processed first. Vents off of that header are processed next (in the example, 521-12101, 521-12113, 521-12112, 521-12111, 52112138, 521-12137, 521-10103, 521-10104, 521-90461). Finally, the separate detached section files (551-0012, 551-0041) are processed last. Set the conversion options listed in the lower left-hand pane. Condense Options Miscellaneous Options CAESAR II Element Properties The options can be set identically for all conversion passes, or they can be changed for each pass. The example uses Piping Materials based on Pipe Spec and also set a Diameter Limit (exclude pipes below 3" nominal) as well as condense rigids, tees, and bends. In this example, clear the check boxes for all files except those comprising the header. This converts the header files. To process them together, define a Start Node of 0 for files 2 through 5 ("0" signifies "carry on numbering with the next available number"). Start numbering the system with node 1000 and continue with an increment of 10. This means that all of the elements from all of the files are combined, sorted, ordered, numbered, and so forth. For example, a header from the first five files is processed before adding branches from the first file as though they came from a single large PCF. This is assured by processing a group of files together during the same process, and defining the Start Node for files after the first in the group as "0". Processing files individually or entering a Start Node (or changing the Node Increment) for specific files in the group being processed causes those files to be processed individually.
6.
Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-43 Begin the conversion by clicking the Begin Processing button. This creates the first portion of the CAESAR II piping input model. At this point, all CAESAR II functions (3D graphics pane, Classic Input Piping dialog box, Elements dialog box) are available for examining the resultant piping input model. Remember that you can use the Undo button.
7. 8.
In the example, you can select the vent lines to be processed separately, each with their own numbering system. In the example, check each of the next 9 file names, plus define the Start Node for each.
4-44
Piping Input
This causes each individual vent line to be fully processed before proceeding to the next. Alternatively these files could be processed individually simply by running them one at a time.
The vents are processed as requested. Undo is available.
9.
Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-45 Process the second detached section, with both files processed together, and the Start Node set at node at 10000.
After the conversion processing completes, the CAESAR II piping input model looks like this in the example.
4-46
Piping Input
At this point, the entries for Delta Coordinates, Temperatures, Pressures, and so forth may contain values calculated to several decimal places due to repetitive unit conversions and other calculations during the conversion process. For example, see the DX = -5390.7523 mm and the Temp 1 = 250.0214C. These entries can be automatically rounded to the nearest integer by closing the APCF Import dialog box using the "X" in the right top corner.
We recommend that this round-off process not be done until all PCFs have been imported. This is because connectivity is determined based upon sharing global coordinates. If element delta coordinates get rounded off, then nodal global coordinates may get changed enough that they fall outside of the connection tolerances.
4-47
Warnings in Log.RTF file

During the conversion process, Status Messages display in the Message Area in the lower right of the dialog box. These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name XXXX.LOG.RTF, where XXXX represents the name (less the extension) of the Combined CAESAR II file (in the case where many PCFs are being combined into a single CAESAR II model) or the first CAESAR II file in the list (where one or more PCFs are being combined into individual CAESAR II models). 1. Click Save Warnings to save the warnings to a different file.
PCF Interface Custom Attributes

PCFs contain custom attributes in the form of component-attribute<n>. Intergraph Smart3D can generate PCFs with ISO_STRESS PCF configuration. This configuration assures that a number of various data fields are passed in specific PCF data fields. COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 = Design pressure COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2 = Maximum temperature COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 = Material name COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE4 = Wall thickness (reducing thickness in the case of reducing components) COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE5 = Insulation thickness COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE6 = Insulation density COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE7 = Corrosion allowance COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE8 = Component weight COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE9 = Fluid density COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 = Hydro test pressure The units associated with the values of these attributes are defined by including a descriptive unit label after the value. For example: the pressure attribute, COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1, can be specified as "COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 15.3 barg". If the unit label chosen ("barg") is not one of the labels recognized by CAESAR II as defined through the Tools > Make Units File on the CAESAR II Main menu, then you must include that label in the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in the CAESAR II System folder. The only PCF SUPPORT attribute that is not ignored is the SUPPORT-DIRECTION attribute. It must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH. One note on the Material Number setting is that the selected material is applied to a piping element as the default only if the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 for that element is not specified or recognized. You can achieve the best results by preparing customized mapping files before beginning the conversion process. You may use default mapping files if the values fit our model. There are a number of mapping files that define various values. Locate these files in the CAESAR II system folder. PCF Unit Mapping The PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file maps the PCF Units name to the conversion factor used to convert it to the CAESAR II internal units (English). This file defines three columns: CAESAR II Unit PCF Unit Conversion from CAESAR II -> PCF Displays the internal unit used by the software Displays the user-supplied unit label Displays the conversion factor used to convert the user-supplied unit to a CAESAR II internal unit
Comments can be added at the end of each line separated from the last column value by spaces and preceded by the "*" character.
4-48
Piping Input
All PCF component attributes can be specified inside the PCF with their associated units. Any unit specified by the PCF component attributes which is not a standard internal CAESAR II unit as defined by the Tools > Make Units File dialog on the CAESAR II Main menu needs to be mapped inside the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file. CAESAR II divides the user-supplied value by this constant to calculate the value for the attribute that is displayed by the software according to the units specified in the configuration options (except that temperature from C to F will also add the 32 ).
To Modify the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT File

Locate this file in the CAESAR II system folder. 1. This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to make changes to fit your model. Open the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad. The CAESAR II default file looks like this.
2. 3.
Modify any of the units definitions or add another unit definition as needed. Save and close the file.
PCF Material Mapping The PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file maps PCF Material names to a corresponding CAESAR II material number. Note that the first line is currently reserved to the CAESAR II version number. The match in this file must be an exact match. If no match is found, then the software searches the CAESAR II material database to find the "best match" (where the "best match" tries to do an intelligent match, adjusting for dashes, spaces, "GR", "SA" versus "A", and so forth) for the material name. PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 is used by the software to set the material attribute for each component. If the COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 value is not defined or recognized, the software applies the default material as specified by the Material Number value in the dialog box. Any material specified by the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 which is not a standard CAESAR II material as defined in the Tools > Material Data Base dialog under the Material > Edit menu must be mapped inside the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file.
To Modify the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT File

This file is located in the CAESAR II system folder. 1. This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to make changes to fit your model. Open the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.
Chapter 4 Piping Input The CAESAR II default file looks like this.
4-49
2. 3.
Modify any of the materials definitions. Save and close the file.
PCF Restraint Mapping The PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II restraint types corresponding to PCF support/restraint names. The PCF SUPPORT attribute is used by CAESAR II to apply supports at the specified coordinates. Only the SUPPORTDIRECTION identifier is interpreted by the software if no match is found for a particular support NAME in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file. The SUPPORT-DIRECTION identifier must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH. In order to fine-tune the support configuration placed on the imported model by CAESAR II for a given PCF SUPPORT component, the PCF support NAME identifier value needs to be mapped in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file. This file includes instructions on the required mapping format for each PCF support. The following figure illustrates a typical PCF SUPPORT component, highlighting the support NAME value which should be used to define CAESAR II support mapping.
4-50
Piping Input
To Modify the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT File

Locate the file in the CAESAR II system folder. This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to make changes to fit your model. This file defines the CAESAR II function corresponding to PCF support/restraint names. 1. Open the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad. In the example, the Support type VG100 corresponds functionally to two CAESAR II supports: +Vertical support (weight support) Guide, each with friction coefficients equal to 0.3 This file supports a wide range of support functions, plus the key words MU= (for friction) and GAP= (to define gaps in the restraint).
Syntax for each support type is: <Support Name> <N-> <Restraint Function> <MU=> <GAP=> <Support Name> - CAESAR II considers a matching as any PCF support/restraint name that contains this <Support Name> (not an exact match). Best results are achieved if the <Support Names> are listed in order of longest names to shortest names. Otherwise VG1" might register as a match before VG100 is processed. <N>- - Followed by N lines of: This means how many CAESAR II restraints need to get placed on the corresponding Restraint auxiliary screen. N should be limited to 4 or less. <Restraint Function> - This is defined in terms of CAESAR II function (GUI, LIM, VHGR, etc.), Global Axes (VERT, NS, EW, and so forth), or Local Axes (A, B, C, and so forth): ANC, GUI, LIM, VHGR, CHGR These create a CAESAR II Anchor, Guide, Axial Restraint, Hanger, or Hanger respectively. The last two create to-be-designed hangers, which may end up as either variable or constant hangers.
Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-51 VERT, EW, NS These create translational restraints corresponding to the compass points of the global axes (Y, X, Z respectively for the Y-up setting, and Z, X, Y respectively for the Z-up setting). See the figure below. One-way restraints may be created by prefixing with "+" or "-".
A, B, C These create translational restraints corresponding to the local axes of the support/pipe installation. The "A" corresponds to the centerline of the pipe, "B" corresponds to the "direction" attributed to the support, and "C" corresponds to the cross-product of the A and B axes. As with the global restraints, one-way restraints may be created by prefixing with "+" or "-". See the figure below.
As with global restraints, one-way restraints may be created by prefixing with "+" or "-". <MU=> Optional keyword followed by a value for adding a friction coefficient to the restraint (not valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR). <GAP=> Optional keyword followed by a value and set of units for adding a gap to the restraint (not valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR). The software also processes equipment nozzles designated by the END-CONNECTION-EQUIPMENT keyword as imposed thermal displacements in all degrees of freedom, all with values of 0.0. This creates an initial behavior of an anchor, but allows you to easily impose actual thermal displacements when known. Examples: The following examples illustrate typical restraint configurations, along with suggested mapping entries.
4-52
Piping Input
Variable Spring Hanger
These represent variable spring hangers, and are mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (= VHGR). This is interpreted as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
Constant Effort Spring Hanger

This represents a constant effort spring hanger, and thus is mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (= CHGR). This is treated as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II. Note that it is identical to the VHGR shown in the figure above.
4-53
These hanger rod assemblies only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement. In CAESAR II, they are typically modeled as +Y (or +Z, depending on how the vertical axis is set).
These sliding supports only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement. They are represented as a single +VERT support. However, since they slide against a base, most stress analysts prefer to add a friction coefficient (MU=x.xx).
YRIGID 1 VERT MU=0.3 or YRIGID 1 B MU=0.3 These restraints resist load/movement in both directions (so the "+" of the previous two supports is eliminated). If the restraint is always installed vertically, then use the first definition (VERT). If the restraint is installed in any direction (for example, vertically or horizontally), use the second definition B, indicating that it acts along the installed support direction. This assumes that the installed direction of the restraint is always defined as the direction from the main steel towards the pipe. Since sliding is involved, a friction coefficient is included as well.
4-54
Piping Input
UGUIDE 1 GUI MU=0.3 or UGUIDE 1 C MU=0.3 If this restraint is always installed vertically on horizontal lines (as shown in the figure above), then the support function can always be modeled as a Guide (with sliding friction). If the restraint may be installed in any direction at all (with restraint direction corresponding to the direction of the attachment point toward the pipe), then use the second defintion ("C") as it represents the direction lateral to the pipe and the restraint.
TEESUPPORT 2 +VERT MU=0.3 GUI MU=0.3 This restraint maps to two functions: +VERTical GUIde Since sliding is involved in both functions, friction coefficients are provided for both.
VERTLATERAL VERT MU=0.3 GUI MU=0.3 or VERTLATERAL B MU=0.3 C MU=0.3
4-55
This restraint maps to two functions: up/down restraint side-to-side restraint If it is always installed vertically, then it is defined as a VERTical and a GUIde. If it is possible that the restraint may be rotated about the pipe to be installed in any direction, then use the second defintion, which represents restraint along the direction of the support as well as lateral to the support and pipe.
VERTAXIAL 2 +VERT MU=0.3 LIM MU=0.3 or VERTAXIAL 2 +VERT MU=0.3 A MU=0.3 This restraint maps to two functions: +VERT support An axial restraint. The axial restraint can be defined equally as "LIM" or "A" (as "A" corresponds to restraint along the direction of the pipe centerline).
SWAYSTRUT B
4-56
Piping Input
These represent sway struts, which may be installed in any direction, and provide restraint along the line of action of the sway strut. Assuming that the restraint direction corresponds to the direction of the sway strut, then the best way to define these restraints is "B" (restraint along the support direction).
ANCHOR ANC
These restraints all restrict movement of the pipe in all six degrees-of-freedom, so they can be defined as Anchors ("ANC").
PENETRATION +C -C -VERT +VERT
4 GAP=aMM GAP=bMM GAP=cMM GAP=dMM
Some of these can get quite complex, especially if restraints have different gaps in different directions. It may require trial and error to determine exactly how the +/- restraint directions correspond to the support direction passed in the PCF. In some cases, you may want to model the restraint behavior in CAESAR II rather than in the mapping file. 1. Modify any of the restraints definitions. 2. Save and close the file.
4-57
PCF Stress Intensification Factor Mapping The PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II SIF data to be applied at the intersection of tees and Olets. The file also provides support for some SIF keywords. Stress Intensification Factors (SIF) are not assigned a separate PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE or defined in any other way inside PCFs. In order to tune Stress Intensification Factor settings of imported PCF components, CAESAR II provides the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT mapping file. The file defines five columns: SKEYS CAESAR II SIF TYPE PAD=X.X UNITS Ii=X.XX Ii=X.XX PCF components use SKEYS to indicate how their subtype is used within the general component group. Should be set to the SIF type number used by CAESAR II as shown in the CAESAR II SIF TYPE figure below. (optional) Should be set to the SIF pad thickness including the applicable unit (for example, PAD=10 MM) (optional) Should be set to the inside SIF of the component, this is a multiplier and therefore unit-less (for example, Ii=1.23) (optional) Should be set to the outside SIF of the component, this is a multiplier and therefore unit-less (for example, Io=2.34)
Applying the above example values to set the TERF SKEY to the associated reinforced type requires the following mapping entry to be specified inside the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file: TERF 1 PAD=10 MM Ii=1.23 I0=2.34 Each PCF component defines an SKEY. For an example, see the second SUPPORT component identifier listed in Image 03 in the figure above (SKEY 01HG). In this case, these are typically four-character words indicating tee type (CROSS, OLET) and end type. The PCF menu command matches the SKEYS to the entries in this mapping file. If an SKEY is not found in this file, you should add it.
4-58
Piping Input
To Modify the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT File

Locate this file in the CAESAR II system folder. This step is strongly recommended in order to take advantage of the capabilities of the PCF menu command. 1. Open the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.
2. 3.
Modify any of the SIF definitions. Save and close the file.
4-59
How to Use the Advanced PCF Import (APCF)

1. Click Environment > Advanced PCF Import (APCF) from the Piping Input menu. The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box displays.
2.
Click the Choose Files button. A PCF must have a file extension of .pcf. You can add one or multiple files to be converted. Remove PCF(s) from the File Name list by pressing Delete on the keyboard. The selected file(s) displays in the File Name portion of the dialog box. Enter the Start Node and Increment value for each of the file names. Change any of the Conversion Options in the lower left-hand pane as needed. Click the Begin Processing button to initiate the conversion process. During the Conversion Process, Status Messages display in the Message Area in the lower right of the PCF Interface dialog box. These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name XXXX.LOG.RTF, where XXXX represents the name (less the extension) of the Combined CAESAR II file. The log file is placed in the selected CAESAR II output file folder. View your new CAESAR II input model.
3. 4. 5.
6.
4-60 For example, this CAESAR II model was created from the sample file 1001-P.PCF:
Piping Input
Elements are ordered and nodes are numbered in a logical manner. The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_UNITS_ MAP_TXT file. Materials Diameter and Wall Thickness Corrosion Allowance and Fluid Density Operating Conditions (Temperature and Pressures) also are translated. The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file. Restraints The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file. Tees convert with the correct SIFs in this case a Welding Tee and a Weldolet. Besides supports/restraints, boundary conditions such as equipment connections transfer (in this example, at all three nozzle connections are set). The user can easily change the thermal displacements. Weights of in-line components, insulation thickness and density, all material properties, and Allowable Stress information transfer correctly. Line numbers are assigned according to the name of the PCF file. In this example, the output displays the applicable CAESAR II warnings, which are informational only. Phantom components (PCF items marked as "CONTINUATION" or "STATUS DOTTED" or "MATERIAL LIST EXCLUDE") are ignored during the conversion process. Tee components are modeled using the thickness of the matching pipe. Node Numbering preferences (start node and increment) are based on the Node Numbering Increment set in the active CAESAR II Configuration file.
Start Node Indicates the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. By default, the entire model is renumbered using this value as the starting point. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Increment (on page 61) to zero.
4-61
Increment Defines the value used as a node number increment. This value is used during the renumbering of the model. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Start Node (on page 60) to zero. Condense Rigids Instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element. This indicates whether these items should be condensed/merged into adjacent elements. For example, a valve with adjacent gaskets and flanges would be combined into a single rigid element. If activated, then elements are condensed/merged unless there is a valid reason not to (change of cross section, change of operating conditions, restraint at the location, and so forth). The default value is TRUE. Condense Elbows When set to TRUE, this directive instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as two designated elements. Rather, it is condensed into its adjacent elements for each direction in which the elbow travels. The default value is TRUE.
4-62
Piping Input
Use Pipe Materials Only Instructs the software to apply pipe materials only as defined by the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 identifiers. Values can be either TRUE or FALSE. Activating this option replaces the material of various components (elbows, valves, flanges, reducers, tees, and so forth) with the appropriate piping material, where possible, leading to a much more homogenous CAESAR II model. Matching components to their corresponding piping material is done by assembling a matrix of Pipe Spec/diameter combinations, based the available data transmitted in the PCF. Where an exact match is available, the material substitution is made. Where piping materials are available for the Pipe Spec but not the diameter, a match is made to the closest diameter. Where no piping material is available for the Pipe Spec, the component material is retained. For example, A106 Grade B would be applied but A234 Grade WPB would be ignored. If you choose to condense Rigids, Tees, or Elbows, the Use Pipe Material should be set to the default of TRUE. Combine PCF Files Convert and combine PCFs in the dialog box into a single CAESAR II model. You are prompted for the name of the combined CAESAR II file. You can merge multiple PCFs into a single CAESAR II model using Combine PCF Files and have the originating PCF name become the line number. Model Rotation The rotation of the +X axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis away from the PCF's East compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation. Select +90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees. Select -90 to rotate the model a negative 90-degrees. Z can also be veritical based on special execution setting. An alternative way of rotating the model is to use the Rotate command from the Block Operations tool bar. Diameter Limit Use this to exclude the processing of small pipes, such as vents and drains, by specifying the size (nominal diameter) below which pipes will be ignored. Material Number Select the CAESAR II material to be assigned to components which do not have the material attribute explicitly set otherwise. The default is low carbon steel (material number 1). Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness Select the default schedule of the pipe to be used in case the wall thickness of the pipe cannot be determined from the PCF.
4-63
Tools Menu
The Tools menu enables users to reset the toolbar, display a list of mini windows, and import and/or export displacements.
Tools M enu for the Piping Input Screen
Button and Name
Description
Reset Toolbar Layout Mini-windows Import/Export Displacements from File
Sets Toolbars to the default layout. Provides a list of mini-windows for data input. Import/Export nodal displacements from/to a text or an Excel file.
Clicking the Import/Export Displacements from File menu option displays the Import/Export Displacements dialog.
4-64
Piping Input
Exporting Displacements To A File To export nodal displacements to a file:
1 Type the path and name of a displacement file in the text box or select the path and name of a displacement file by clicking the Browse button. 2 Click Export to send the nodal displacements to the selected file. 3 Click Done to exit the Import/Export Displacements dialog. Note: If there are no displacements in a CAESAR II job an export operation creates a displacement template file in which all nodes are listed according to the element list.
Importing Displacements From A File
4-65
To import nodal displacements from a file:
Type the path and name of the displacement file, or select a displacement file by clicking the Browse button. The Open dialog displays.
Two file formats can be used to create a displacement file: Fixed format with a .disp file extension. Commas Separated Value format with a .csv file extension. By default, displacement files display in comma separated values format(.csv). Users can also choose displacement files with the fixed format (.disp) by clicking Displacement Import File (*.dsp) from the Files of type box, as displayed below:
4-66
Piping Input
5 Browse the folders to search and then select the appropriate displacement file. 6 Open the selected file by either double-clicking the file name or clicking Open. 7 Click Import. During the import process, if an erroneous condition is detected for a displacement node a warning messages will display. Finally, a summary report is generated after all displacement data is processed. The Import/Export Displacements dialog may resemble the dialog below after importing a displacement file to a CAESAR II model.
For more details about warning messages and the summary report, refer to the Importing an Exporting Displacements of Auxiliary Fields Imposed Loads section, in the Piping Screen Reference chapter. After reviewing warning messages and a summary report, users can exit the Import/Export Displacements dialog by clicking Done. The first two screen captures show what displacement files look like in Notepad for both disp and csv formats. The third and fourth screen captures show what displacement files in Microsoft Excel. For a detailed description of both file formats, refer to the Importing and Exporting Displacements of Auxiliary Fields Imposed Loads section.
Notepa d Exa mple (*.disp) forma t
4-67
Notepa d Exa mple (*.csv) for ma t
Excel Example (*.csv) for mat
4-68
Piping Input
If a CAESAR II job has no displacements the displacement export operation creates a displacement template file as shown below.
Excel Example (*.csv) for mat Displacement File Templat e
4-69
3-D Modeler
Start CAESAR II and launch the Piping Input Processor. Once in the input, the graphic automatically plots and displays to the right of the Classic Piping Input window. To increase the window space available for graphics the Classic Piping Input window may be hidden from view on the side panel by clicking the thumbtack. The initial view for a job never plotted before is displayed according to the configuration defaults that include: A rendered view- restraints shown XYZ compass - isometric view Tees and nozzles highlighted- orthographic projection The plotting begins by displaying the model in centerline/single line mode to speed up the process. Then all the elements get changed to their intended state (they are rendered one by one). Later, the restraints and other relevant items are added.
Note: The model is fully operational while actually being drawn. You can apply any available option to the model at any time. The status bar at the bottom displays the drawing progress in the form of Drawing element X of Y. When the plot operation is complete the status message changes to Ready.
4-70
Piping Input
When the mouse cursor hovers over the buttons the button's name displays, and a short description of the buttons functionality displays in the status bar at the bottom of the view window. There are several methods of accomplishing nearly every command in the Input Plot Utility. Commands may be accessed by clicking buttons, selecting drop-down menu items, or through the use of hot keys.
Center Line View
Users may wish to verify model data in single line mode; this often makes the view clearer, click this button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other element information items still display. A Volume or double line plot can be obtained by clicking the corresponding button. Also, pressing the V key on the keyboard will switch the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center Line View. Users may wish to verify model data in single line mode; this often makes the view clearer, click the Center Line View button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other element information items still display. A Volume or double line plot can be obtained by clicking the corresponding button. Also, pressing the V key on the keyboard will switch the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center Line View. Users may wish to verify model data in single line mode; this often makes the view clearer, click the Center Line View button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other element information items still display. A Volume or double line plot can be obtained by clicking the corresponding button. Also, pressing the V key on the keyboard will switch the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center Line View. Users may wish to verify model data in single line mode; this often makes the view clearer, click the Center Line View button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other element information items still display. A Volume or double line plot can be obtained by clicking the corresponding button. Also, pressing the V key on the keyboard will switch the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center Line View. Users may wish to verify model data in single line mode; this often makes the view clearer, click the Center Line View button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other element information items still display. A Volume or double line plot can be obtained by clicking the corresponding button. Also, pressing the V key on the keyboard will switch the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center Line View. Users may wish to verify model data in single line mode; this often makes the view clearer, click the Center Line View button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other element information items still display. A Volume or double line plot can be obtained by clicking the corresponding button. Also, pressing the V key on the keyboard will switch the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center Line View.
Shaded View
Silhouette
Hidden Line Wire Frame
Wire Frame
Translucent
4-71
Button and Name
Description
Front
Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button, Front/Back/Top Bottom/ Left/Right. Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively. Additionally, holding down the SHIFT key while pressing X, Y, or Z keys will show left, bottom, or back views respectively. This option is useful to see the model just like it would be seen on a CAD drawing. Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button, Front/Back/Top/ Bottom/ Left/Right. Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively. Additionally, holding down the SHIFT key while pressing X, Y, or Z keys will show left, bottom, or back views respectively. This option is useful to see the model just like it would be seen on a CAD drawing. Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button, Front/Back/Top/Bottom Left/Right. Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively. Additionally, holding down the SHIFT key while pressing X, Y, or Z keys will show left, bottom, or back views respectively. This option is useful to see the model just like it would be seen on a CAD drawing. Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button, Front/Back/Top/Bottom/Left/ Right. Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively. Additionally, holding down the SHIFT key while pressing X, Y, or Z keys will show left, bottom, or back views respectively. This option is useful to see the model just like it would be seen on a CAD drawing. Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button, Front/Back/Top/Bottom/Left/ Right. Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively. Additionally, holding down the SHIFT key while pressing X, Y, or Z keys will show left, bottom, or back views respectively. This option is useful to see the model just like it would be seen on a CAD drawing. Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button, Front/Back/Top/Bottom/Left/ Right. Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively. Additionally, holding down the SHIFT key while pressing X, Y, or Z keys will show left, bottom, or back views respectively. This option is useful to see the model just like it would be seen on a CAD drawing. Displays an isometric view this option may be activated by pressing the F10 key on the keyboard. Displays Node numbers by clicking the Node Numbers button, by pressing the N key on or by clicking OPTIONS/NODE NUMBERS from then menu. Users can also opt to display node numbers for a specific element i.e., only restraints or only anchors.
Back
Top
Bottom
Left
Right
ISO View Node Numbers
4-72
Piping Input
Button and Name
Description
Show Length
Displays element lengths by clicking the Show Lengths button or by pressing the L key on the keyboard. Alternatively, the same functionality can be achieved from the menu by clicking OPTIONS/LENGTHS. This will display the elements lengths to verify the input. Select Element and using the mouse to hover over the model produces a bubble displaying relevant information for the desired element. For more information refer to the 3D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, Wind/Wave Loads section later in this chapter. Select Group and using the mouse to hover over the model produces a bubble displaying relevant information for the desired group of elements. For more information refer to the 3D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, Wind/Wave Loads section later in this chapter. The transition from one orthogonal view to another is a smooth transition. It is possible to make a sudden change/jump by pressing a combination of the CTRL + ALT + F5 keys before changing the view with one of the described options. The sudden jump option is useful for relatively large models as it speeds up the viewing process. The transition from one orthogonal view to another is a smooth transition. It is possible to make a sudden change/jump by pressing a combination of the CTRL + ALT + F5 keys before changing the view with one of the described options. The sudden jump option is useful for relatively large models as it speeds up the viewing process.
Select Element
Select Group
Perspective
Orthographic
Note: For a clearer view, nodes, restraints, hangers, and anchors can be turned off. The boundary condition symbols (like restraints, anchors, and hangers} size is relative to the pipe size OD. In addition the symbol (i.e., restraints and/or hangers) size may be changed manually by clicking the black arrow to the right of the relevant button and selecting the Size option from the drop down menu.
Users can adjust the color of the node numbers, lengths, elements, boundary conditions, etc. by clicking the Change Display Options button, for more information refer to the 3D Graphics Configuration section later in this chapter. The model can be panned using the mouse, by activating the Pan button. After clicking the button, the cursor changes to a hand; and the view may be panned by moving the mouse while holding down the left mouse button. The view may also be panned from under any other command by holding down the middle mouse button/mouse wheel while moving the mouse (when applicable).
Reset Plot
All the highlighting and zoom/rotate effects on the model as well as other effects may be reset at once by clicking this button. The model returns to its default state as defined by the configuration; any elements hidden by the Range command are restored, for more information refer to the Range section for details.
4-73
Button and Name
Description
Zoom
The model can be zoomed by clicking the Zoom button, and moving the mouse up or down while depressing the left mouse button. Releasing the mouse button halts the zoom. Note that while in the zoom mode, the keyboard + and - keys may be used to zoom the model in and out. Alternatively, the model may also be zoomed from under any other command or mode by rotating the mouse wheel when applicable. The best way to zoom to a particular area of the model is to use the mouse to draw a rubber band box around the desired area.
Zoom to Window Simply click the Zoom to Window button, then left-click one corner of the desired area, and stretch a box diagonally to the opposite corner of the area while still holding the left mouse button down. When the left button is released, the model zooms to the selected area. Note that while in the zoom mode, the keyboard + and - keys may be used to zoom the model in and out. Alternatively, the model may also be zoomed from under any other command or mode by rotating the mouse wheel when applicable. The best way to zoom to a particular area of the model is to use the mouse to draw a rubber band box around the desired area. Zoom to Selection Zoom to Extents To see a specific element on the model on the screen click this button. To see the entire model on the screen, click the Zoom to Extents button. Note that while in the zoom mode, the keyboard + and - keys may be used to zoom the model in and out. Alternatively, the model may also be zoomed from under any other command or mode by rotating the mouse wheel when applicable. The best way to zoom to a particular area of the model is to use the mouse to draw a rubber band box around the desired area. Interactive rotation of the model can be accomplished by clicking the Orbit button. Once this mode is activated, rotate the model by using the mouse or the arrow keys on the keyboard. To use a mouse for rotating the model, click the left mouse button on the model (the bounding box will be drawn to outline the model boundaries; while holding down the left mouse button, move the mouse around to the desired position. When the mouse button is released, the view is updated and the bounding box disappears. If the bounding box is not visible, check the corresponding box on the User Options tab of the Plot Configuration dialog for more information refer to the 3D Graphics Configuration section for details. Note, during rotation operation (only for speedup purposes) the model may be changed to the centerline/ single line mode view or some of the geometry details may disappear or become distorted. The actual conversion will depend on the size and complexity of the model. Once the rotation is complete, the model returns to its original state. Another method of orbiting the model is the Gyro-operator. Activate this feature by pressing the G key. After pressing the G key, the model performs a full 360-degree rotation in the plane of view. Pan Holding the mouse wheel down and moving the mouse up, down, left, or right, provides the panning effects of riding the elevator up/down or stepping to the side, similar to using the keyboard keys Q, Z, A, or D. The mouse cursor will change to a hand icon.
Orbit
4-74
Piping Input
Button and Name
Description
Walk Through Load CADWorx Model
Enables users to explore the scene of the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality application. It produces the effect of walking towards the model Displays the model in CADWorx.
3D Graphics Configuration
The CAESAR II 3D Graphics engine remembers the state of the model between sessions. Exiting the input completely and then returning to the input graphics results in the model being displayed in the same state in which it was last viewed. To obtain a more uniform look of graphics users may change the color and font options under TOOLS/CONFIGURE/SETUP/3D VIEWER SETTINGS. Check the Always Use System Fonts and Always Use System Colors boxes located under the Default Visual Settings section. These settings will then be stored in the computer's registry and CAESAR II will always display the graphics according to these settings.
4-75
If the check boxes described above are unchecked then the state of each model is maintained individually (job related), as an XML data file (jobname.XML) in the current data directory. After launching another input session, CAESAR II reads this XML file and restores the 3D graphics to its previous state. This includes the rotation and zoom level of the model; color settings, data display, and the current graphics operator. Most of the display options can be adjusted by clicking the Change button. The tabs of the Plot Configuration dialog control include: basic graphics colors, font selection and size for textural data, user startup settings, and visibility (the degree of transparency.
Option
Description
Colors
Selecting any item in the list, then clicking Change, displays a Windows color selection tool. Selecting the desired color and clicking OK changes the color of the selected item to the new color. The rotating spring hanger is used to actively view the color selection combinations before altering the entire plot window. Use this tool to prevent selecting unsatisfactory color combinations. Colors may be reset to CAESAR II defaults, as defined in configuration, by clicking Reset All. Selecting any item in the list, then clicking Change, displays the standard Windows font selection tool. Making the desired changes and clicking OK updates the selected item. Similar to the Colors tab, the relative size, color, as well as the font face of the selected text item can be previewed in the Font Sample window of the Fonts tab before changing the entire model.
Fonts
4-76
Piping Input
4-77
User Options
Specifies the initial display configuration when plotting a model in an input session. The 3D Graphics can be configured (on an individual job basis) to restart in a specific manner. The graphics can start with a preset operator active (such as zoom with mouse), or start with the last operator used still active. Likewise, the graphics can start in a preset view (such as isometric), or in the last rotated zoomed position.
Option
Description
Bounding Box Hide Overlapped Text
Determines if rotations, via the mouse, includes an outline box surrounding the model. Prevents text from appearing on top of other text items thereby producing a distortion.
Restore Last Operator Determines whether the graphics engine remembers your last action (operator) between sessions or always defaults to a specified action (operator) on startup. Disabling the check box activates the Operator Selection radio buttons. Restore Previous View Default Projection Visibility Determines whether the graphics engine remembers the last displayed view of the model, or defaults to a specified view. Disabling the check box activates the Initial View radio buttons. Determines the initial projection style of the model. CAESAR II Graphics automatically default to orthographic projection. Alters the degree of transparency, when translucent pipe is activated. When the Translucent Objects button is enabled, it allows viewing through the pipe. This is especially useful for viewing jacketed piping or piping inside of vessels. Moving the slider to the right increases the degree of visibility, making it easier to see through the pipe elements.
4-78
Piping Input
Note: The Visibility option is only effective when viewing the model in rendered mode, and can be activated by clicking the Translucent Objects button.
Option Description
Markers
Displays a symbol denoting the elements end points.
Note: Clicking OK on the Plot Configuration dialog saves all changes made to any tab and modifies the models view. Clicking Cancel will disregard all changes made.
4-79
HOOPS Toolbar Manipulations

HOOPS Graphics also provides the ability to adjust the graphics toolbar for the purpose of rearranging or removing buttons. There are two methods to make these adjustments, the first method is to right click on the toolbar and click Customize. The second method involves removing or repositioning the button using the drag and drop method. To remove buttons from the toolbar click the down arrow located at the end of each toolbar and then click Remove. To add button removed from the toolbar by clicking the down arrow and clicking Add. To rearrange buttons select them, one at a time, while pressing the ALT key and then drag it to the desired location. To restore the CAESAR II default toolbar configuration, click the Reset button. In addition to the use of the Customize button, individual buttons can be removed or repositioned by pressing the ALT key, and dragging the desired button. To remove a button, drag it off the graphics window, using the left mouse button. To reposition a button, drag it to the desired location, using the left mouse button. When the mouse button is released, the button will be placed on the toolbar at the selected location.
Multiple View Ports
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics module provides up to 4 views, which can be sized, rotated, and annotated individually by the user. Four Views Enables manipulation of model by users provides up to 4 views, which can be sized, rotated, and annotated individually by the user.
To control the splitter handle, click the Four Views button. It automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers (splitter bars on the screen, and changes the mouse cursor to a four-way arrow icon. You can change the position of the splitter bars (and correspondingly the relative size of the views by moving the mouse around. After finding the desired location, click the left mouse button once to fix the position. The vertical and horizontal splitter bars can also be dragged or resized individually: after hovering the mouse over a splitter bar, the mouse cursor will change to vertical or horizontal resize correspondingly. For example, to change the position of the vertical split bar, using the left mouse button, grab the splitter bar and drag it to the right. When the mouse button is released, all the panes are updated. If the splitter bar is dragged to the view frame border, it disappears, and the number of views is decreased in half. This is true for both the horizontal and vertical splitter bars. When the last splitter bar is dragged away to the view frame border, the single view is left. It is also possible to drag from the intersection of the horizontal and vertical dividers to any corner of the view to eliminate 3 views at once. Another way to divide the view into two or four independent views is to drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bars with the mouse. Notice the two splitter bars at the graphics processor window, one is at the far left of the horizontal scroll bar, and the other is at the very top of the vertical scroll bar. Using the left mouse button, grab the lower left splitter bar and drag it to the right. The graphics window splits into two panes, left and right. When the mouse button is released, both panes are updated. Again using the left mouse button, grab the upper right splitter bar and drag it down. The two existing panes split into two additional panes, upper and lower. When the mouse button is released, all four panes are updated, with the X axis view in the upper left pane, the Y axis view in the upper right pane, the Z axis view in the lower left pane, and a isometric (or original) view in the lower right pane.
Note: The image in any of these panes can be manipulated individually. Each pane can be rotated, panned, or zoomed independently of the other panes.
4-80
Piping Input
3D Graphic Highlights: Diameters, Wall, Insulation, Cladding & Refractory Thickness, Materials, Piping Codes
Often it is necessary to review the piping model in the context of certain data, for example, by diameter, wall thickness, temperature, or pressure. These operations are illustrated below.
Diameters
When Diameters is clicked, the display updates to show each diameter in a different color. A color key (legend) is included at the bottom of the plot in its own pane. This option can be used to quickly see the diameter variations throughout the system. This option is a good way to verify that diameter changes have been made where appropriate. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Diameters menu options. Alternatively, users may press the D- key to view different diameters. Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Wall Thickness menu option. Alternatively, the user may use the corresponding user may press the W- key to view the different wall thicknesses throughout the model. Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Insulation menu options. Alternatively, users may use the corresponding user may press the I- key to view the insulation. Clicking the black arrow to the right of the Insulation Thickness button displays the additional thickness choices available: Cladding and Refractory.
Wall Thickness
Insulation Thickness
Cladding Thickness Clicking the black arrow to the right of the Insulation Thickness button displays the additional thickness choices available: Cladding and Refractory. Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Cladding Thickness option. Refractory Thickness Clicking the black arrow to the right of the Insulation Thickness button displays the additional thickness choices available: Cladding and Refractory. Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Refractory Thickness option Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Materials menu option. Alternatively, users may press the M - key to view different materials. Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Piping Codes menu options
Materials
Piping Codes
4-81
Note: The legend window may be resized, docked, and/or removed from view. Note: While in the described highlighted mode, the model can still be zoomed, panned and rotated. Any of orthographic projections and single line/volume modes can be used without affecting the model highlighted state. Note: Clicking the same button twice will deactivate the coloring effect.
Note: The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting Materials, Piping Codes, Diameters, Wall Thickness, or Insulation Thickness menu options. Alternatively, the user may use the corresponding keyboard keys: M - to view different materials, D - to view different diameters, W - to view different wall thicknesses throughout the model, and I - to view the insulation.
Note: When the model is being printed using FILE MENU/ PRINT while in one of the highlighted modes described herein, the color key legend will appear in the upper left corner of the page. This is always true, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the view. 3D Graphics Highlights: Corrosion and Densities
Often it is necessary to review the piping model in the context of certain data, for example, by corrosion allowance, pipe, fluid, insulation, cladding or refractory density, or Insulation Cladding/Unit Weight. These operations are explained below.
Button Description
Corrosion Allowance
Enables you to see the Corrosion Allowance. The model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Corrosion Allowance option Enables you to see the Pipe Density. The model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Pipe Density option Enables you to see the Fluid Density. Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Fluid Density option. Enables you to see the Insulation Density. Clicking the black arrow to the right of the Insulation Density button displays the additional density choices available: Cladding, Refractory and Insulation Cladding/Unit Weight. Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Insulation Density option
Pipe Density
Fluid Density
Insulation Density
4-82
Piping Input
Button
Description
Cladding Density
Enables you to see the Cladding Density. Clicking the black arrow to the right of the Insulation Density button displays the additional density choices available: Cladding and Refractory. Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Cladding Density option.
Refractory Density Enables you to see the Refractory Density. Clicking the black arrow to the right of the Insulation Density button displays the additional density choices available: Cladding and Refractory. Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Refractory Density option Insulation/Cladding Enables you to see the Insulation/Cladding Unit Weight. Clicking the black arrow to the Unit Weight right of the Insulation Density button displays the additional density choices available: Cladding, Refractory and Insulation/Cladding Unit Weight. Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Insulation/Cladding Unit Weight option
Note: The legend window may be resized, docked, and/or removed from view. Note: While in the described highlighted mode, the model can still be zoomed, panned and rotated. Any of orthographic projections and single line/volume modes can be used without affecting the model highlighted state. Note: Clicking the same button twice deactivates the coloring effect. Note: You can achieve the same functionality from the Options menu by selecting the Corrosion Allowance, Piping Density, Fluid Density, Insulation Density, Cladding Density Refractory Density or Insulation/Cladding Unit Weight menu options.
Alternatively, you may use the corresponding keyboard keys: M - to view different materials, D - to view different diameters, W - to view different wall thicknesses throughout the model, and I - to view the insulation.
Note: When the model is being printed using FILE MENU/ PRINT while in one of the highlighted modes described herein, the color key legend will appear in the upper left corner of the page. This is always true, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the view.
4-83
3D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, Wind/Wave Loads

The 3D/HOOPS Graphics engine can display applied/predefined displacements, forces, uniform loads, or wind/wave loads in tabular format. You can scroll the display windows vertically and or horizontally to view all node points where data has been defined. To flip through the defined displacement or force vectors 1 through 9, use the Next and Previous buttons at the bottom of the tabular legend window. The color key at the far left of the window assists in locating the node points on the model (when the model geometry is complex). The displacements window shows the user-specified values as well as free or fixed Degrees of Freedom (DOF). In this case, a DOF is free if a displacement value is not specified in any of the displacement load vectors. Note also that if a certain DOF has a specified displacement in at least one of the load vectors, then it is fixed in all other load vectors.
Forces
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics can display applied/predefined displacements and /or forces in a tabular format. The display windows can be scrolled vertically and or horizontally to view all node points where data has been defined. To flip through the defined displacement or force vectors 1 through 9, use the Next and Previous buttons at the bottom of the tabular legend window. The color key at the far left of the window assists in locating the node points on the model (when the model geometry is complex). Forces behave similar to the Displacements option, the model elements are highlighted for a particular force vector, and the color key legend grid window displays on the left. The node number in combination with a color key specifies the location where the force and moment values are defined.
Uniform Loads
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics can display uniform loads in a tabular format. Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node number where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Since the data propagates throughout the model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly. The 3D/HOOPS Graphics can display wind/wave loads in a tabular format. Wind/Wave also displays the loading coefficients. The color key is defined as follows: all the elements with wind defined are colored in red color; all the elements with wave data defined are colored in green color. The legend grid shows the relevant data items defined by the user.
Wind/Wave
4-84
Piping Input
Note: The legend window may be resized, docked and/or removed from the view. Note: While in the described highlighted mode, the model can still be zoomed, panned and rotated. Any of orthographic projections and single line/volume modes can still be used without affecting the model highlighted state. Note: Clicking the same button twice deactivates the coloring effect. Note: You can achieve the same functionality from the Options Menu by selecting the relevant options. Alternatively, you can access Predefined Displacements by pressing F3 on the keyboard. Forces/moment vectors can be accessed by pressing F5 on the keyboard. Note: When the model is being printed using FILE MENU/PRINT while in one of the highlighted modes described herein, the color key legend appears on the second page following the model bitmap image. The printed legend is presented in the tabular form similar to the legend window.
Select Element allows you to obtain element data. When enabled, hovering over a pipe element with the mouse shows a bubble with the element's nodes, delta dimensions, and pipe size data. Clicking on an element highlights the element and updates the information on the spreadsheet. Clicking a different element highlights the relevant element and changes the data in the spreadsheet accordingly.
Note: Clicking the empty space of the graphics view de-highlights the element. The spreadsheet will still contain the information from the last element selected.
4-85
Limiting the Amount of Displayed Info; Find Node, Range & Cutting Plane
Sometimes it is necessary to limit the amount of displayed information on the screen. This may be useful when the model is large, or if it has many similar looking branches. There are several ways to achieve this result by clicking the Find Node, Range, or Cutting Plane button. The description of these operations, their advantages and disadvantages are illustrated below.
Find Node
Allows redlining based on the user moving the mouse. Find Node is useful when a specific node or an element needs to be located. Clicking Find Node displays a dialog prompting for the FROM and TO nodes to search for. The node numbers can be entered in either of the two fields, or in both. Entering only the FROM node number causes the feature to search for the first available element that starts with the specified node number. Entering only the TO node number causes the feature to search for an element ending with the specified node number. When the element is located, it is highlighted, and the view zooms to the element. You can zoom out to better identify the location of the highlighted element within the model. Allows redlining using a rectangular shape. This option is also useful when trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements/node numbers are not defined consecutively. Thus, it may be easier to cut a portion of the model at a certain location to see more details. For this operation, use the Create Cutting Plane button. When the cutting plane appears, use the handles to move and or rotate the plane as desired. If cutting the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, the view may be focused too close for the plane to operate correctly. Use the Zoom button to zoom out; then click the Cutting Plane button again for the handles to appear. To disable the cutting plane and return to view click on the display with the right mouse button. Note the Create Cutting Plane option can be used along any of the three axes.
Create Cutting Plane
Create Cutting Plane Horizontally
Allows redlining using a circular shape. This option is useful when trying to emphasize a specific element. To disable the cutting plane and return to view click on the display with the right mouse button. Note the Create Cutting Plane option can be used along any of the three axes.
Create Cutting Plane Vertically
Allows the user to enter text and place it anywhere in the plot area. To disable the cutting plane and return to view click on the display with the right mouse button. Note the Create Cutting Plane options can be used along any of the three axes.
4-86
Piping Input
Range plots only those elements that contain nodes within the range specified by the user. This is particularly helpful when attempting to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a rather large, often symmetrical model. Click the Range button or press the U key to display the Range dialog.
A sorted list of all defined node numbers with corresponding check marks appears. Clicking a check box next to a particular node number will enable or disable it.
Note: Only elements with check marks on will display when OK is clicked. If the Range option was previously used, consecutive clicks will display the dialog with the current state of the shown/hidden elements and the corresponding check marks.
Range enables the selection and dragging of consecutive node numbers (click the left mouse button on the first node of the desired selection, then move the mouse while holding the mouse button down, and release the button at the last node of the desired selection). Alternatively, users may click the first node, press the SHIFT key and click the last node of the selection using the mouse button. Clicking the check mark with the rectangle once toggles the status that is applied to the entire highlighted selection. Use the FROM and TO fields together with the Add button to specify and/or add to the range of elements that are already selected. If only the FROM node is specified and Add is clicked, all elements (from this node and up will be selected). Clicking the Reverse Selection button toggles the check marks for the elements to show: it displays the previously hidden elements, and hides the previously displayed elements. When Clear All is enabled, none of the elements are selected (and the graphics view appears blank). Use this button to clear the selection. Note, if none of the elements are selected, and OK is clicked, the view becomes blank. To show the entire model, click the Select All button.
Note: Using the Range option affects the display and operation of other 3D Graphics Highlighting options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the Range option, then clicking the Show Diameters option will only highlight the elements that are actually visible. Also if using the Range option hides any nodes containing the predefined displacements, the Displacements legend grid still appears, but the model may not be properly highlighted.
4-87
Note: Find Node may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the Range. The corresponding message will also appear in the status bar. Save an Image for Later Presentation: TIF, HTML, BMP, JPEG and PDF
Occasionally, it is necessary to add a graphical representation of a model to the CAESAR II Stress reports. The 3D/HOOPS Graphics view can be saved as a bitmap by clicking FILE/ SAVE AS GRAPHICS IMAGE. The model geometry, colors, highlighting, as well as restraints and most of the other options will be transferred to the bitmap. After clicking Save As Graphics Image the Save Image dialog appears asking the user to specify the desired file name and a directory for the file to be saved. The default bitmap file name is the job name with an extension .TIF. (This is a standard, Windows supported image file extension that can be opened for viewing.) The image resolution can also be changed in the Save Image dialog.
Note: This is a static bitmap file.

Due to certain limitations of the 3D/HOOPS modeler, the legend window and text cannot be saved to the bitmap. However, all coloring, as well as the annotations and markups are successfully saved. You now have the option to save the graphics as .HTML file. After saving as .HTML CAESAR II creates two files in the current data directory using the current job name: *.HTML and *.HSF. Opening the .HTML file should display the corresponding .HSF file. Note this is an interactive file. The first time a CAESAR II created .HTML file is opened with an Internet browser, the user receives a message asking to download a control from Tech Soft 3D. Answer Yes to allow the download, and the image will be displayed. Once the model appears, selecting and right-clicking the model shows the available viewing options, such as orbit, pan, zoom, different render modes, etc. The image can be printed or copied to the clipboard as necessary.
Note: Internet Explorer (IE) version 5.0 and earlier may not display the image properly, Intergraph CAS recommends IE6 or later.
Button and Name
Description
Annotations
Used to highlight a problem area, or write a brief description of the model. The annotation may be especially useful in the output processor for more information refer to the discussion at the end of this section.
The CAESAR II 3D/HOOPS Graphics processor provides several types of annotation as discussed below. When the Annotate Model button is clicked, the annotation text box with a leader line to an element is added to the graphics view. To add the annotation, click with the left mouse button on a particular element to start the leader line, while holding the mouse button down drag the leader line to the annotation point, then type in the annotation text, and then press the Enter key.
Note: The annotation text box is only a single line.
4-88
Piping Input
Note: Annotation with leader stays with the model on zoom, pan, rotate, and use of any highlight options. Annotation also gets printed to the printer and saved to the bitmap. Annotations are not saved to the HTML file. Note: The color and font face/size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Change Display Options, for more information refer to the 3D Graphics Configuration section in this chapter.
Other annotation options are listed below:
Freehand Markup Operator Rectangle Markup Circle Markup Annotate Operator
Allows redlining based on the user moving the mouse. Allows redlining using a rectangular shape. This option is useful when trying to emphasize a specific element Allows redlining using a circular shape. This option is useful when trying to emphasize a specific element Allows the user to enter text and place it anywhere in the plot area.
It may be used to add a short description of the model to the graphics image for printing or saving as a bitmap.
Note: This markup annotation text box is only a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be changed the default color is red. Note: Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer. Note: The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary; they are not saved with the model, and disappear from view with any change like zoom, rotate, pan or reset all.
4-89
3D Graphics Interactive Feature: Walk Through

CAESAR II enables users to explore the scene of the model with a feature similar in operation to a virtual reality game. It produces the effect of walking towards the model; and once close to or inside the model users can look left, right, up, and down, step to a side, or ride an elevator up and down. Walk is useful in providing a real-time interactive view of the model. Click Walk Through the mouses cursor displays as a pair of feet. , to enables this feature. After clicking Walk Through
Walking Around
Users can begin walking by clicking and holding the left mouse button. Move forward by moving the mouse toward the top of the window, back by doing the opposite. Walk Through also provides an additional control that aids in navigation. Clicking the various hot spots on the control duplicates mouse movements with the added benefit of providing the ability to move in a perfectly straight line. In addition Walk Through also provides users with the added functionality of determining the walking speed. In general, walking speed is determined by the distance between where you first click and how far you move the mouse. The keys below which, if held down while walking, effect walk through's operation: <Shift> - Changes the walk mode to run mode, effectively doubling the walk speed. <Ctrl> - Changes the walk mode to slow mode, effectively halving the walk speed. <Alt> - Enables users to look left or right without changing the walk path. Releasing the key, automatically returns your viewpoint to looking forward. To exit from this option, click any other operator.
Resizing Models
The Resize Geometry button enables you to change the geometry of the model.
Resizing a Model 1. Click this button and the marker control point appears at all nodes and every tangent point (on bends, it displays on the far weld-line). 2. Left-click and rubber band the nodes you want to move. 3. Release the button, then place the cursor (the arrow) on any one of the selected nodes. 4. Click the left node button down and up to place the mouse is in move mode. 5. The mouse movement will be clamped to either the x, y, or z axis. To change the axis use the [TAB] key or click 1 of the Axis buttons on this same toolbar. Another left-click sets the new location and the model geometry is updated. Alternatively, you can enter the magnitude of the desired movement. If a single number is entered, the movement will be applied to the currently selected axis. You can move in multiple directions at once by typing <x-value>, <y-value>, <z-value>.
Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases In This Chapter

Error Checking ...................................................................... 5-2 Static Load Case Editor......................................................... 5-6 Building Static Load Cases ................................................... 5-8 Providing Wind Data ............................................................ 5-17 Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters.................................. 5-19 Execution of Static Analysis ................................................. 5-20 Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases ........................................ 5-23
5-2
Error Checking
Static analysis cannot be performed until the error checking portion of the piping preprocessor has been successfully completed. Only after error checking is completed are the required analysis data files created. Similarly, any subsequent changes made to the model input are not reflected in the analysis unless error checking is rerun after those changes have been made. CAESAR II does not allow an analysis to take place if the input has been changed and not successfully error checked.
Button Description
Error Check
Error Checking can only be done from the input spreadsheet, and is initiated by executing the Error Check or Batch Run commands from the toolbar or menu. Error Check saves the input and starts the error checking procedure. Batch Run causes the program to check the input data, analyze the system, and present the results without any user interaction. The assumptions are that the loading cases to be analyzed do not need to change and that the default account number (if accounting active) is correct. These criteria are usually met after the first pass through the analysis. Batch processing focuses the users attention on the creation of input and the review of output by expediting the steps in between.
Batch Run
Once launched, the Error Checker reviews the CAESAR II model and alerts users to any possible errors, inconsistencies, or noteworthy items. These items display to users as Errors, Warnings, or Notes in a grid. The total number of errors, warnings, or notes displays in corresponding text fields above the Message Grid. Users may sort messages in the Message Grid by type, message number, or element/node number by double-clicking the corresponding column header. Users can also print messages displayed in the Message Grid by clicking FILE/PRINT.
Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases
5-3
Fatal Error Message

Errors are flagged when there is a problem with the model due to analysis that cannot continue. An example of this would be if no length were defined for a piping element. These errors are also called fatal errors, since they are fatal to the analysis, and must be corrected before continuing. Clicking on the error message will move the spreadsheet display to the offending element. Users can change the view between the spreadsheet and error warning views using the tabs located at the bottom of the window. .
5-4
Warring Message
Warnings are flagged whenever there is a problem with a model, which can be overcome using some assumptions. An example of this would be if the wall thickness of an element were insufficient to meet the minimum wall thickness for the given pressure (hoop stress). Warnings need not be conected to get a successful analysis, but users should review all warnings carefully as they are displayed.
: Eile dit odel En:=!_ironment Q ptions :ii ew ools t1elp
EE 8 - I&J-[jl]- [j!]a<.:a S3 QQ;D @]1 -.o - 1 0 IU irf=- 1 i D 13 ldI1:D CB I .. I I CO - .I I Jr: J

t
Errors and Warnings
e - I A i t!iol &- I <".>
+ +I tt I
(ru 101 li!il

II X
:Errors: 0
Warnings: 1
Notes: 1
10-20
[ Classic Piping Input
1Errors and Warnings
load Cases
5-5
Note Message
The third categol)' of alert is the informational note. These messages inform the user of some noteworthy fact related to the model. An example of a note may be a message informing the user of the number of hangers to be designed by CAESAR II. For notes, there is nothing for the user to correct
Eile dit Model Enyironment Qptions iew Iools t:felp
lHl l le!l!E] [j] [@JA' .:0.E)IQI @BI -;r I 0 lD 10 1;;t I W [Q Iii I H El l lA M I <\
ii)
g
1
!01!5=- I i 1 0 I ""I e. :!:II do

I
g -lI <'.>
+ -+ I tt I:
1\1 I(ru IEil @l

q. x
oQ l
Errors and Warnings :Errors: 0
I Warnings:
I Notes:
Message Type
1
Message Number
Element/ Node Number
Message Text
NOTE
...
CENTER OF GRAVITY REPORT Total IJght lb. Pipe

Insulation Refractory
X cg ft.
7 .5 7 7 7 7
y (
249.4 249 .4
0 .0 0 .0 83.6
Fluid Pipe+Ins+Rfrty Pipe+Fluid Pipe+Ins+Rfrty+Fld:
0 .0 0 .0
2
0 0
333.0 333.0
.5 .5 .5 .5
2 2 2 2
11
ll
I Classic Piping Input I Errors and Warnings
ITD
5-6
Static Load Case Editor

The first step in the analysis of an error-checked piping model is the specification of the static load cases.
Button Description
Analysis Statics
Selection of the Analysis-Static option from the CAESAR II Main Menu or from within the piping input invokes the Load Case Editor. Note: The piping input file must have successfully gone through error checking before this option can be chosen.
A discussion of CAESAR II Load Cases is included at the end of this chapter. Please refer to that section for more information. After entering the Static Load Case Editor, a screen appears which lists all of the available loads that are defined in the input, the available stress types, and the current load cases offered for analysis. If the job is entering static analysis for the first time, CAESAR II presents a list of recommended load cases. If the job has been run previously, the loads shown are those saved during the last session. A typical Load Case Editor screen displays below:
Loa d Case Editor
5-7
You can define up to 999 load cases. Load cases may be edited by clicking on a line in the Load List area. Only the load components listed in the upper left-hand portion of the screen may be specified in the load cases. The entries must be identical to what is shown on the screen. Available stress types can be selected from the Stress Type menu. Stress type determines the stress calculation method and the allowable stress to use (if any). Load Cases may be built through drag and drop actions. Dragging a load component from the Loads Defined in Input list to a line on the load list automatically adds the load component to the load case, if it is not already included. Highlighted basic load cases may be dragged down to be added to algebraic combination cases (CAESAR II may prompt for combination type). Use the Load Case Options tab to select combination methods and other specifics pertaining to the load cases.
Note: Defining a fatigue (FAT) stress type for a load case automatically displays a field in which the number of anticipated load cycles for that load case can be entered.
All basic (non-combination) load sets must all be specified before any algebraic combinations may be declared. This rule holds true for user defined and edited load cases. The following commands are available on this screen:
Button Description
Edit-Insert
Inserts a blank load case following the currently selected line in the load list. If no line is selected, the load case is added at the end of the list. Load cases are selected by clicking on the number to the left of the load case. Deletes the currently selected load case. Accepts the load cases and runs the job. Allows the user to replace the current load cases with the CAESAR II recommended load cases. Hides or displays the Load Cycles field in the Load Case list. Entries in these fields are only valid for load cases defined with the fatigue stress type.
Edit-Delete File Analysis Recommend
Load Cycles
Import Load Cases Copies the load cases from another file. The units and load types of the copied file must match those of the current file.
Note: To add a new load case to the beginning of currently defined load cases, click on the blank line in the load list just above L1. Then click the Edit-Insert button.
5-8
Building Static Load Cases

Load Case Definition in CAESAR II
The CAESAR II Load Case Editor is a versatile instrument for combining native and combination loads in nearly any manner required by the various piping codes supported by CAESAR II. To enter the Static Load Case Editor from the CAESAR II Main Menu select ANALYSIS->STATICS. The Technical Reference Manual describes the method for adding or deleting load cases. Here we will concentrate on which load cases to use to describe a variety of situations. For assistance in load case definition for an application not covered here, or for clarification of the load cases described below, please contact ICAS Technical Support by e-mail at caesarii@intergraph.com. Standard Load Cases for B31.1, B31.3, ASME SECT III Class 2 & 3, NAVY 505, B31.4, B31.5, B31.8, B31.9, B31.11, Canadian Z662, RCC-M C & D, Stoomwezen, CODETI, Norwegian, FDBR, BS 806 piping codes display below: Use these load cases (as recommended by CAESAR II) for cases where you have weight, temperature, and pressure. L1 W+T1+P1 L2 W+P1 L3 L1-L2 (OPE) (SUS) (EXP) *
* For the expansion case use the algebraic combination method under the Load Case Options tab.
Note: Some of the above piping codes perform a code stress check on the operating case and some do not. For more information, refer to the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide for the equations used for obtaining code stress and allowable stress for the various piping codes.
The expansion case is a combination case that results from subtracting the sustained case from the operating case. As such the expansion case represents the change in the piping system due to the effect of temperature, but in the presence of other loads. This is important because the restraint status of the operating and sustained cases can be different if there are nonlinear restraints (such as +Y, -Z, any restraint with a gap, etc.) or boundary conditions (friction). The Standard Load Cases for B31.4 Ch IX, B31.8 Ch VIII, and DNV codes display below: L1 W+T1+P1 L2 W+P1 (OPE) (SUS)
No expansion stress is calculated for these piping codes. The Standard Load Cases for BS7159 and UKOOA piping codes display below: L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
No expansion or sustained stress is calculated for these piping codes.
5-9
Load Cases with Hanger Design

When CAESAR II designs spring hangers, two additional load cases are required as recommended by CAESAR II. The letter H is used to designate the hanger installation load (pre-load) that is always present in a spring hanger. L1 W L2 W+T1+P1 L3 W+T1+P1+H L4 W+P1+H L5 L3-L4 (HGR) *HS = Rigid (HGR) *HS = Ignore (OPE) (SUS) *HS = As Designed *HS = As Designed
(EXP) **
*HS is the Hanger Stiffness defined under the Load Case Options tab. ** Use the algebraic combination method under the Load Case Options tab.
When using only pre-defined spring hangers, there is no need for the first two load cases above, however, the letter H is still required in the operating and sustained load cases. When using multiple load case design other hanger load cases are required. In such instances it is suggested that the user first allow CAESAR II to recommend the load cases, then add/edit the non-hanger design load cases as appropriate.
Load Cases with Thermal Displacements

Generally, thermal displacements are associated with specific operating conditions (D1 is applied with T1, D2 with T2 and son on. When one temperature is below ambient, and one is above ambient we will want to determine the full expansion stress range as described below: L1 W+T1+D1+P1 L2 W+T2+D2+P1 L3 W+P1 L4 L1-L3 L5 L2-L3 L6 L1-L2 (OPE) (OPE) (SUS) (EXP) * effects of D1 and T1 (EXP) * effects of D2 and T2 (EXP) * full expansion stress range
* Use the algebraic combination method under the Load Case Options tab.
Note: For piping codes with no expansion stress computation, simply include the thermal displacements in the operating cases as shown above.
5-10
Load Cases with Thermal Displacements and Settlement

For settlement, use a CNode on any affected restraints. This CNode must be a node number not used elsewhere in the model. Then place the settlement on the CNode using a displacement vector not already used for thermal displacements. We used D3 to describe restraint settlement in this example. L1 W+T1+D1+D3+P1 L2 W+T2+D2+D3+P1 L3 W+P1 L4 L1-L3 L5 L2-L3 L6 L1-L2 (OPE) (OPE) (SUS) (EXP) * effects of T1, D1, and settlement (EXP) * effects of T2, D2, and settlement (EXP) * full expansion stress range with settlement
Settlement is evaluated as an expansion load because it is strain-related with a half-cycle.
Note: For piping codes with no expansion stress computation add the thermal and settlement displacements to the operating cases as shown above. Load Cases with Pitch and Roll
In offshore piping evaluation there is often platform movement or relative movement between two platforms with inter-connected piping. This also applies to FSPO and other ship-board piping systems. For these applications the pitch and roll displacements are applied to CNodes on each affected restraint similar to settlement. Use displacement vectors not in use to describe thermal displacement boundary conditions. Usually there is a positive displacement and a negative displacement to describe the peak pitch and roll conditions. Consider the state of the platform at its peaks to determine the worst two conditions for relative displacement between piping separated by the largest distance along the line of wave travel. D3 and D4 are used in this example to describe two peak pitch conditions. D1 is thermal displacement. L1 W+T1+D1+D3+P1 L2 W+T1+D1+D4+P1 L3 W+P1 L4 L1-L3 L5 L2-L3 (OPE) (OPE) (SUS) (EXP) * (EXP) *
*Use the algebraic combination method under the Load Case Options tab.
5-11
It is likely that because of the large number of displacement cycles common in pitch and roll situations, the user will want to perform a fatigue analysis. Select the appropriate fatigue curve on the first piping input spreadsheet under the Allowable Stress auxiliary data area. Then in the Load Case Editor add the following two cases for the example above and add the number of cycles for each pitch condition. L6 L1-L3 L7 L2-L3 (FAT) 21000000 (FAT) 21000000
The 21000000 above represents 21 million load cycles during the life of this piping system. For large displacements such as those that occur during a one-year, 30-year, or 100-year event, simply use a low number of cycles as would occur during the life of such a storm multiplied by the number of such storms likely to be seen during the lifetime of the piping system. These displacements ARE NOT considered as occasional loads because occasional loads only involve primary loads and are not strain-related.
Load Cases for Other Types of Occasional Loads Wind and Wave
The methodology is the same for all occasional loads regardless of the source. So for a Wind analysis simply replace the U1 and U3 above with Win1 and Win2 (there is not likely to be a vertical component of wind considered) in the load cases. For Wave loading, replace U1 and U3 above with Wav1 and Wav2 (there is not likely to be a vertical component of wave considered) in the load cases.
Relief Valve
For relief valve firing, calculate the thrust force of the relief valve and place a concentrated load equal to the thrust force at the appropriate place downstream such as at the first bend node or intersection node of a tee. Also place an equal force, but in the opposite direction on the back of the relief valve. Then replace U1 above with F1 in the load cases. The example below has two relief valves that fire independently. They may fire individually or together. L1 W+T1+P1 L2 W+T1+P1+F1 L3 W+T1+P1+F2 L4 W+T1+P1+F1+F2 L5 W+P1 L6 L1-L5 L7 L2-L1 L8 L3-L1 L9 L4-L1 L10 L5+L7 L11 L5+L8 L12 L5+L9 (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (SUS) (EXP) * (OCC) * (OCC) * (OCC) * (OCC) ** (OCC) ** (OCC) **
* Use the Algebraic combination method under the Load Case Options tab. ** Use the ABS or Scalar combination method under the Load Case Options tab.
5-12
Snow and Ice Load

Snow load is a uniform load in units of weight per length (lb/ft, N/m, etc.). Multiply the depth/thickness of snow/ice on the piping by the density of snow/ice and the pipe outside diameter to calculate the uniform load. If the piping enters a building or will otherwise have no snow/ice load, re-activate the uniform load at that node and enter all zeroes. For snow/ice loads, the uniform load will always be negative in the vertical direction. The load cases are the same as described earlier for seismic, wind, and wave, but with only one uniform load vector they are somewhat simplified.
Waterhammer Loads, Seismic Loads With Anchor Movements

It is not recommended to attempt to simulate waterhammer loads statically. See the example in the Technical Reference Manual for dynamic analysis of a system undergoing waterhammer. It is not recommended to attempt a static seismic analysis when anchor movements are present. Rather a dynamic analysis should be done using the Spectrum analysis method. See the example in the Technical Reference Manual for Earthquake Spectrum analysis of a system undergoing anchor movements.
5-13
Static Seismic Load Cases

While in piping input, click KAUX->SPECIAL EXECUTION PARAMETERS and enable the Uniform Load in Gs box. On the first input spreadsheet, activate the Uniform Loads field and enter the Seismic Load In Gs. You should input the X-direction acceleration in vector 1, Y-direction acceleration in vector 2, and Z-direction acceleration in vector 3. This makes load case generation easier. Since any seismic event is likely to occur while the piping system is in operation, this is the load case that we want to consider. The operating case should have all operating loads plus the seismic load. This load case is then used in conjunction with the standard operating case to segregate the effect of the seismic load, which then is combined with the static sustained load case for code compliance considerations. L1 W+T1+P1 L2 W+T1+P1+U1 L3 W+T1+P1-U1 L4 W+T1+P1+U2 L5 W+T1+P1-U2 L6 W+T1+P1+U3 L7 W+T1+P1-U3 L8 W+P1 L9 L1-L8 L10 L2-L1 L11 L3-L1 L12 L4-L1 L13 L5-L1 L14 L6-L1 L15 L7-L1 L16 L8+L10 L17 L8+L11 L18 L8+L12 L19 L8+L13 L20 L8+L14 L21 L8+L15 (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (SUS) (EXP) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC)
5-14
In load cases 2 through 7 above, we include all the loads and call these operating cases. The subtracted uniform load vectors reverse the direction of the uniform load applied. Use these load case results for occasional restraint loads and occasional displacements. Load Cases 10 through 15 represent the segregated occasional loads. Although we designate these as occasional load cases, we dont need a code stress check here as these are only part of the final solution for code compliance. Therefore, under the Load Case Options tab, we can select Suppress for the Output Status. Also these combination load cases all use the Algebraic Combination Method on the Load Case Options tab. Load cases 16 through 21 are all used for code compliance. We add the segregated occasional results to the sustained case results and use either the Scalar or ABS Absolute Value Combination Method on the Load Case Options tab. Both scalar and absolute will give us the same code stress results although the displacements, forces, and moments could be different. Since we dont really use any results except the stresses for combination cases, it really does not matter which combination method you use. Sometimes we want to combine the results of vertical g-loads with horizontal g-loads. Often a factor is applied to the vertical g-load component of the combined load. This can be accomplished initially when entering in the Uniform Load on the input spreadsheet for the vertical component or you can do this directly in the load case editor as shown below. Using the example above we will combine .67 vertical g-load with each horizontal component. L1 W+T1+P1 L2 W+T1+P1+U1+0.67U2 L3 W+T1+P1-U1+0.67U2 L4 W+T1+P1+U1-0.67U2 L5 W+T1+P1-U1-0.67U2 L6 W+T1+P1+U3+0.67U2 L7 W+T1+P1-U3+0.67U2 L8 W+T1+P1+U3-0.67U2 L9 W+T1+P1-U3-0.67U2 L10 W+P1 L11 L1-L10 L12 L2-L1 L13 L3-L1 L14 L4-L1 L15 L5-L1 L16 L6-L1 L17 L7-L1 L18 L8-L1 L19 L9-L1 L20 L10+L12 L21 L10+L13 L22 L10+L14 L23 L10+L15 (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (SUS) (EXP) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC)
5-15
L24 L10+L16 L25 L10+L17 L26 L10+L18 L27 L10+L19
(OCC) (OCC) (OCC) (OCC)
At times it is required to combine the horizontal and vertical components of seismic loading together. You can accomplish this in the Load Case Editor. Set up the static seismic load cases as shown in the first example above, then combine the segregated horizontal and vertical load cases together using the SRSS Combination Method on the Load Case Options tab. Add these last results to the sustained case as shown below: L1 W+T1+P1 L2 W+T1+P1+U1 L3 W+T1+P1-U1 L4 W+T1+P1+U2 L5 W+T1+P1-U2 L6 W+T1+P1+U3 L7 W+T1+P1-U3 L8 W+P1 L9 L1-L8 L10 L2-L1 L11 L3-L1 L12 L4-L1 L13 L5-L1 L14 L6-L1 L15 L7-L1 L16 L10+L12 L17 L10+L13 L18 L11+L12 L19 L11+L13 L20 L14+L12 L21 L14+L13 L22 L15+L12 L23 L15+L13 L24 L8+L16 L25 L8+L17 L26 L8+L18 L27 L8+L19 L28 L8+L20 (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (OPE) (SUS) (EXP) (OCC) * (OCC) * (OCC) * (OCC) * (OCC) * (OCC) * (OCC) ** (OCC) ** (OCC) ** (OCC) ** (OCC) ** (OCC) ** (OCC) ** (OCC) ** (OCC) *** (OCC) *** (OCC) *** (OCC) *** (OCC) ***
5-16
L29 L8+L21 L30 L8+L22 L31 L8+L23
(OCC) *** (OCC) *** (OCC) ***
* Use the algebraic combination method under the Load Case Options tab. ** Use the SRSS combination method under the Load Case Options tab. *** Use the ABS or Scalar combination method under the Load Case Options tab.
Note: For piping codes not performing a sustained code stress check change the operating load cases that include seismic loads to OCC and use these for code compliance. In such cases the combination cases described above are not needed.
5-17
Providing Wind Data

Currently CAESAR II enables users to access wind load data from 13 different wind codes.
AS/NZ 1170:2002 Brazil NBR 6123 BS6399-97 China GB 50009 EN 1991-1-4:2005 ASCE # 7 Standard Edition 2005 User-Defined Velocity vs. Elevation Table IBC 2006 IS 875 Mexico 1993 NBC 2005 UBC User -Defined Pressure vs. Elevation Table
Up to 4 different wind load cases may be specified for any 1 job. The only wind load information that is specified in the Piping Input is the shape factor. It is this shape factor input that causes load cases WIN1, WIN2, WIN3, and WIN4 to be listed as an available load to be analyzed. More wind data is required before an analysis can be made. When wind loads are used in the model, CAESAR II makes available the screen to define the extra wind load data. Once defined, this input is stored and may be changed on subsequent entries into the static analysis processor. Users can specify the wind data needed for an analysis by clicking the Wind Loads tab for the appropriate wind load case. The Wind Load tab appears:
Wind L oa d Specifications
5-18
There are thirteen different methods that can be used to generate wind loads on piping systems:
AS/NZ 1170:2002 Brazil NBR 6123 BS6399-97 China GB 50009 EN 1991-1-4:2005 ASCE # 7 Standard Edition 2005 User -Defined Velocity vs. Elevation Table IBC 2006 IS 875 Mexico 1993 NBC 2005 UBC User -Defined Pressure vs. Elevation Table
You can select the appropriate method by placing a value of 1.0 in one of the Wind Direction Specification fields. When using a pressure or velocity vs. elevation table, users need only specify the method and the wind direction on the preceding screen. After clicking the User Wind Profile button, the dialog box prompts for the corresponding pressure or velocity table. If a uniform pressure or velocity is to act over the entire piping system, then only a single entry needs to be made in the table, otherwise users should enter the pressure or velocity profile for the applicable wind loading.
Note: To use the ASCE #7 wind loads, all of the fields should be filled in.
For example, as per ASCE #7, the following are typical basic wind-speed values:
California and West Coast Areas-124.6 ft./sec. ( 85 m.p.h.) Rocky Mountains- 132.0 ft./sec ( 90 m.p.h.) Great Plains132.0 ft./sec ( 90 m.p.h.) Non-Coastal Eastern United States-132.0 ft./sec ( 90 m.p.h.) Gulf Coast- 190.6 ft./sec (130 m.p.h.) Florida-Carolinas- 190.6 ft./sec (130 m.p.h.) Miami- 212.6 ft./sec (145 m.p.h.) New England Coastal Areas- 176.0 ft./sec (120 m.p.h.)
Copy Wind Vector - You can copy the Wind data from any defined Wind Case to any remaining Wind Cases by clicking the Copy Wind Vector button. This is especially useful for large Wind Pressure or Velocity vs. Elevation tables.
5-19
Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters

Up to 4different hydrodynamic load cases may be specified for any 1 job. Several hydrodynamic coefficients are defined on the element spreadsheet. The inclusion of hydrodynamic coefficients causes the loads WAV1, WAV2, WAV3, and WAV4 to be available in the Load Case Editor. A CAESAR II Hydrodynamic Loading dialog box is shown in the following figure.
In the Load Case Editor, four different wave load profiles can be specified. Current data and wave data may be specified and included together or either of them may be omitted so as to exclude the data from the analysis. CAESAR II supports three current models and six wave models. See the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for a detailed discussion of hydrodynamic analysis.
Note: Wave data may be copied between any of the four defined vectors to any of the unused vectors by clicking the Copy Wave Vector button.
5-20
Execution of Static Analysis

The static analysis performed by CAESAR II follows the regular finite element solution routine. Element stiffnesses are combined to form a global system stiffness matrix. Each basic load case defines a set of loads for the ends of all the elements. These elemental load sets are combined into system load vectors. Using the relationship of force equals stiffness times displacement (F=KX), the unknown system deflections and rotations can be calculated. The known deflections however, may change during the analysis as hanger sizing, nonlinear supports, and friction all affect both the stiffness matrix and load vectors. The root solution from this equation, the system-wide deflections and rotations, is used with the element stiffnesses to determine the global (X,Y,Z) forces and moments at the end of each element. These forces and moments are translated into a local coordinate system for the element from which the code-defined stresses are calculated. Forces and moments on anchors, restraints, and fixed displacement points are summed to balance all global forces and moments entering the node. Algebraic combinations of the basic load cases pick up this process where appropriate - at the displacement, force & moment, or stress level. Once the setup for the solution is complete, the calculation of the displacements and rotations is repeated for each of the basic load cases. During this step, the Incore Solution status dialog box appears.
Incor e Solution M odule
5-21
This dialog box serves as a monitor of the static analysis. It is divided into several areas. The upper side left reflects the job size by listing the number of equations to be solved and the bandwidth of the matrix, which holds these equations. Multiplying the number of equations by the bandwidth gives a relative indication of the job size. This area also lists the current load case being analyzed and the total number of basic load cases to be solved. The iteration count, as well as the current case number, shows how much work has been completed. Load cases with nonlinear restraints may require several solutions (iterations) before the changing assumptions about the restraint configuration for example resting or lifting off, active or inactive are confirmed. In the lower left corner of the Incore Solver dialog box are two bar graphs, which indicate where the program is in an individual solution. These bar graphs illustrate the speed of the solution. By checking the data in this first box, users will have an idea of how much longer to wait for the results. The right side of the solution screen also provides information to users regarding the status of nonlinear restraints and hangers in the job. For example, messages noting the number of restraints that have yet to converge or any hangers that appear to be taking no load, are displayed here. Nonlinear restraint status may be stepped through on an individual basis by using the [F2]/[F4] function keys. Following the analysis of the system deflections and rotations, these results are post-processed in order to calculate the local forces, moments, and stresses for the basic load cases and all results for the algebraic combinations (e.g. L1-L2). These total system results are stored in a file with the suffix _P for example,. TUTOR._P.
Note: The _A or input file, the _P or output file, and the "OTL" (Output Time Link File) are all that is required to archive the static analysis. The remaining scratch files may be eliminated from the system without any impact on the work completed.
5-22
During this post processing, the Status frame lists the current element for which the forces and stresses are being calculated. Once the last stresses of an element are computed, the output processor screen is presented. Use this menu to interactively review the graphic and tabular results of the analysis. Interactive processing of output results is discussed in Chapter 7 of this document.
Static Out put Scr een
5-23
Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases

Definition of a Load Case
In CAESAR II, a load case is a group of piping system loads that are analyzed together, that are assumed to be occurring at the same time. An example of a load case is an operating analysis composed of the thermal, deadweight, and pressure loads together. Another is an as-installed analysis of deadweight loads alone. A load case may also be composed of the combinations of the results of other load cases; for example, the difference in displacements between the operating and installed cases. No matter what the contents of the load case, it always produces a set of reports in the output, which list restraint loads, displacements and rotations, internal forces, moments, and stresses. Because of piping code definitions of calculation methods and/or allowable stresses, the load cases are also tagged with a stress category. For example, the combination mentioned above might be tagged as an EXPansion stress case. Piping System Loads The piping system loads which compose the basic non-combination load sets relate to various input items found on the Piping Input screen. The table below lists the individual load set designations, their names and the input items, which make them available for analysis.
Designation Name Input items which activate this load case
Deadweight
Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight, Refractory Weight, Cladding Weight, Fluid Weight, Rigid Weight Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight, Refractory Weight, Cladding Weight, Rigid Weight Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight, Refractory Weight, Cladding Weight, Water-filled Weight, Rigid Weight (usually used for Hydro Test) Temperature #1 Temperature #2 Temperature #3
WNC WW
Weight No fluid Contents Water Weight
T1 T2 T3 . .
Designation
Thermal Set 1 Thermal Set 2 Thermal Set 3
Name
Input items which activate this load case
T9 P1 P2 P3
Thermal Set 9 Pressure Set 1 Pressure Set 2 Pressure Set 3
Temperature #9 Pressure #1 Pressure #2 Pressure #3
5-24
. . .
Designation Name Input items which activate this load case
P9 HP D1 D2 D3
Pressure Set 9 Hydrostatic Test Pressure Displacements Set 1 Displacements Set 2 Displacements Set 3
Pressure #9 Hydro Pressure Displacements (1st Vector) Displacements (2nd Vector) Displacements (3rd Vector)
Designation
Name
D9 F1 F2 F3 . . .
Designation
Displacement Set 9 Force Set 1 Force Set 2 Force Set 3
Displacements (9th Vector) Forces/Moments (1st Vector) Forces/Moments (2nd Vector) Forces/Moments (3rd Vector)
Name
F9 WIN1 WIN2 WIN3 WIN4 WAV1 WAV2 WAV3 WAV4 U1
Force Set 9 Wind Load 1 Wind Load 2 Wind Load 3 Wind Load 4 Wave Load 1 Wave Load 2 Wave Load 3 Wave Load 4 Uniform Loads
Forces/Moments (9th Vector) Wind Shape Factor Wind Shape Factor Wind Shape Factor Wind Shape Factor Wave Load On Wave Load On Wave Load On Wave Load On Uniform Loads (1st Vector)
5-25
Designation
Name
U2 U3 CS H . . .
Uniform Loads Uniform Loads Cold Spring Hanger Initial Loads
Uniform Loads (2nd Vector) Uniform Loads (3rd Vector) Material # 18 or 19 Hanger Design or Pre-specified Hangers
Note: Available piping system loads display on the left side of the Static Load Case screen.
Basic Load Cases Basic load cases may consist of a single load such as WNC for an as-installed weight analysis, or they may include several loads added together such as W+T1+P1+D1+F1 for an operating analysis. The stress categories: SUStained, expansion, occasional, operating, and FATigue are specified at the end of the load case definition. The complete definition of the two examples are: WNC (SUS) and W+T1+P1+D1+H (OPE). Each basic load case is entered in this manner in a list for analysis. When building basic load cases, load components (such as W, T1, D1, WIND1, etc.) may be preceded by scale factors such as 2.0, -0.5, etc. Likewise, when building combination cases, references to previous load cases may also be preceded by scale factors as well. This provides you with several benefits: In the event that 1 loading is a multiple of the other i.e., Safe Shutdown Earthquake, being 2 times Operating Basis Earthquake, only 1 loading need be entered in the piping input module; it may be used in a scaled or unscaled form in the Load Case Editor. In the event that a loading may be directionally reversible (i.e., wind or earthquake) only one loading need be entered in the piping input module; it may be used preceded by a + or a - to switch direction. Load Rating Design Factor (LRDF) methods may be implemented by scaling individual load components by their risk-dependent factors, for example: 1.05W + 1.1T1+1.1D1+1.25 WIND1
Note: You may select the available stress types from the pull-down list on each line.
You may combine results of the basic load cases using algebraic combination cases. Always enter these algebraic combinations after the last of the basic load cases. Designate Combinations of basic load cases by using the prefix L1, L2, etc.
Note: All load cases with stress type FATigue must have their expected number of Load Cycles specified.
5-26
An example set of loads displays below.
The following family of load cases provides a valid example of algebraic combinations.
Load Case Designation Comments
W+T1+P1+H+0.67CS (OPE)
Hot operating; note the scale factor which takes credit only for of the cold spring Cold operating: with cold spring included Traditional sustained case Wind case; note this will be manipulated later to represent average wind 1X, maximum wind 2X, also positive and negative directions. Traditional expansion case, cold to hot (note reference to "L" for "Load", rather than "DS". Same case but now evaluated for fatigue at 10,000 cycles.
2 3 4
W1+P1+H+0.67CS(OPE) W1+P1+H(SUS) WIN1(OCC)
L1-L2(EXP)
L1-L2(FAT)
5-27
Load Case
Designation
Comments
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
L1+L4(OPE) L1-L4(OPE) L1+2L4(OPE) L1-2L4(OPE) L2+L4(OPE) L2-L4(OPE) L2+2L4(OPE) L2-2L4(OPE) L3+L4(OCC) L3+2L4(OCC) L9+L10+L11+L12(OPE)
Hot operating with average wind (in positive direction). Hot operating with average wind (in negative direction). Hot operating with maximum wind (in positive direction). Hot operating with maximum wind (in negative direction). Cold operating with average wind (in positive direction). Cold operating with average wind (in negative direction). Cold operating with maximum wind (in positive direction). Cold operating with maximum wind (in negative direction). Occasional stress case, sustained plus average wind. Occasional stress case, sustained plus maximum wind. Maximum restraint load case (the combination option should be MAX).
Note: CAESAR II permits the specification of up to nine hundred ninety-nine load cases for analysis. In the rare situation where more cases are required, the model should be copied to a new file in order to specify the additional load cases.
5-28
Load Case Options Tab

CAESAR II offers a second tab on the Static Load Case screen - Load Case Options. Among other features, this screen allows the user to define alternative and more meaningful Load Case names, as shown in the figure below.
User Defined Na mes
The user-defined names appear in the Static Output Processor in the Load Case report (for more information, see below), and may also be used in place of the built load case names anywhere in the Static Output Processor, by activating the appropriate option.
Note: Load case names cannot exceed 132 characters in length.
5-29
User Control of Produced Results Data

CAESAR II allows you to specify whether any or all of the load case results are retained for review in the Static Output Processor. You can use the 2 controls found on the Load Case Options tab. These are:
Output Status
This item controls the disposition of the entire results of the load case -- the available options are Keep or Discard. The former would be used when the load case is producing results that the user may wish to review; the latter option would be used for artificial cases such as the preliminary hanger cases, or intermediate construction cases. For example, in the load list shown in the figure, the Wind only load case could have been optionally designated as Discard, since it was built only to be used in subsequent combinations, and has no great value as a standalone load case. Note that load cases used for hanger design (i.e., the weight load case and hanger travel cases designated with the stress type HGR) must be designated as Discard. Note that for all load cases created under previous versions of CAESAR II, all load cases except the HGR cases are converted as Keep; likewise the default for all new cases (except for HGR load cases) is also Keep.
Output Type
This item designates the type of results that are available for the load cases, which have received a Keep status. This could be used to help minimize clutter on the output end, and ensure that only meaningful results are retained. The available options are: Disp/Force/Stress - Provides displacements, restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This would be a good choice for Operating cases, when designing to those codes which do a code check on operating stresses, because the load case would be of interest for interference checking (displacements) and restraint loads at one operating extreme (forces). Disp/Force - Provides displacements restraint loads, global and local forces. This would be a good choice for OPE cases when designing for those codes which do not do a code check on OPE stresses. Disp/Stress - Provides displacements and stresses only. Force/Stress - Provides restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This might be a good choice for the Sustained (cold) case, because the load case would be of interest for restraint loads at one operating extreme (forces), and code compliance (stresses). Note that FR combination loads cases developed under previous versions of CAESAR II are converted with this Force/Stress type. Disp - Provides displacements only. Force - Provides restraint loads, global and local forces only. Stress - Provides stresses only. This would be a good choice for a sustained plus Occasional load case (with Abs combination method), since this is basically an artificial construct used for code stress checking purposes only. Note that ST combination load cases developed under previous versions of CAESAR II are converted with this Stress type.
Snubbers Active?
Activating this option causes the snubbers to be considered to be rigid restraints for this particular load case. By default, OCC load cases activate this option, while other types of load cases default to an inactive state.
Hanger Stiffness
5-30
The three options available here are As Designed, Rigid, and Ignore, and cause CAESAR II to (1) consider the actual spring hanger stiffnesses, (2) model the spring hangers as rigid restraints, or (3) remove the spring hanger stiffnesses from the model, respectively. As Designed should be used for most "real" (non-hanger design) load cases. Rigid should be used for the Restrained Weight Case and any Hydrotest Case (if the spring hangers are pinned during it). (Note that during the Restrained Weight Case user-defined hangers will not be made rigid.) Ignore is normally used for the Operating for Hanger Travel Cases -- except in those cases where the user wishes to include the stiffness of the selected spring in the Operating for Hanger Travel Case (and iterate to a solution). In that case, the user should select As Designed for those cases as well. In that case, it is very important that the hanger load in the Cold Case (in the physical system) be adjusted to match the reported hanger Cold Load.
Friction Multiplier
This multiplier may be used to alter (or deactivate) the friction factors used in this particular load case. The friction factor (Mu) used at each restraint will be this multiplier times the Mu factor at each restraint. Setting this value to zero deactivates friction for this load case.
Elastic Modulus
Designates use of Cold (EC) or any of the nine (EH1-EH9) hot elastic moduli in determining results on a load case per condition basis.
5-31
User-Controlled Combination Methods

For combination cases, CAESAR II enables you to designate the combination method to be used. Load cases to be combined are designated as L1, L2, etc., for Load Case 1, Load Case 2, etc., with the combination method selected from a drop list on the Load Case Options tab. The available methods are:
Algebraic
Combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and pressures of the designated load cases in an algebraic (vectorial) manner. The resultant forces, moments, and pressures are then used (along with the SIFs and element cross-sectional parameters) to calculate the piping stresses. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors (1.8, -, etc.) prior to doing the combination. The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods DS and FR used an Algebraic combination method. Therefore, load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the DS and FR methods are converted to the Algebraic method. Also, new combination cases automatically default to this method, unless designated by the user). In the load case list shown in the figure, most of the combination cases are typically built with the Algebraic method. Note that in the load case list shown in the figure, most of the combination cases typically are built with the Algebraic method. Note that Algebraic combinations may be built only from basic (i.e., non-combination) load cases or other load cases built using the Algebraic combination method.
Scalar
Combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and stresses of the designated load cases in a Scalar manner (i.e., not as vectors, but retaining consideration of sign). Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the combination (for example, for a negative multiplier, stresses would be subtractive). This method might typically be used when adding plus or minus seismic loads to an operating case, or when doing an Occasional Stress Code check (i.e. scalar addition of the Sustained and Occasional stresses). The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods ST used a Scalar combination method. Therefore, load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the ST method are converted to the Scalar method.
SRSS
Combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and stresses of the designated load cases in a Square Root of the Sum of the Squares (SRSS) manner. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the combination however, due to the squaring used by the combination method, negative values vs. positive values will yield no difference in the result. This method is typically used when combining seismic loads acting in orthogonal directions.
ABS
Combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and stresses of the designated load cases in an Absolute Value manner. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the combination however, due to the absolute values used by the combination method, negative values vs. positive values will yield no difference in the result. This method may be used when doing an Occasional Stress code check (i.e., absolute summation of the Sustained and Occasional stresses).
Note: The Occasional Stress cases in the figure are built using this method.
5-32
Max
For each result value, this method selects the displacement, force, moment, restraint load, and stress having the largest absolute value from the designated load cases; so no actual combination per se, takes place. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the selection of the maxima. This method is typically used when determining the design case worst loads, stress, etc. from a number of loads.
Note: The maximum Restraint Load case shown in the figure uses a Max combination method. Min
For each result value, this method selects the displacement, force, moment, restraint load, and stress having the smallest absolute value from the designated load cases; so no actual combination takes place. Multiply load case results by any scale factors prior to the selection of the minima.
SignMax
For each result value, this method selects the displacements, force, moments, restraint load, and stress having the largest actual value, considering the sign, from the designated load cases; so no actual combination takes place. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the selection of the maxima. Use this method along with the SignMin method to find the design range for each value i.e., the maximum positive and maximum negative restraint loads.
SignMin
For each result value, this method selects the displacements, force, moments, restraint load, and stress having the smallest actual value, considering the sign, from the designated load cases; so no actual combination takes place. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the selection of the minima. Use this method along with the SignMax method to find the design range for each value i.e., the maximum positive and maximum negative restraint loads.
5-33
Recommended Load Cases

When you first enter the Static Load Case Editor CAESAR II recommends, based on the loads defined in the model, 3 types of load cases: Operating, Sustained, and Expansion (but not occasional). Operating load cases represent the loads acting on the pipe during hot operation, including both primary weight pressure, and force loadings and secondary displacement and thermal loadings. Operating cases are used to find hot displacements for interference checking, and hot restraint and equipment loads. Generally when recommending operating load cases, CAESAR II combines weight, pressure case #1, and hanger loads with each of the thermal load cases (displacement set #1 with thermal set #1, displacement set #2 with thermal set #2, etc...), and then with any cold spring loads. Sustained load cases represent the primary force-driven loadings acting on the pipe, i.e., weight and pressure alone. This usually coincides with the cold as-installed load case. Sustained load cases are used to satisfy the code sustained stress requirements, as well as to calculate as-installed restraint and equipment loads. Sustained load cases are generally built by combining weight with each of the pressure and force sets, and then with any hanger loads. Expansion load cases represent the range between the displacement extremes usually between the operating and sustained cases. Expansion load cases are used to meet expansion stress requirements. Most users will specify only 1 temperature and 1 pressure. This input simplifies the recommended cases to something like: Case # 1 Case # 2 Case # 3 W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) ....OPERATING W+P1+H (SUS)....SUSTAINED LOAD CASE L1-L2 (EXP)....EXPANSION LOAD CASE
You should review any load recommendations made by CAESAR II.
Note: CAESAR II does not recommend any occasional load cases. Definition of these is the responsibility of the user.
If the recommended load cases do not satisfy the analysis requirements, you can delete or modify them. Conversely, you can reset the load cases to the program recommended set at any time. If you have an operating temperature below ambient in addition to one above ambient you should add another expansion load case as follows: Case # 1 Case # 2 Case # 3 W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) .... W+D2+T2 +P1+H (OPE) .... W+P1+H (SUS)....SUSTAINED LOAD CASE
Case # 4L1-L3 (EXP)....EXPANSION LOAD CASE Case # 5L2-L3 (EXP)....EXPANSION LOAD CASE Case # 6L2-L1 (EXP)....you should add this since it is not recommended by CAESAR II.
5-34
Recommended Load Cases for Hanger Selection

If you want to let the program design spring hangers, 2 additional load cases must be analyzed to get the data required to select a variable support. The 2 basic requirements for sizing hangers are the deadweight carried by the hanger hot load and the range of vertical travel to be accommodated. The first load case traditionally called Restrained Weight consists of only deadweight (W). For this analysis, CAESAR II includes a rigid restraint in the vertical direction at every location where a hanger is to be sized. The load on the restraint from this analysis is the deadweight that must be carried by the support in the hot condition. For the second load case, the hanger is replaced with an upward force equal to the calculated hot load, and an operating load case is run. This load case traditionally called Free Thermal includes the deadweight and thermal effects, the first pressure set if defined, and any displacements, W+D1+T1+P1. The vertical displacements of the hanger locations, along with the previously calculated deadweights, are then passed on to the hanger selection routine. Once the hangers are sized, the added forces are removed and replaced with the selected supports along with their pre-loads cold loads, designated by load component H. Load component H may appear in the load cases for hanger design if you have predefined any springs. In this case, it would represent the pre-defined operating loads. CAESAR II then continues with the load case recommendations as defined above. A typical set of recommended load cases for a single operating load case spring hanger design appears as follows: Case # 1W ....WEIGHT FOR HANGER LOADS Case # 2W+D1+T1+P1 ....OPERATING FOR HANGER TRAVEL Case # 3W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) ...OPERATING (HGRS. INCLUDED Case # 4W+P1+H (SUS) ....SUSTAINED LOAD CASE Case # 5L3-L4 (EXP) ....EXPANSION LOAD CASE These hanger sizing load cases #1 & #2 generally supply no information to the output reports other than the data found in the hanger tables. Cases 3, 4, & 5 match the recommended load cases for a standard analysis with 1 thermal and 1 pressure defined. Also notice how the displacement combination numbers in case 5 have changed to reflect the new order. If multiple temperatures and pressures existed in the input, they too would appear in this set after the second spring hanger design load case. Two other hanger design criteria also affect the recommended load cases. If the actual cold loads for selected springs are to be calculated, 1 additional load case WNC+H would appear before case #3 above. If the hanger design criteria piping system is set so that the proposed springs must accommodate more than 1 operating condition, other load cases must additionally appear before the case #3 above. You must perform an extra hanger design operating load case for each additional operating load case used to design springs. Refer to the discussion of the hanger design algorithm for more information on these options.
Chapter 6 Static Output Processor In This Chapter

Entering the Static Output Processor .................................... 6-2 Standard Toolbar ................................................................... 6-4 Reports Navigation Toolbar .................................................. 6-6 Custom Reports Toolbar ....................................................... 6-8 Report Template Editor......................................................... 6-9 Filtering Reports ................................................................... 6-12 Report Options ...................................................................... 6-14 General Computed Results.................................................... 6-27 Output Viewer Wizard .......................................................... 6-31 Printing or Saving Reports to File Notes .............................. 6-32 3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output Processor ........... 6-33 Animation of Static Results Notes ........................................ 6-38
6-2
Entering the Static Output Processor

With the completion of a static analysis the CAESAR II Output screen automatically appears, allowing interactive review of the analytical results. Users may also be access the static results anytime after the analysis has been completed through the CAESAR II Main Menu option - Output-Static.
Static Out put
Once the output processor is launched, by either of the mentioned paths, the output screen appears. The left-hand column shows the load cases that were analyzed. The center column shows the available reports associated with those load cases. The right-hand column shows reports, such as input listings or hanger selection reports that are not associated with load cases.
Note: The proper job must be made current through the File-Open option before selecting the StaticOutput processor through the Main Menu.
Chapter 6 Static Output
Static Out put Pr ocessor
The Processor screen enables users to manipulate all output review activity. The CAESAR II Output Processor was designed so that piping results could be quickly reviewed in tabular form, graphically, or using any combination of the two forms. Users may Interactively review reports for any selected combination of load cases and/or report types. Print or save to file copies for any combination of load cases and/or report types. Add Title lines to output reports.
Note CAESAR II enables users to select either extended and/or summarized versions of most standard reports. Also users may use the Filters menu options.
6-4
Standard Toolbar
A number of commands are available:
File-Open File-Save
Opens a different job for output review. The user is prompted for the file to be opened. Saves the selected reports to a disk file. The user is initially prompted for the file name. After closing, or exit, a Table of Contents is added to the file.
Allows users to select either the CAESAR II Default Load Case names or the user-defined load case names for output reports. Also available on the Options Select Case Names menu as Load Case Name. The user-defined load case names are entered in the load case editor under the Load Options tab. Select Node Name Input Animation Plot File-Print Microsoft Word Allows users to select formatting of node numbers and names to output to reports. Also available on the Options menu Returns to the piping input processor. Allows users to view graphic animation of the displacement solution. Enables the user to superimpose analytical results onto a plot of the system model. This is described in more detail later in the chapter. Prints the selected reports. After closing, or exiting, a Table of Contents is printed. This is described later in the chapter. For those users with access to Microsoft Word, CAESAR II provides the ability to send output reports directly to Word. This feature permits the use of all of Words formatting features (font selection, margin control, etc.) and printer support from CAESAR II. This feature is activated through use of the Microsoft Word button when producing a report. Word is available as an output device to the Static and Dynamic Output Processors. Users can append multiple reports to form a final report, by selecting the desired reports, clicking the Microsoft Word button, closing Word, selecting the next report to be added, clicking the button again, etc. A table of contents, reflecting the cumulatively produced reports, always appears on the first page of the Word document.
Button and Name
Description
Microsoft Excel
For those users with access to Microsoft Excel, CAESAR II provides the ability to send output reports directly to Excel. This feature permits the use of all of Excels features and printer support from CAESAR II. This feature is activated through use of the Microsoft Excel button when producing a report. Excel is available as an output device to the Static and Dynamic Output Processors. Users can append multiple reports to form a final report, by selecting the desired reports, clicking the Microsoft Excel button, closing Excel, selecting the next report to be added, clicking the button again, etc. Each report displays in a separate spreadsheet with the corresponding report name. There is no table of contents generated.
View-Reports
Displays the selected reports on the terminal. This permits the analysis data to be reviewed interactively in text format. After selecting the desired combination of one or more active load cases with any combination of report options and executing the View-Reports button, each report is presented one at a time for inspection. Users may scroll through the reports vertically and horizontally where necessary. Allows the user to enter report titles for this group of reports. CAESAR II enables users to customize the report with a two line title or description. The title may be assigned once for all load case reports sent to the printer or a disk drive; or the title may be changed for each individual report before it is moved to the output device. When CAESAR II receives this command a dialog prompts for the titles.
Enter Titles
Repor t Titles
Note: 28 characters of each entered title line are displayed for 80 column output reports and 50 characters of each entered title line are displayed for 132 column output reports.
Button and Name
Description
More/Less
Opens the Output Viewer Wizard to the right of the Static Output Processor. It aids the user in selecting specific reports and reviewing their order before sending the output to the selected device. To close the Output Viewer Wizard click Less.
6-6
Reports Navigation Toolbar

Activate this toolbar by selecting at least 1 report for on screen viewing. When more than one report is selected for viewing, the reports display in the tabbed view. You can click individual tabs at the bottom of the screen to navigate 1 report to the other. You can also use the View Previous Report and View Next Report buttons to navigate. Also, right-mouse clicking on the report opens the context menu with the Go To navigation choice.
Cont ext M enu
Individual reports can be torn apart from the tabbed view and positioned around the screen real estate or docked attached next to other opened reports for comparison view. To tear the reports from the tabbed view, click with left mouse button on the corresponding tab at the bottom, then move the mouse while still holding the left button down. The outline shadow will show new location of the report; release the mouse button. You can print or save individual reports to a text file or to MS Word/MS Excel by using the right-mouse context menu with options Send Report To or Send All To. While the report is active on the screen, it is possible to adjust the Display Properties available from the View menu and change the background color or enable the horizontal and vertical grid lines. This feature may help with better printing results. While the report is active on the screen, it is possible to adjust the Page Configuration available from the View menu -> Change Page Break. You can also scale the report to fit on 1 page or adjusted to a specified number of pages, by using the Allow Adjustment of Page Breaks and Show Page Break Lines options.
Page Configur ation Dialog
Button and Name
Description
View Previous Report
Enables users to navigate through the reports. When all reports have been viewed, the Reports Viewer dialog closes and returns control to the Static Output Processor. Enables users to navigate through the reports. When all reports have been viewed, the Reports Viewer dialog closes and returns control to the Static Output Processor. Displays the list of currently opened reports in alphabetical order; allows the users quickly and conveniently display the desired report. Enables the report searching for specific node number, max values of any of the fields that exist in the current report, of for any random text or number. Enables zooming the report text in or out without affecting the actual report font or formatting. The zoom level can also be controlled from the right-mouse-click context menu. The zoom level is applied to the currently active report and is temporal until the report is closed. Enables saving the changes to the custom report when the Report Template Editor is launched. Enables keeping the original report and saving the changes to another report when the Report Template Editor is launched.
View Next Report GoTo Find in Report
Zoom In/Zoom Out
Save Current Custom Report Template Save Current Custom Report Template with a New Name
6-8
Custom Reports Toolbar

The Custom Reports toolbar enables you to access several functions which can be used to manipulate the generated reports.
Enables you to create new custom reports. At least 1 load case must be selected from the Load Cases Analyzed list box to enable preview. Add New Custom Report Template Clicking this button displays the Report Template Editor dialog. Enables you to modify and save existing custom reports, 1 at a time. At least 1 load case must be selected from the Load Cases Analyzed list box in addition to the custom report name to preview the report. Clicking this button displays the Report Template Editor dialog. Enables you to permanently remove a custom report templates. This action cannot be undone. Delete One or More Custom Report Templates Enables you to replace the current custom report templates whether CAESAR II or user -defined with the CAESAR II Default Custom Report templates. After clicking the button, all the user-defined or modified custom report templates are replaced by the CAESAR II default templates. Note: This action affects ALL jobs system-wide and cannot be undone. Enables you to view existing custom reports on screen. Any number of load cases analyzed and any number of custom reports can be selected to view. Custom Reports are presented 1at a time for inspection. You can scroll through the reports vertically and horizontally where appropriate. Double clicking the column headers allows sorting of the results. Enables you to bring in a custom report template created by a different user or on a different machine. The report template file extension is *.C2RPT and can be read from any accessible location and does not require residing in any particular directory. Once the report template file is read, it becomes a part of the current CAESAR II configuration. The new report is appended to the Custom Reports area of the Static Output processor. The default name of the template file corresponds to the custom report name. You can access this feature is also available by clicking OPTIONS/CUSTOM REPORTS. Enables you to save any custom generated report to a text file and share it with other users. The report template file extension is *.C2RPT. This file can be saved to any accessible location. The default name of the template file corresponds to the custom report name. You can access this feature by clicking OPTIONS/CUSTOM REPORTS.
Edit Existing Custom Report Template
Reset Default Custom Report Templates
View Custom Report On Screen
Import Custom Report
Export Custom Report
Report Template Editor

After selecting the appropriate load case and custom report name and clicking Edit Existing or Add New Custom Report Template the Report Template Editor dialog appears.
Repor t Template Edit or Dialog
6-10
The Report Template Editor dialog consists of two sections: the template editor to the left and the preview grid to the right. The template editor has a tree-like structure and resembles Window Explorers folder view. There are 11 major categories available: Template Name and Template Settings for general report editing, and several output fields; Displacements, Restraints, Local Restraints, Equipment Nozzle Checks, Global and Local Forces, Flange Evaluation, Stresses, and Hanger Table Data. The Template Name category allows users to specify the report name, enter a brief description of the report, and select the report type. The report name followed by the template description display on the preview grid if the Include Report Name option is checked under the Template Settings category. There are 3 report types available: Individual - generates output reports, one per selected load case, in the format similar to the standard Displacements or Restraints reports. Summary - generates a single output report for all the specified load cases as a summary, in the format similar to the standard Restraint Summary report. Code Compliance - generates an output stress check report for multiple load cases as a single report, similar to the standard Code Compliance report.
Note Actual columns and their order on the reports are controlled solely by the user. Data from various categories can be customized on a single report to suit user's needs.
The Template Settings category provides options for the report header and the report body text, formatting and alignment. The font face, size, and color for the header and the report body may be set here. Users may wish to include or remove specific header text (such as Report Name, Job Title or Filters Description) by toggling the check box next to the corresponding item. Report Line Spacing enables user to change the spacing between lines of text. The Summary Line check box (used with Summary-type reports) toggles the appearance of the summary line with MAX values for each field/column per node. The Node Number/Name check box (used with Summary-type reports), if enabled, repeats the Node information on each Loadcase line; if disabled, then the Node will appear on the separate line above the data for Loadcases. These two options may help with later data manipulations when sending the reports to MS Excel spreadsheet
Note Any changes in the editor are immediately reflected in the preview window to the right.
Each of the following categories consists of related output data. For example, Displacements category contains three translational (DX, DY, and DZ) and three rotational (RX, RY, and RZ) fields; Stresses contains Axial, Bending, and Code stresses among other stress related fields. A number next to the field name indicates the Column Number this field will be placed in. When nothing or zero value is specified, this column will not be included in the current report. Each field contains following information that can be easily controlled by the user:
Field Name Description
Column Number Precision
Indicates the order of the fields in the output report. Indicates the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Field Name
Description
Sort Order
Specifies whether the data in the column is in ascending, descending, or in no order. This gives the user flexibility of reviewing reports for maximum (or minimum) values without extra effort. Allows the user to specify text font face, size and color for this field whenever special formatting is required. Note: The generic font settings for the entire report should be set at the Template Settings -> Body category. Allows the user to control left, right, or center alignment of the values in the column. Allows the user to customize the name of the field as it appears on the report by typing the new caption. This may be useful to customize the display of the output Displacements in the report to reflect the Plant North/South/East/West directions or Vertical/Horizontal notations instead of generic X/Y/Z. Allows the user to control the size of the column in terms of the number of displayed characters or digits. In addition, resizing the columns in the Preview Grid will adjust the Column Width Value. Entering a "0" will close the column and remove it from the report. Entering a "-1" will instruct the template to size the column to the predefined default size.
Font
Align Values Field Caption
Column Width
Units Based Precision Has two choices: Yes and No. When set to Yes, it enables the automatic control of the displayed number of decimal places to be calculated based on the selected display units. This value is used together with the Units Conversion Label value. The Precision value is ignored in this case. When set to No, the Precision value takes place.
Note When a category or any particular field is highlighted in the editor, the help text for this field is displayed in the Help box at the bottom of the editor section.
The Preview Grid on the right of the Custom Report Template Editor dialog is interactive. Users may drag the columns by their heading to arrange the order of the fields in the reports. Double clicking the column header will sort that columns values in ascending or descending order. The dragged column number or sorted order value will automatically be saved in the Column Number or Sort Order entry of that field in the editor tree. Clicking the column header once will highlight that field in the editor tree, extend its contents and scroll it to view.
Note The Preview Grid is limited to the first 50 lines for performance speedup. The entire report will be available after selecting the appropriate load case(s) and the custom report name on the Static Output Processor screen and clicking View Report.
Any current changes to the custom report template can be saved by clicking Save. The custom report template can also be saved under a different name by clicking Save As... The Save As... dialog appears prompting the user to enter the new template name a brief description, and the report type. Clicking Preview Report enables users to remove the grid lines from the Preview Grid. Clicking the same button again will add the grid lines for editing.
6-12
Filtering Reports
CAESAR II enables you to display a displacement, restraint, force, or stress within specified range. The filtering can also be performed on specific Line Numbers. You can access this feature by clicking Filters from the menu and the Filters dialog will display.
Filter s Dialog
Filters are useful in processing reports containing fields from more than one class, for example the Restraint Summary Extended report where fields from 2 classes restraints and displacements are present. For example, if the Restraints Class is failing but the Displacements Class is passing, then the default OR combination would print the entire dataset. To exclude this dataset from the report, the Class combination should be switched to AND. All Filter choices are saved with the current job. If you do not define a filter for any of the fields in the report, these fields are assumed to pass the filter condition and are printed. From and To nodes apply to all class tabs.
Note: By default both Fields and Classes are combined using the OR method: if any of the filtering fields passes the filter condition, the entire dataset is printed. You may choose to switch to the AND method in which only if all the filtering conditions are met will the entire dataset be printed. First, the fields in each class are checked for the filter compliance. This initial field check determines whether the entire class will pass or fail. Secondly, all classes are checked for the filter compliance. The data is filtered by Line Numbers first, then by Nodes, then by Classes and Fields as specified in the Filter Options.
Using the Filters Menu Option

1. Enter data in the From Nodes and/or To Nodes field. 2. Select the appropriate Filter Option. In most cases the defaults are sufficient. Filtering by Absolute or Signed Value: The default is to filter by the magnitude, regardless of the sign/direction. You may filter by a specific direction of load or displacement; this feature is particularly useful when looking for lifting off the supports in directional restraints (like +Y). 3. Select the appropriate Combination For field. Fields refer to the particular data items (columns) in each class; for example, DX and RZ are in the Displacements class, or FX and MZ are in the Restraints class, or Code Stress and Bending Stress are in the Stresses class. For further information see the note below. 4. Select the appropriate Combination For Class and click Ok to accept the changes. Classes refers to the major types of output, for example Displacements, Restraints, Forces, or Stresses. 5. Click the appropriate Class tab you want to apply the filter to.
6. Enter the information on the Class tab selected. Each tab contains related fields with a drop box and edit box. Each corresponding edit box displays the value to compare to. Each of the drop boxes has a list of comparison operators:
Operator > >= < <= == \= Description Greater than Greater or Equal Less than Less or Equal Equal Not Equal
7. Click OK to accept the changes. 8. From the Options menu click View Reports.
6-14
Report Options
For most load cases, except hanger design and fatigue, there are a variety of different report options that can be selected for review.
Note: Most Standard Reports have short and long versions, designated by the word Extended. The extended reports usually have more data items available and may require a Landscape option when printed. Displacements
Translations and rotations for each degree of freedom are reported at each node in the model.
Note: Users may now use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For more information see Filtering Report.
Restraints
Forces and moments on each restraint in the model are reported. There is a separate report generated for each load case selected.
6-16
Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates

It is possible to generate a restraint report where the loads and moments are aligned with the local element coordinate system. This is particularly useful when addressing skewed nozzles, where the axial, longitudinal and circumferential results are needed. As an example, consider the small system shown below:
This system consists of two small horizontal lines, anchored at both ends. The last element of each line is skewed 45 degrees in the X-Z plane. At the end of this skewed line is an axial restraint, as illustrated in the following figure:
The typical Global Restraint report for this system displays in the following table. Note that at node 140 this report shows two equal loads in the (global) X and Z directions. These values (24,463) are the global component loads acting on the skewed restraint. The actual magnitude of the restraint load, acting in-line with the pipe can be found by performing the SRSS of these component loads, which yields 34595. This value is the load on the restraint acting axially with the pipe.
Operating Case Restraint Loads Global Coordinate System

NODE FX lb. FY lb. FZ lb. MX ft.lb. MY ft.lb. MZ ft.lb.
100 119 140 200 219 240
-24463 0 24463 -24463 0 24463
-514 0 0 -514 0 0
66 -24528 24463 66 -24528 24463
1340.5 0.0 0.0 1340.5 0.0 0.0
-273.3 0.0 0.0 -273.3 0.0 0.0
-6418.6 0.0 0.0 -6418.6 0.0 0.0
Rigid ANC Rigid Z Flex X Rigid ANC Rigid Z Flex X
The process of performing SRSS or sine/cosine operations to obtain restraint loads in the element coordinate system can be tedious. As an alternative, a restraint report can be generated where all of the loads are aligned with the associated element coordinate system. The report for the same small job displays in the table below.
Operating Case Restraint Loads Local Element Coordinate System

NODE fx lb. fy lb. fz lb. mx ft.lb. my ft.lb. mz ft.lb.
100 119 140 200 219 240
-24463 0 34595 -24463 -17344 34595
66 -24528 0 66 -17344 0
514 0 0 514 0 0
1340.5 0.0 0.0 1340.5 0.0 0.0
-6418.6 0.0 0.0 -6418.6 0.0 0.0
273.3 0.0 0.0 273.3 0.0 0.0
Rigid ANC Rigid Z Flex X Rigid ANC Rigid Z Flex X
In reviewing the relationship between the local versus global restraint loads note the following:
The global FY (vertical) load at node 100 of -514 translates to a local fz load. For details on the global to local coordinate system relations, please refer to Chapter 6 of the Technical Reference Manual. (These two values are shown in the tables in bold for ease of visualization.) At node 140, the skewed axial restraint, the first table showing the global coordinate system loads, reports the two equal component loads. The second table showing the local loads, reports only the resultant axial load at the restraint. (These values are shown in the tables in italics for ease of visualization.)
6-18
Restraint Summary
Similar to the restraint report, this option provides force and moment data for all valid selected load cases together on one report.
Nozzle Check Report

The Nozzle Check report defines the appropriate force/moment limits on a specified nozzle.
Data for the first nozzle at node 10 corresponds to the previous input. The Limits shown in the report are the values from the input. Similarly, the Comparison method also reflects the input setting. The loads shown are the loads on the nozzle for the indicated load cases. If any load exceeds its corresponding allowable load, then entire line is shown in red (with an asterisk at the far right in the event the report is printed). The Resultant column reports the resultant forces and moments for the SRSS Comparison method, and the unity check value for the Unity Check method.
6-20
Flange Reports
Flange Reports are available after completing the In-line Flange Evaluation analysis. There are two methods and two corresponding reports for evaluating flanges under load: Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method (Peq) and ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 Method (NC-3658.3). The reports display some of the relevant input items along with the calculated corresponding Moments and Stresses or Equivalent Pressure for each node where the Flange Evaluation was requested. This is an elemental type report, and the flanges may be defined on either end of the element; so some lines in the report with no corresponding output would appear blank.
Flange Repor t
Global Element Forces

Forces and moments on the piping are reported for each node in the model.
6-22
Local Element Forces

These forces and moments have been transferring into the CAESAR II Local Coordinate system. Refer to the Technical Reference Manual for information on this local coordinate system.
Stresses
S!Fs and Code Stresses are reported for each node in the model. The code stresses are compared to the .Allowable stress at each node as a percentage. Note that stresses are not computed at nodes on rigid elements for more information see the figure on the following page. CAESAR II Ver.4.99.0. (Build 050930) Date: SEP 1.2005 Time: 7:50 Job: E:\CAESAR5.00\EX6.MPLES\TUTOR Licensed To: COADE.Inc. Internal Net Testing ID 10001 STRESSES REPORT: Stresses on Elements CASE 4 (SUS)WPl+H
Piping Code: B31.3 2004.April29.2005 CODE STRESS CHECK PASSED :LOADCASE 4 (SUS)WP1 H
Highest Stresses: ( KPa ) CodeStress Ratio: 11.B @Node 30 CodeStress: 14133.1 Allowable: 119279.3 Axial Stress: 2905.0 @Node 2B Bending Stress: 12752.4 @Node 30 Torsion Stress: 1021.7 @Node 35 HoopStress: 2B61.1 @Node 10 3D Max Intensity: 14133.1 @Node 30
NODE Bending Stress KPa 5 10 10 15 15 20 20 25 25 2B 0 0 2142 1242 0 0 1910 4147 B1B4 4101
Torsion Stress
KPa
SIF In Plane
SIF Out Plane
Code Stress KPa 13B1 14B1 37B6 2915 0 0 4077 6343 10629 7006
Allowable Stress
KPa
Ratio
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1.000 1.996 1.996 1.000 0.000 0.000 1.000 1.996 1.996 1.000
1.000 2.32B 2.32B 1.000 0.000 0.000 1.000 2.32B 2.32B 1.000
119279 119279 119279 119279 0 0 119279 119279 119279 119279 3 2 0 0 3 5 9 6
Note: Users may now use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class.
For more information see Filtering Report.
6-24
Stress Summary
The highest stresses at each node are presented for all load cases selected in summary format for quick review.
Code Compliance Report

Stress checks for multiple load cases may be included in a single report using the Code Compliance report, available from the Static Output processor. For this report, the user selects all load cases of interest, and then highlights Code Compliance under the Report Options. The resultant report shows the stress calculation for all load cases together, on an element-by-element basis.
6-26
CUmulatiYe Usage Report

The Cwnulative Usage report is available only when there are one or more fatigue-type load cases present. Once the Cwnulative Uage report is generated, regardless of the number of load cases selected, showing the combined impact of simulating selected fatigue loadings.
CAESAR II CUMULATIVE USAGE Load Case FILE: FATIGUE DATE:JUN 16,2005 F om Cycles Node
Usage
Ratio
To Node
Usage
Ratio
CUMULATIVE USAGE EVALUATION PASSED
HIGHEST USAGE RATIO IS 0.87 AT NODE HINODE MINIMUM ALLOWABLE CYCLES IS 12338
CASE 10 CASE 11 CASE 12 CASE 13 TOTAL CASE 10 CASE 11 CASE 12 CASE 13 TOTAL 10
(FAT) 110=L6-L4 (FAT) L11=L6-L7 (FAT) 112=L6-L8 (FAT) 113=L3-L8 (FAT) 110=L6-L4 (FAT) L11=L6-L7 (FAT) 112=L6-L8 (FAT) 113=L3-L8 110=L6-L4
0 0 0 0 200 11800 188000 12000 200 11Ann
5 5 5 5 5
0 0 0 0
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
stat:t
stat::t
stat:t
stat::t
stat:t
0 0 0 0
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
sta<t11201984 sta<t11220608 sta<t INFINTY sta<t INFINTY

stat:t
1511200832 1511219904 15 INFINTY 15 INFINTY 15
1510302976 0.00 n.nn
2010303424 0.00 n777 n.nn
General Computed Results

Load Case Report
The Load Case Report documents the Basic Names (as built in the Load Case Builder), User-Defined Names, Combination Methods, Load Cycles, and Load Case Options (Output Status, Output Type, Snubber Status, Hanger Stiffness Status, and Friction Multiplier) of the static load cases. This report is available from the General Computed Results column of the Static Output Processor.
6-28
Hanger Table with Text

This report provides basic information regarding spring hangers either selected by CAESAR II or the user. Information provided includes the node number, the number of springs required, the hanger table figure number and size, the hot load, the theoretical installed load, which is what the hangers are set to in the field prior to pulling the pins, the actual installed load, which is the load on the hanger when the pipe is empty, the spring rate from the catalog, and the horizontal movement determined from the CAESAR II output. If constant effort supports are selected then the hanger constant effort force is reported.
Input Echo
The input echo allows the user to select which portions of the input are to be reported in this output format. All basic element data (geometry), operating conditions, material properties, and boundary conditions are available in this report option.
Miscellaneous Data
This report displays the Allowable Stress Summary, Bend Data, Nozzle Flexibility Data, Pipe Report, Thermal Expansion Coefficients used during analysis, Bill of Materials, the Center of Gravity Report, and Wind and Wave input data.
Static Output Processing
1!1EJ
Miscellaneous REPORT, Miscellaneous Data Items File: C:\CAESAR\EXAHPLE._L
--------CAESAR II --------60. l
BEND
MISC. BEND REPORT TYPE SIFi
--------- -------
--------- --------Flange l. 87058
FILE:EXAHPLE.-p SIFo Ki
-------
---------
------l.55882
-----------------------6.81371 6.81371
Ko
--------- ------
?.
:-:174:-:13
6-30
Warnings
All warnings reported during the error checking process are summarized here.
Output Viewer Wizard

After clicking More >> in the lower right corner of the Static Output Processor, an Output Viewer Wizard dialog displays to the right. The Output Viewer Wizard can be hidden again by clicking Less <<.
Out put Viewer Wizar d
The Output Viewer Wizard consists of the Report Order window and auxiliary operational buttons. It enables users to add any report to the view by clicking Add or delete any report not needed by clicking Remove. Users can arrange the order of the reports by moving them up or down by clicking Move Up or Move Down on the selected report. Users may send a report to screen or to printer by checking the appropriate radio button in the upper section of the Output Viewer Wizard dialog. After clicking Finish, the reports are automatically sent to the specified device in the order displayed in the Report Order window. To generate a table of contents place a check mark in the Generate Table of Contents (TOC) box and a (TOC) is appended to the printed reports.
Note The TOC will display if Send to Screen was selected, regardless if the TOC check box was enabled or disabled.
6-32
Printing or Saving Reports to File Notes

The tabular results brought to the screen may be sent directly to a printer. Different combinations of load cases and report types may be chosen, each followed by the File-Print command, to create a single report.
Print
Prints copies of the reports. To print copies of multiple reports as a single report, use the Output Viewer Wizard to populate the report order tree, click Send To Printer and then Finish. Sends reports to a file (in ASCII format) rather than the printer. After selection, a dialog appears where users must select the file name. To change the file name for a new report, select FILE-SAVE AS.
File Save
Typically, the set of output reports that a user might wish to print out for documentation purposes might be:
Load Case Report Purpose
SUSTAINED EXPANSION OPERATING OPERATING SUSTAINED
STRESS STRESS DISPLACEMENTS RESTRAINTS RESTRAINTS
Code compliance Code compliance Interference checks Hot restraint, equipment loads As-installed restraint, equipment loads
Note Load cases used for hanger sizing produce no reports. Also, the hanger table and hanger table with text reports are printed only once even though more than one active load case may be highlighted.
To save multiple reports as a single report to a file, use the Output Viewer Wizard.
Save As Dialog
Note: The signs in all CAESAR II Reports show the forces and moments that act ON something. The Element Force/Moment report shows the forces and moments that act ON each element to keep that element in static equilibrium. The Restraint Force/Moment report shows the forces and moments that act ON each restraint.
Note: When sending reports to MSWord, if a file named "header.doc" exists in the \caesar\system directory, its contents will be read and used as the page header when CAESAR II exports the report to MSWord. The intent is that "header.doc" contains the company logo, address details and formatting for tables. The interface uses a style names "report table" which users can setup in "header.doc".
6-34
3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output Processor

The Static Output Processor Graphics Engine is used to review analytic results in graphic mode. The Static Output 3D Graphics Engine shares the same general capabilities as the Piping Input Processor's Graphics. It uses the same HOOPS Standard Toolbar that enables users to zoom, orbit, pan, and several other options among them the ability to switch views and modes. Additional capabilities of the Static Output Graphics Engine can be found on the Output Toolbar and include the display of displaced shapes, highlighting and zooming to maximum displacements, restraint loads, and stresses of the model. One of the major advantages of the 3D Graphics over the original CAESAR II graphics is the graphical representation of stresses by value and by percent using color.
Out put T oolba r
A variety of CAESAR II Output Plot functions are accessed from the Show menu that is broken into submenus Displacements, Restraints, Forces/Moments, and Stresses. Alternatively, these functions can be activated by clicking the appropriate buttons The CAESAR II Output Graphics Engine is extensive. Users are encouraged to experiment with all the output options, noting which ones could be most appropriate for a given application. Some of the output options are discussed below.
Deflected Shape
Overlays the scaled geometry with a different color into the current plot for the selected load case. Clicking the arrow to the right of this button displays an additional menu with the selected feature checked and the Adjust Deflection Scale option. Specifies the deflected shape plot scale factor.
Adjust Deflection Scale
Note: Entering a value that is too small may prevent visual detection of the deflected shape. Entering a scale value that is too large may graphically "break" or discontinue the model. This option can also be accessed from the Show menu, by clicking DISPLACEMENT/DEFLECTED SHAPE. Gives users an option to visually display the expansion of a selected pipe due to the addition of heat.
Grow
Button and Name
Description
Places the actual magnitude of the X, Y, or Z displacements on the currently displayed model. Maximum Displacements Note: The element containing the displaced node is highlighted, and the camera viewpoint is repositioned (preserving the optical distance to the model) to bring the displaced node to the center of the view. It starts with highest value for the given direction, after pressing Enter, the remaining values are placed in a similar manner until all values are exhausted or become zero. Clicking the Maximum Displacements button again clears the view of the displayed values and highlighting. This option can also be accessed from the Show menu, by clicking DISPLACEMENT/MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENT/(X, Y, OR Z). If none of the highlighted operations was previously used, the default report shown will be the Stresses Report for currently selected load case. Shows/hides the Event Viewer on the plot. One of the advantages of the Event Viewer Grid dialog is its ability to enable users to navigate among the elements, navigate to various reports within a load case, and view the reports for other load cases. This is done in the Report Selection window on the left in the dialog. This window has a tree structure similar in operation to Windows Explorer. Clicking the + sign for a particular load case will expand the tree of its reports. Selecting the report displays the data in the grid view to the right. Selecting a node or an element in the grid view (when Select Elements is enabled) highlights the corresponding element on the graphics view, and zooms to the selected element if the corresponding Zoom to Selection is enabled. Similarly, clicking an element on the graphics view highlights the corresponding data row in the report view of the Event Viewer dialog. Thus, this is a bidirectional connection. Changing the load case within the Event Viewer Grid dialog will update the graphics view (if applicable) and the Load Case Selection pull-down box on the toolbar. Select Elements Allows the user to select one element at a time in the graphics. The Event Viewer dialog is also used in conjunction with the Select Elements button. When Select Elements is active, or when users double click on an element, CAESAR II highlights it and displays it in the Event Viewer dialog with the corresponding element highlighted in the report grid. Adds restraints symbols to the plot. Restraints are plotted as arrowheads with the direction of the arrow indicating the direction of the force exerted by the restraint on the piping geometry Places the actual magnitude of the calculated restraint loads (corresponding to the particular button) for a selected load case on the currently displayed geometry. The Maximum Restraints Loads button displays the load magnitude value next to the node, the element containing the node is highlighted and is brought to the center of the graphics view. The Zoom to Selection and Show Event Viewer Grid options are still available at the discretion of the user. After pressing Enter any remaining values will be placed in a similar manner.
Grid
Show Event Viewer
Output Restraints Symbols
Maximum Restraint Loads
6-36
Button and Name
Description
Maximum Code Stress
Displays the stress magnitudes in descending order one at a time. Note: The Maximum Code Stress buttons operation is similar to the Maximum Displacements button, the stress value is displayed next to the node and the element containing the node is highlighted and is moved to the center of the view. The Zoom to Selection and Show Event Viewer Grid options are still available at the discretion of the user. After pressing Enter the 2nd, the 3rd, etc. highest value is placed in the similar manner with corresponding element highlighting. In addition to the "dry" numbers that could be found in a corresponding report, this option gives the user graphical representation and distribution of large calculated code stresses throughout the system.
Overstress
Displays the overstressed point distribution for a particular load case. Nodes with a calculated "code stress to allowable stress ratio" of 100% or more display in red; the remaining nodes/elements display in the color selected for the lowest percent ratio. This feature is useful to quickly observe the overstressed areas in the model.
Note: Overstressed conditions are only detected for load cases where a code compliance check was done (i.e., where there are allowable stresses available).
Note: Overstressed nodes will display in red in the Event Viewer Grid (if it is enabled). Note: The model is still fully functional, it can be zoomed, panned, or rotated at the discretion of the user.
Code Stress Colors by Value
Displays the piping system in a range of colors, where the color corresponds to a certain boundary value of the code stress. This feature is used to quickly see the distribution of the code stresses in the model for a particular load case.
In addition to the model color highlight in the graphics view, the corresponding color key legend window is displayed in the top left corner of the graphics view. The legend window can be resized and moved. The colors and corresponding stress levels can be set in the CONFIGURATION/SETUP module, on the Plot Colors tab.
Displays the piping system in a range of colors, where the color corresponds to a Code Stress Colors by certain percent ratio of code stress to allowable stress. This option is only valid for Percent load cases where a code compliance check was done (i.e., where there are allowable stresses available).
Code Stress Colors by Percent is similar to the Stress Colors by Value option and is generally used to quickly see the distribution of the code stress to allowable ratios in the model for a particular load case. The legend window with the corresponding color key also displays in the left upper corner of the graphics view. The legend window can be resized and moved. Clicking the arrow to the right of this button displays an additional menu with two options: Display and Adjust Settings . Selecting the Display option displays the color distribution. Selecting the Adjust Settings option displays the Stress Settings dialog where desired values and corresponding colors could be set or adjusted. These settings are related to the particular job they are set for and are saved in the corresponding job_name.XML file in the current job data directory (see 3D/HOOPS Graphics in Piping Input Processor, 3D Graphics Configuration chapter for more information on the *.XML file).
Code Str ess C olor s by Per cent
6-38
Animation of Static Results Notes

CAESAR II allows the user to view the piping system as it moves to the displaced position of the basic load cases. To animate the static results, execute the View-Animate command. The following screen appears:
Anima ted Gr aphic Scr een
The Animated Plot menu has several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion are the commands to activate the animation. Motion uses centerline representation while Volume Motion produces 3D graphics. The desired load case may be selected from the drop down list. Animations may be sped up or slowed down or stopped using the toolbars. CAESAR II also enables users to save animated plots as HTML files by clicking FILE/SAVE AS ANIMATION. After saving these files users can view them on any machine outside of CAESAR II.
Note The corresponding animation graphics file <job_name>.HSF must be transferred along with the HTML file for proper display.
Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis In This Chapter

Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II ................................... 7-2 Dynamic Analysis Input Processor Overview ...................... 7-6 Input Overview Based on Analysis Category ....................... 7-8 Harmonic............................................................................... 7-29 Earthquake (Spectrum) ......................................................... 7-32 Relief Loads (Spectrum) ....................................................... 7-37 Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum) ................................. 7-38 Time History ......................................................................... 7-39 Error Handling and Analyzing the Job ................................. 7-42
7-2
Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II

The dynamic analysis capabilities found in CAESAR II include natural frequency calculations, harmonic analysis, response spectrum analysis, and time history analysis. Included with the CAESAR II Dynamic modules are processors, which can generate several types of dynamic loads. An example is the processor, which converts loading with respect to time into a force response spectrum. This ability to define different types of dynamic effects improves the accuracy of dynamic modeling and makes these methods suitable for a wider range of dynamic problems. Natural frequency information can indicate the tendency of a piping system to respond to dynamic loads. A systems modal natural frequencies typically should not be too close to equipment operating frequencies and, as a general rule, higher natural frequencies usually cause less trouble than low natural frequencies. CAESAR II provides both calculation of a systems modal natural frequencies, as well as animated plots of the associated mode shapes. CAESAR II also provides for the analysis of dynamic loads that are cyclic in nature. Applications of harmonic analyses include fluid pulsation in reciprocating pump lines or vibration due to rotating equipment. These loads are modeled as concentrated forces or displacements at one or more points in the system. To provide the proper phase relationship between multiple loads a phase angle can also be associated with these forces or displacements. Any number of forcing frequencies may be analyzed allowing easy analysis of equipment startup, and any operating modes. Harmonic responses represent the maximum dynamic amplitude the piping system undergoes and have the same form as a static analysis - node deflections and rotations, local forces and moments, restraint loads, and stresses. For example, if the results show an X displacement at node 45 of 5.8 cm. then the dynamic motion due to the cyclic excitation would be from +5.8 cm. to -5.8 cm. at this point in the system. The stresses shown are one half of, or one amplitude of, the full cyclic stress range. The third type of dynamic analysis available in CAESAR II is the response spectrum method. The response spectrum method allows an impulse type transient event to be characterized by a response vs. frequency spectra. Each mode of vibration of the piping system is related to one response on the spectrum. These modal responses are summed together to produce the total system response. The stresses for these analyses, summed with the sustained stresses, should be compared to the occasional stress allowables defined by the piping code. Spectral analysis can be used in a wide variety of applications. Ground motion associated with a seismic event is supplied as displacement, velocity, or acceleration response spectra. The assumption is that all the supports move with the defined ground motion and the piping system catches up to the supports; it is this inertial effect, which loads the system. The shock spectra, which define the ground motion, may vary between the three global directions and may even change for different groups of supports (independent as opposed to uniform support motion). Another response spectrum application is based on single point loading rather than a uniform inertial loading. CAESAR II makes effective use of this technique to analyze a wide variety of impulse type transient loads. Relief valve loads, water hammer loads, slug flow loads, and rapid valve closure type loads all cause single impulse dynamic loads at various points in the piping system. The response to these dynamic forces can be confidently and conservatively predicted using the force spectrum method. The fourth type of dynamic analysis is time history analysis. This is one of the most accurate methods, in that it uses numeric integration of the dynamic equation of motion to simulate the system response throughout the load duration. CAESAR IIs Time History Analysis method can solve any type of dynamic loading, but due to its exact solution, requires more resources (memory, calculation speed and time) than other methods. Therefore, it may not pay to use this method when, for example the spectrum method offers sufficient accuracy.
Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis
7-3
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis

The dynamic techniques employed by CAESAR II require strict linearity in the piping and structural systems. Dynamic responses associated with nonlinear effects are not addressed. An example of a nonlinear effect is slapping, such as when a pipe lifts off the rack at one moment and impacts the rack the next. For the dynamic model the pipe must be either held down or allowed to move freely. The nonlinear restraints used in the static analysis must be set to be active or inactive for the dynamic analysis. CAESAR II allows the user to set the nonlinear restraints to any configuration found in the static results (this is done by specifying the number of the Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status). Most often the user selects the operating case to set the nonlinear restraint configuration. For example, if a +Y support is active in the static operating case (normally case 1 or 3), and the operating case is used to set the status of the nonlinear supports for dynamics, CAESAR II installs a double-acting Y support at that location for the dynamic analysis. The pipe will not move up or down at that point regardless of the dynamic load or tend to move.
7-4
A second nonlinear effect is friction. Friction effects must also be linearized for use in dynamic analysis. By default CAESAR II excludes the effects of friction from the dynamic analysis. If requested CAESAR II can approximate the friction resistance to movement in the dynamic model by including spring stiffness normal to the restraint line of action. For a Y restraint with friction, the friction stiffness would be added in the X and Z directions. The stiffness of these springs is a user-defined function of the friction has calculated in the static analysis. For a Y restraint with friction, the friction stiffness would be added in the X and Z directions. The stiffness of these springs is a user-defined function of the friction load calculated in the static analysis. CAESAR II computes the friction stiffness by multiplying the resultant force on the restraint from the selected static case results, by the friction coefficient, and by the user-defined Stiffness Factor for Friction. For example, given a normal force on the restraint from the static analysis is 1000 lb and the friction coefficient (mu) is 0.3; the total friction load is 300 lb. If the user-defined Stiffness Factor for Friction is 500, then springs having a stiffness of SQRT(10002 + 3002)*0.3*500=156605 lb./in are inserted into the dynamic model in the two directions perpendicular to the friction restraint's line of action. Converting friction damping into stiffness is not mathematically legitimate, but can serve as a good engineering approximation for dynamic friction in a wide variety of situations. Note that the stiffness of "force" / "length" incorporates the user defined value for "force" but the length here is always inches.
7-5
Major Steps in Dynamic Input

Developing dynamic input for CAESAR II comprises four basic steps:
1 Specifying the load(s) 2 Modifying the mass and stiffness model 3 Setting the parameters that control the analysis 4 Starting and error checking the analysis
Except for starting the analysis, these steps may occur in any order. Due to the amount of data, which may be specified, it is best to establish some sort of pattern in defining the input. There is no reason to specify dynamic loads if only natural frequencies are to be counted or calculated. Harmonic analysis requires the input of driving frequencies and forces or displacements to define and locate the sinusoidally varying point loads. Creating the dynamic loads for spectra or time history analysis requires the most attention by the user. The response spectra or time history profile must be defined, built, or selected. Force sets must be built for force response spectra and time history analysis. Response spectra /time history (and force sets) are combined with other data to build the load cases to be analyzed. Finally, additional load cases may be constructed by combining shock results with static results to check code compliance on occasional stresses. CAESAR II provides several processors to simplify many of these tasks. For dynamic analysis, CAESAR II converts each piping element from a continuous beam element between two nodes to a stiffness between two masses. Additional stiffness is added at the mass (node) points to model anchors, restraints, hangers, and other supports in the static analysis model. The masses assigned to each node are one half the sum of all element masses framing into the node. These masses are used as translational inertias only. Rotational moments of inertia are ignored in the dynamic mass model. (Their inclusion in the analysis would cause a large increase in solution time without a corresponding improvement in the general accuracy of the analysis.) In many instances the mass and stiffness established in the static model will be used without modification in the dynamic analysis. Some situations, however, can be improved by the deletion of mass points or degrees of freedom. Usually this occurs in analyses where the unnecessary masses are far from the area of interest in the model or where the unnecessary degrees of freedom do not act in the direction of interest. Some piping systems have supports that are installed to suppress vibration and do not affect the static analysis. These shock absorbers or snubbers can be entered (if not entered in statics) during the dynamic input as additional stiffness. The major function of the control parameter list is to set the type of analysis to be performed: calculation of natural frequencies and mode shapes, harmonic analysis, spectral analysis, or time history. General settings for the analysis are also defined in the control parameter list such as maximum frequency cutoff and mode summation methods. It is here, too, that the static configuration for nonlinear restraints (if any) is defined, and the friction factor for including friction in the dynamic run is entered (the default friction factor is 0.0, which implies that no friction stiffness will be used). The advanced option allows the user to change the parameters governing the eigensolution (which does the modal extraction). These parameters should only be altered under special circumstances.
7-6
Dynamic Analysis Input Processor Overview

Entering the Dynamic Analysis Input Menu
The dynamic input module allows the user to specify the dynamic loads imposed on the piping system. To perform a dynamic analysis, the static model must first be created and error checked through the CAESAR II Input processor. Usually the model is also run through static analysis before the dynamic analysis begins but this is not a requirement unless nonlinear supports or hanger selections are included in the model. If nonlinear supports are present the static analysis must be run and the results made available before the dynamic analysis can be performed. To enter the dynamics input, the proper job name must be current prior to selecting the Analysis-Dynamics file options of the Main Menu.
Analysis-Dyna mics Option
Upon entering the dynamic input processor, the following screen appears.
Dyna mic I nput Pr ocessor
7-7
The type of analysis is indicated in the drop down list in the upper left portion of the screen (new jobs default to Other). Input data is organized in pages according to type. Users can access these pages by selecting their title tabs. After data is entered, the job can be saved, error checked only, or analyzed, using the menu commands or toolbars. A variety of dynamic analysis options are available and require different types of input. To simplify the input process, the user should select the analysis from the drop list. Once selected, the input screen changes to reflect the required inputs.
Dyna mic Analysis Type Specification
Available commands during dynamic input processing are:

File-Save Input File-Check
Saves the current input data. Checks the input data for errors or inconsistencies.
Input
File-Run Analysis Edit-Add Entry Edit-Delete Entry DLF Spectrum Generator Tools-Relief Load Synthesis Tools-Spectrum Data Points
Starts the dynamic analysis.
Adds a new data line on the current input page (tab page). Deletes the selected data lines on the current input page. Allows the user to generate a file containing a Dynamic Load Factor vs. Frequency Spectrum from a Force vs. Time profile. Provides a utility for estimating loads, flows, and other results for gas or liquid relief valves. Used to enter data points for user-defined spectra.
7-8
Input Overview Based on Analysis Category

The multitude of dynamic analysis types available in CAESAR II can be somewhat intimidating at first. Selection of Analysis Type from the pull down list displays only those tabs for which input is appropriate. Those items are discussed by analysis type.
Modal Specifying the Loads

Modal analysis simply extracts natural frequencies and shapes for the systems modes of vibration. Therefore no loadings need to be or may be specified.
Lumped M asses
On this page, the user may add or delete mass from the mass model. Extra mass which may have been ignored as insignificant in the static model (e.g. a flange pair) can be directly entered here. Also weights modeled as downward acting concentrated forces, must be added here (CAESAR II does not assume that concentrated forces are system weights, i.e., forces due to gravity acting on a mass). Masses may also be deleted from the static mass model; this is the same as deleting degrees-of-freedom. For the most part, mass deletion is a tool used to economize the analysis. If the system response to some dynamic load is isolated to specific sections of the piping system, other sections of the system may be removed from the dynamic model by removing their mass. Mass can also be deleted selectively for any of the three global coordinate directions when deletion of directional degreesof-freedom is desired. For example, if a piping system includes a structural frame which supports the weight (the piping rests on the structure and is connected to the structure only in the Y direction), these two systems (piping and structure) are independent of each other in the X and Z directions, so the X and Z mass of the structure can be removed without affecting the piping models results. With the X and Z masses removed, the calculations for the piping structural model proceed much faster.
Snubbers
Snubber s
7-9
Certain supports, called snubbers, only resist dynamic loading, while allowing static displacement, such as that due to thermal growth. It is on this page that snubbers can be included in the model. Snubbers must have their stiffness explicitly entered (they do not default to rigid, since snubbers are typically not as stiff as other types of restraints).
Note: Snubbers may also be entered in the input processor rather than in the dynamic processor. DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard
Several common shock definitions are based on just a few parameters. Supplying these parameters to the DLF/Spectrum Generator or Spectrum Wizard will produce these shock definitions. Three sources for seismic spectra are used - the Uniform Building Code, ASCE 7 and the International Building Code - to build period versus g load spectra. Two types of force response spectra (dynamic load factor versus frequency) are also built here - the safety relief valve response spectrum found in B31.1 and a general force response spectrum derived from the user's own time history. Clicking the icon in the dynamic analysis input processor opens the Spectrum Wizard.
The following window appears:
7-10
Each of the five spectra may be selected using the radio buttons on the left side of the window. A default spectrum name is provided but any valid file name, without blanks, may be entered in its place. Once the input parameters are entered, the spectrum is built for the analysis by clicking the Generate Spectrum button. To exit this processor, click Done. After clicking Generate Spectrum, the processor will display the spectrum data and await a user response Save to File, OK or Cancel. A completed shock spectrum is shown below:
Save to File
Saves the spectrum as a file with the same spectrum name in the current folder. Two files are saved for the seismic spectra, 1 horizontal and 1 vertical distinguished by the suffix H or V at the end of the name. You must specify a unique spectrum name, or the processor will overwrite any existing files of the same name. It is not necessary to save the spectrum data to a file to use the data in the current job. Clicking OK does that. Use Save to File only if you wish to reuse the data in other CAESAR II Dynamic analyses.
OK
After clicking OK, the processor loads the appropriate data in the Spectrum Definitions tab in the Dynamic Input and moves the data to the dynamic input. Closing the processor, updates the dynamic input; lists the spectrum definitions and enables reviewing of the generated spectra by clicking the Enter/Edit Spectra Data button at the top of the dynamic analysis input window.
Cancel
Clicking Cancel on this display quits the display without loading the data into the dynamic input. The specifics for each spectrum generator are discussed below.
7-11
UBC Selecting this option creates earthquake spectra horizontal and vertical according to the 1997 Uniform Building Code (UBC).
7-12
Spectrum Name
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that will be generated here. A suffix of H and V is added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. Once properly entered, these names are listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these names as data file names if you like. Do not include a space in the spectrum name. The horizontal design response spectrum will be based on the curve shown in UBC Figure 16-3 (below). Ts=Cv/2.5Ca & T0=Ts/5
7-13
The vertical spectrum will be set to 50% of ICa across the entire period range.
Importance Factor
This is the Seismic Importance Factor, I, as defined in Table 16-K. The calculated spectrum accelerations will be multiplied by this value to generate the shock spectra. Values range from 1.0 to 1.25 based on the function of the structure.
Seismic Coefficient Ca
Based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, this is the "Zero Period Acceleration" for the site as defined in Table 16-Q. Table values range from 0.06 to 0.66.
Seismic Coefficient Cv
Based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, this parameter sets the ground acceleration at higher periods (lower frequencies) for the site as defined in Table 16-R. Table values range from 0.06 to 1.92.
7-14
ASCE7 Selecting this option creates earthquake spectra horizontal and vertical according to the ASCE 7 Standard.
Spectrum Name
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that will be generated here. A suffix of H and V will be added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. Once entered, these names are listed on the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these names as data file names if you like. Do not include spaces in the spectrum name. The horizontal design response spectrum will be based on the curve shown in ASCE 7 Figure 9.4.1.2.6 (below). Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5. Above a period of 4 seconds, the horizontal spectrum acceleration changes to.
7-15
The vertical spectrum will be set to 20% of SDS across the entire period range. Neither I nor R affect the vertical spectrum.
Importance Factor Ip
This is the Occupancy Importance Factor, Ip, as defined in Table 11.5-1, applied in accordance with paragraph 12.9.2. The calculated horizontal spectrum accelerations will be multiplied by this value to generate the shock spectra. Values range from 1.0 to 1.5 based on the function of the structure
Site Coefficient Fa
Listed in Table 11.4-1, Fa is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped short period maximum considered earthquake acceleration (SS). Table values range from 0.8 to 2.5. This value is used with the mapped short period acceleration to set the response accelerations based on local soil conditions.
Site Coefficient Fv
Listed in Table 11.4-2, Fv is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped 1-second period maximum considered earthquake acceleration (S1). Table values range from 0.8 to 3.5. This value is used with the mapped 1-second period acceleration to set the response accelerations based on local soil conditions.
Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS)

This is the mapped ground acceleration (the maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration) at the system location for a structure having a period of 0.2 second and 5% critical damping. Short period accelerations are defined in the maps located in Chapter 22.
Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)

This is the mapped ground acceleration (the maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration) at the system location for a structure having a period of 1 second and 5% critical damping. One-second period accelerations are defined in the maps located in Chapter 22.
Response Modification Rp
This is the Response Modification Coefficient, Rp, as defined in Table 12.2-1 and applied in accordance with paragraph 12.9.2.
7-16
IBC Selecting this option creates earthquake spectra horizontal and vertical according to the International Building Code 2000
Spectrum Name
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that will be generated here. A suffix of H and V will be added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. Once properly entered, these names will be listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these names as data file names if you like. Do not include a space in the spectrum name. The horizontal design response spectrum will be based on the curve shown in IBC 2000 Fig. 1615.1.4 (below). Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5
7-17
The vertical spectrum will be set to 20% of SDS (implied in 1617.1.2) across the entire period range.
Importance Factor
This is the Occupancy Importance Factor, IE, as defined in Section 1616.2 and shown in Table 1604.5. The calculated spectrum accelerations will be multiplied by this value to generate the shock spectra. Values range from 1.0 to 1.5 based on the function of the structure.
Site Coefficient Fa
Listed in Table 16.15.1.2(1), Fa is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped short period maximum considered earthquake acceleration (SS). Table values range from 0.8 to 2.5. This value is used with the mapped short period acceleration to set the response accelerations based on local soil conditions.
Site Coefficient Fv
Listed in Table 1615.1.2(2), Fv is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped 1-second period maximum considered earthquake acceleration (S1). Table values range from 0.8 to 3.5. This value is used with the mapped 1-second period acceleration to set the response accelerations based on local soil conditions.
Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS)

This is the mapped ground acceleration (the maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration) at the system location for a structure having a period of 0.2 second and 5% critical damping where the probability of its exceedance over 50 years is 2%. Short period accelerations are defined in the maps of Section 1615.1.
Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)

This is the mapped ground acceleration (the maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration) at the system location for a structure having a period of 1 second and 5% critical damping where the probability of its exceedance over 50 years is 2%. One-second period accelerations are defined in the maps of Section 1615.1.
Response Modification R
This is the Response Modification Coefficient, R, as defined in Table 9.5.2.2. The calculated horizontal spectrum accelerations will be divided by this value to generate the shock spectra in accordance with Equation 9.5.6.5-3. This term reflects system ductility. Values range from 3.0 to 8.0 for most plant structures and 3.5 for piping is not atypical.
7-18
Mexican Response Spectrum
Generating a Mexican Response Spectrum:

You can generate a Mexican Response Spectrum using the Mexican Seismic Code. Generate the spectrum from the Dynamic Input by clicking . Clicking displays the DLF Spectrum Generator dialog. Once the dialog displays, click CFE Diseno por Sismo and enter the corresponding data on the right, as displayed below.
Spectrum Name
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that are generated here. A suffix of H and V is added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. Once entered, the names are listed on the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these names as data file names if you like. Do not include spaces in the spectrum name.
Seismic Zone
Select the correct zone from the menu. There are 4 different choices available: A, B, C and D. For more information on the choices please refer to the Manual DE Diseno por Sismo (Seismic Design Manual) for Mexico. Page 1.3.29 of the manual displays a map with the different regions. It would appear that zone D is the zone of highest seismic activity while zone A is the least active.
7-19
Soil Type
I Hard Soil: II Med. Soil: III Soft Soil: Ground deposits formed exclusively by layers with propagation velocity b0 = 700 m/s or modulus of rigidity >= 85000 t/m. Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of propagation which meets the condition: c Ts + s Tc> c Tc Ground deposits with fundamental period of effective vibration of propagation which meet the condition: c Ts + s Tc < c Tc
Structural Group
Group A Group B Group C High Degree of Safety Intermediate Degree of Safety Low Degree of Safety
Towers and tanks are examples of Group A structures since a high degree of safety is required during their design. Group B structures require an intermediate safety degree and those belonging to group C require a low degree of safety.
Orthogonal Increase Factor

Mexican Earthquake Code considers an SRSS type effect on the structure. This value scales up the earthquake loads in a linear (scalar) fashion. Traditionally this value 1.118 and should always be > 1.0.
Analysis Notes:
7-20
As with every other earthquake loading analysis, the object is to compute the shear force at the center of mass of each vessel element. Once the shear force at each elevation is known, the moments can be accumulated to the base, leg or lug support. You should begin the analysis by computing the weights and centroidal distances of all of the vessel elements. It is very important to model the structure in sections that are appropriate in length. For cylinders, this value is about 10 or 12 feet ( 3m ). This ensures that the program has enough information to compute the natural period of vibration with sufficient accuracy. With the given input data and calculated earthquake weights and natural frequency, PVElite determines the values from table 3.1 of the Mexican Seismic Code. The values are: ao c Ta(s) Tb(s) r Spectral Coordinate used in computing a Spectral Coordinate used in computing a Period Value used in computing a Period Value used in computing a Exponent used in computing a
Note: For group A structures the values of the spectral ordinates ao, c obtained from table 3.1 are multiplied by 1.5.
After defining the needed data, click Generate Spectrum to create the spectrum, as shown below.
Note: This spectrum and its associated data are also linked with the remainder of the dynamic input stream.
B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force Response Spectrum
7-21
Selecting this option creates a normalized force response (Dynamic Load Factor) spectrum for loads from a safety valve discharge into an open system in accordance with the non-mandatory rules of B31.1 Appendix II Rules for the Design of Safety Valve Installations.
Spectrum Name
This is the name for the force response spectrum that is generated here. Once entered, this name is listed on the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these names as data file names if you like. Do not include spaces in the spectrum name. The spectrum is based on the curve shown in B31.1 Appendix II, refer to Fig. II-3-2.
Opening Time (milliseconds)

Enter the opening time of the relief valve.
7-22
User Defined Time History Waveform Selecting this option creates a normalized force response (Dynamic Load Factor) spectrum based on a userentered load vs. time history.
7-23
Spectrum Name
This is the name given to the Force Response Spectrum created from the time history load defined here. Once entered, this name is listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and is used with the Force Sets to build the Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these names as data file names if you like. Do not include spaces in the spectrum name.
Max. Table Frequency

Enter the maximum frequency desired for the force response spectrum you are about to generate. The upper limit should fall beyond the peak of the dynamic load factors calculated here. Ideally, the maximum table frequency will show a constant dynamic load factor of 1.0
Number of Points
Enter the number of frequency/dynamic load factor pairs you want to generated for your data. Twenty is a typical value.
Enter Pulse Data

Clicking here displays a table where you can define the time history of the event. For example a trapezoid event defined at time 0 where there is no load, this load ramps up to full load of 1.0 (the load is normalized here) in 80 milliseconds; the load remains constant for the next 920 msec (at the time 1000 msec) and then ramps down to zero over 250 msec.
7-24
Generate Spectrum
Clicking here converts the time history into its equivalent force response spectrum in terms of Dynamic Load Factor versus frequency (below). The buttons on this window perform the same tasks as those defined at the start of this section.
Spectrum Definitions
Spectr um Definitions
7-25
Response spectrum table values can be entered directly or built and stored as a file for use by CAESAR II such as those generated through the DLF Spectrum Generator. Data stored in a file can be referenced by any job run on the machine. The Spectrum Wizard also serves this purpose -providing the spectrum definitions and data points. There are two parts to the shock definition - 1) the statement of the name and type of data and 2) the table of actual spectrum data points. If the spectrum data is to be read from a file, the second part of the shock definition is not necessary, instead, the symbol # should precede the spectrum name to indicate that the data comes from a file on the hard disk. The name of the hard disk file is the name of the shock spectrum without the symbol and without an extension; it must be located in the same directory as the piping job.
Note The Spectrum Wizard automates common shock definitions, for more information refer to the DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard later in this chapter.
When using a file created by the DLF Spectrum Generator, the user must tell CAESAR II the type of data which resides in the file. (The actual file only contains a table of data points.) This will always be Frequency vs. ForceMultiplier data, with linear interpolation) so a typical definition might look like #TESTFILE FREQ FORCE LIN LIN This line tells CAESAR II that there is a file containing spectrum table points on the hard disk by the name of TESTFILE, the table is comprised of frequency versus force multiplier data, and is to be interpolated linearly.
Note The data in this file may alternatively be read in directly from the Spectrum Data Points dialog box. In this case the "#" should be omitted from the spectrum declaration.
Force Sets
For ce Sets
7-26
Force spectrum analyses, such as a relief valve loading, differ from earthquake analyses in that there is no implicit definition of the load distribution. For example, for earthquakes, the loading is uniform over the entire structure and proportional to the pipes mass. With relief valves (and other point loadings) the load is not uniformly distributed and is not proportional to the mass. A water hammer load, for example, is proportional to the speed of sound and the initial velocity of the fluid. Its point of application is at subsequent elbow-elbow pairs. Force spectrum analyses require more information than the more common earthquake simulations. This information is the load magnitude, direction, and location. Forces are grouped into like-numbered force sets when these forces occur together, or need to be manipulated in the analysis together. Typical force set input might appear as -3400 Y 35 1 -1250 Y 35 2 where the -3400 and the -1250 are clearly the loads, Y is the direction, 35 is the node number, and the 1 and 2 are the respective load cases. This might indicate two different loading levels of one particular load. For a skewed load, the force spectrum input might appear as shown below: -2134 Y 104 1 -2134 X 104 1 This demonstrates multiple components in a single pulse spectrum set. (In the case above the pulse spectrum set number is 1). These forces obviously belong in the same force set, since different components of a skewed load always occur together. Spectrum/Load Cases
Spectr um L oa d Ca ses
Spectrum Load Cases for force spectrum analyses are set up somewhat differently than Spectrum Load Cases for earthquake analyses. The Spectrum Load Cases for force spectrum runs must link a Force Multiplier spectrum to a force set. The load case definition consists of one or more lines on which a spectrum, scale factor (usually 1.0), direction, and force set number is given. TESTFILE 1.0 Y 1
7-27
Note The direction specified on this line does not need to be the direction of the load (which is specified in the force set). This direction is used for labeling and designation of independent vs. dependent loadings.
More complex nuances of force spectrum load cases are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual. The complexity increases as the number of components in the load case goes beyond 1, and as the time history phenomena being modeled deviates from true impulse type loading. Static/Dynamic Combinations This is discussed under Earthquake. Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model Lumped masses and snubbers are modified in the same way as described for Modal Analysis. Control Parameters
Cont r ol Par a meter s
These parameters describe how the analysis is to be conducted. Particular attention should be paid to the modal summation methodology. Details are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual. Advanced These rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information, see the Technical Reference Manual.
7-28
Control Parameters
These parameters describe how the analysis will be conducted. In general, this page would be used to set the number of modes of vibration to extract by specifying a maximum number, a cutoff frequency, or both. Details on these entries are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.
Advanced Parameters Show Screen

These parameters rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information, see the Technical Reference Manual.
7-29
Harmonic
Specifying the Loads
Har monic Loads - Excitation Fr equency
Harmonic load definition is broken down into two parts: 1) definition of the excitation fraudulency or frequencies and 2) location and magnitude of the force and/or displacement load(s). Three input tabs are available for specifying the loads. Any number of individual frequencies, or frequency ranges (indicated by a starting, ending, and incremental frequency) may be specified, one to a line. CAESAR II performs a separate analysis for each frequency requested.
Note The number of anticipated load cycles may be entered for each frequency range. If the number is entered, the load cases are calculated with a fatigue stress type. Otherwise, the load cases are calculated with an occasional stress type.
Harmonic loads may be specified on the Harmonic Forces or Harmonic Displacements input tabs. These pages allow the user to enter loads (either force or displacement), direction, phase angle and node(s).
Har monic For ces
Har monic Displacements
7-30
Phasing can be important if more than one force or displacement is included. The phase angle (entered in degrees) relates the timing of one load to another. For example, if two harmonic loads are acting along the same line but at different nodes, the loads can be directed towards each other (i.e. in opposite directions), which would produce no net dynamic imbalance on the system, or the loads could be directed in the same direction (i.e. to the right or to the left together), which would produce a net dynamic imbalance in the system equal to the sum of the two forces. It is the phase angle, which primarily determines this relationship. The harmonic load data 1500 X 0 10 1500 X 0 105 produces an in phase, or same direction dynamic load in the system (1500 lbf. in the X direction and zero phase at nodes 10 and 105), while 1500 X 0 10 1500 X 180 105 produces an out of phase, or opposite direction dynamic load on the system, which will tend to pull the system apart. The two most common phased loadings are those due to rotating equipment and reciprocating pumps. Rotating equipment may have an eccentricity, a speed, and a mass. These items must be converted into a harmonic load that acts on the rotor at the theoretical mass centerline. The magnitude of the harmonic load is computed from: Fn = (mass)(speed)2(eccentricity), where (speed) is the angular velocity of the shaft in cycles per second. This load is applied along both axes perpendicular to the shaft axis and at a 90 phase shift. In the case of a reciprocating pump, the pump introduces a pressure wave into the line at some regular interval that is related to the valving inside the pump and the pump speed. This pressure wave moves away from the pump at the speed of sound in the fluid. These pressure waves will cause loads at each bend in the piping system. The load on each subsequent elbow in the system starting from the first elbow will be phase shifted by an amount that is a function of the distance between the elbows, from the first elbow to the current elbow. It is the amount of phase shift between elbow-elbow pairs that produces the net unbalanced dynamic load in the piping. The phase shift, in degrees from the first elbow, is calculated from phase = [(frequency)(length) / (speed of sound)]360 where frequency is the frequency of wave introduction at the pump, and length is the distance from the first elbow to the current elbow under study. The magnitude of the pressure load at each elbow is Harmonic Force = 0.5 (Pressure variation) (Area)
Note All specified loads are considered to act together (with phasing considerations) at each applied frequency. Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model
Lumped masses and snubbers are modified in the same way as described for Modal Analysis.
7-31
Control Parameters
Har monic Contr ol Par a met er s
These parameters describe how the analysis will be conducted. Undamped harmonic analysis may be done by setting damping to 0.0. Details of these fields are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.
7-32
Earthquake (Spectrum)
Earthquake loads are defined by defining one or more response spectra and applying them in a specified direction over part or all of the piping system.
Spectr um Definitions
Response spectrum table values can be entered directly or built and stored as a file for use by CAESAR II. Data stored in a file can be referenced by any job run on the machine. In either case, for a response table to be used by CAESAR II it must first be defined in the Spectrum Definitions page. There are two parts to the shock definition - 1) the statement of the name and type of data and 2) the table of actual spectrum data points. The Spectrum Wizard also serves this purpose -providing the spectrum definitions and data points. If the spectrum data is to be read from a file, the second part of the shock definition is not necessary. Spectrum Definition describes the type of data in the spectrum (period or frequency vs. Force Multiplier/DLF, Acceleration, Velocity, or Displacement) as well as the interpolation method for each axis. In order to define a spectrum, the user should add a blank line.
Note To indicate that the spectrum is to be read from a file the symbol # should immediately precede the spectrum name. (The name of the file is the name of the spectrum, without the # symbol, and no extension is allowed.) Subsequent references to that spectrum do not use the # symbol. Note The Spectrum Wizard automates common shock definitions, for more information refer to the DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard section later in this chapter.
Button and Name

Spectrum Data Points
Description
If not read in from a file, the data points for a user-entered spectrum may be entered by using the Tools - Spectrum Data Points command, selecting the spectrum name, and entering the data.
7-33
Data Points
CAESAR II also has several shock spectra built in. These spectra may be used as part of a shock load case without further input. ELCENTRO - Based on the May 18, 1940 El Centro California earthquake N-S component, and applies to elastic systems with 5-10% damping. Values are taken from Biggs - Introduction to Structural Dynamics. 1.60H.5 - U. S. Atomic Energy Commission Regulatory Guide 1.60 Rev. 1, Dec. 1973 Horizontal Design Response Spectra for 0.5% critically damped systems. 1.60H2 - Other AEC horizontal spectra for 2, 5, 7 and 10% critically damped systems. 1.60H5 1.60H7 1.60H10 1.60V.5 - Other AEC vertical spectra for 0.5, 2, 5, 7 and 10% critically damped systems. 1.60V2 1.60V5 1.60V7 1.60V10 UBCSOIL1 - Spectra from Uniform Building Code, 1991, soil type 1 UBCSOIL2 - Spectra from Uniform Building Code, 1991 soil type 2 UBCSOIL3 - Spectra from Uniform Building Code, 1991 soil type 3
Note: Use of the Reg. Guide 1.60 or UBC spectra requires the input of the ZPA (zero period acceleration) in the Control Parameters. This is the maximum ground acceleration at the site and is used to scale the spectrum curves. The default ZPA is 0.5g.
7-34
Spectrum Load Cases
Spectr um L oa d Ca ses
Load cases consist of simultaneously applied spectra. Each spectrum in the shock case is assigned a direction and factor. For earthquakes, the direction input defines the orientation of the uniform inertial loading (commonly earthquakes have 3 direction components: X, Y, and Z). The factor is used to modify the magnitude of the shock. For example, the seismic evaluation of a piping system might include two Spectrum/Time History Load Cases: 1) 1.0 (100%) times of the El Centro spectrum in the X direction and 0.67 (67%) times of the El Centro spectrum in the Y direction and 2) 1.0 in Z and 0.67 in Y. CAESAR II also supports options for independent support motion earthquakes. Here, parts of the system are exposed to different shocks. An example is a piping system supported both from ground and building supports. Because the building will filter the earthquake, supports attached to the building will not be exposed to the same shock as the supports attached to the ground. In this case two different shock inputs are required, one for the ground supports, and one for the building supports. To specify an independent support motion shock the node range that defines a particular group of supports must be given. Additionally, the maximum displacement (seismic anchor movements) of the support attachment point must be specified. The example below shows first a typical uniform support earthquake specification, and second a typical independent support motion earthquake: * UNIFORM SUPPORT MOTION EARTHQUAKE INPUT ELCENTRO ELCENTRO ELCENTRO 1 1 .667 X Z Y
* INDEPENDENT SUPPORT MOTION EARTHQUAKE INPUT HGROUND HGROUND VGROUND 1 1 1 X Z Y X Z 1 1 1 101 101 100 100 100 300 300 1 1 1 1 1 0.25 0.25 0.167 0.36 0.36
HBUILDING 1 HBUILDING 1
7-35
VBUILDING 1
101
300
0.24
The uniform support motion earthquake above contains only components of the El Centro earthquake acting uniformly through all of the supports. There is a 33% reduction in the earthquakes magnitude in the Y direction. The independent support motion earthquake above has two different support groups: the 1-100 group, and the 101-300 group. The 1-100 group is exposed to a ground spectrum. The 101-300 group is exposed to a building spectrum. Different horizontal and vertical components were given for both the ground and the building spectra. The last values specified are the seismic support movements. Stress types may be assigned to the spectrum load cases by selecting from the drop list. If the Fatigue stress type is selected, the user should also enter the number of anticipated load cycles.
Static/Dynamic Combinations
Static/Dyna mic Combinations
Each shock case produces an output report listing displacements, forces, moments, and stresses. For stresses, however, most piping codes combine the occasional dynamic stresses with the sustained static stresses. It is the sustained plus occasional stress sum that is compared to the occasional allowable stress. This occasional stress combination is provided through the Static/Dynamic Combinations page. Each combination references the static load case number and the dynamic load case number to be combined. The static load case number identifies one of the static load cases (usually the sustained case) in the static output. In most cases this is static load case 4 if hanger sizing is included, or load case 2 if it is not. The numbers used to reference the dynamic cases are set by the order of the dynamic load case input. Factors are specified with the static and dynamic case numbers to increase or decrease the summed values. Any static/dynamic combination specified will produce an additional dynamic output report. There can be any number of static or dynamic loads summed together in a single load case. Each case to be added should be placed on a separate line. Both static only and dynamic only cases can be manipulated. There is also independent control of the combination method. SRSS (Square Root of the Sum of the Squares) methods or ABS methods can be used. The default is the ABS method. The input to sum 100% (1.0 times) of static case 2 with 100% (1.0 times) dynamic case 1 appears as follows: S2 1.0 D1 1.0
7-36
Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model

Lumped Masses and Snubbers are modified in the same way as described for Modal Analysis.
Control Parameters
These parameters describe how the analysis is to be conducted. Particular attention should be paid to the modal summation methodology Details are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.
Advanced Parameters
These rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information see the Technical Reference Manual.
7-37
Relief Loads (Spectrum)

This method is set up to solve a relief valve loading through Force Spectrum Methodology. In order to analyze a piping system for a relief valve loading, it is first necessary to estimate the force-time profile for the loading. This must then be converted to a Force Multiplier (Dynamic Load Factor) spectrum. The applied force then must be applied in conjunction with this spectrum.
Relief Load Synthesis
Relief Loa d Synthesis
If the user does not know the characteristics of the relief valve load, the Tools-Relief Load Synthesis button provides a calculation scratch pad based upon a model of a relief valve venting steam or liquid to atmosphere. This utility can be used to estimate relief valve thrust loads, exit velocities, and pressures which can in turn be used to estimate the force vs. time profile of the applied load. Once all data is entered, clicking the Calculate Results button performs the calculations. For more information, see the Technical Reference Manual. Means of estimating the Force-Time profile for a relief load are shown in the Applications Guide.
7-38
Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum)

Specifying the Load
This method of solving water hammer or slug problems is the force spectrum method as used for relief valve loadings, except the relief load synthesizer is not necessary. The user estimates a Force-Time profile, then turns it into a Force Multiplier spectrum, which is then linked to Force sets in the load cases. Means of estimating the Force-Time profile are shown in the Applications Guide; subsequent steps proceed as described for Relief Loads.
Pulse Table/DLF Spectrum Generation

This is discussed under Relief Loads.
Spectrum Definitions
This is done in the same way as described under Relief Loads.
Force Sets
These are set up in the same way as described under Relief Loads.
Spectrum Load Cases

Development of the load cases is identical to that discussed under Relief Loads.
Static/Dynamic Combinations
Static/Dynamic combinations are set up as discussed under Earthquake.
Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model

Lumped masses and snubbers are modified in the same way as described for Modal Analysis.
7-39
Time History
Time history analysis is used to solve the dynamic equation of motion for the extracted nodes of vibration, the results of which are then summed to find the system results.
Specifying The Load

Loadings are specified in terms of Force-Time profiles and force sets. The Force-Time profile is used to define the load timing; the force set is used to define the load direction and location. Either the profile or the force set can be used to define the magnitude.
Time History Profile Definitions
Pr ofile Definitions
Time history profiles are defined in a way similar to the definition of response spectra -- the profile must be given a name, data definitions (which must be Time vs. Force), and interpolation methods. As for response spectra, the data must also be defined-either directly or by reading in from a file (in which case the file name must be preceded by the # symbol). The profile data may either be either be entered with actual forces, or normalized to 1.0 (depending on how the force sets are defined). One force-time profile should be defined for each load which hits the piping system i.e., each independent point load. The loading case consists of one or more force profiles which may create a staggered loading on the system.
Force Sets
For ce Sets
7-40
Force sets are defined as described for Relief Loads. There should be one or more force set for each load profile defined.
Note If the force-time profiles were normalized to 1.0, the maximum magnitude of the loads should be entered here. If the profiles were entered using their actual values, the force set values should be entered as 1.0. Time History Load Cases
Time history load cases consist of the multiple linkages of force-time profiles to force sets, as described to Relief Loads. Only a single load case may be defined for Time History analyses.
Note For Time History analysis, the direction entry is used only for labeling, rather than as an analytic input value. Static/Dynamic Combinations
This is discussed under Earthquake.
Modifying Mass and Stiffness Models

Lumped masses and snubbers are modified as described for Modal Analysis.
Control Parameters
These parameters define how the analyses are to be conducted. Details are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.
7-41
Advanced
These rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information see the Technical Reference Manual.
7-42
Error Handling and Analyzing the Job

Button Description
Check Input Run Analysis
Reviews the entries on each page and notifies you of any errors which must be fixed. Performs the error check, and then if no errors are found, performs the analysis. In this case, the next stop is normally the output review.
Performing the Analysis

Each of the 4 dynamic analysis methods modes, harmonic, spectrum, and Time History has their own procedure for producing results. All of these analyses, however, start in the same manner. Once you save and check the dynamic input, CAESAR II follows an execution path similar to that found in Statics. If you activate accounting, the account number is requested, the ESL is accessed (limited run ESLs are decremented), the element and system stiffness matrices are assembled, and load vectors are created where appropriate. In Dynamics, the system mass matrix is also generated. From this point the processing progresses according to the type of analysis selected. Each of the 4 types of dynamic analyses are discussed below.
Modes
Once dynamic initialization and the basic equation assembly is completed, CAESAR II enters the eigensolver. The eigensolver calculates the natural frequencies and modes of vibration. Each natural frequency appears on the screen as it is calculated. The elapsed time of the analysis is also listed with the frequency. The processor essentially searches for the natural frequencies, starting with the lowest, and continues until the frequency cutoff is exceeded or the mode count reaches its limit. Both the frequency cutoff and mode cutoff are dynamic analysis control parameters. The frequencies appear to pop out in a random fashion, perhaps three in rapid succession and then one more several seconds later. The amount of time to calculate or find these frequencies is a function of the system size, the grouping of the frequencies and the cutoff settings. Eigensolution may be cancelled at any time, with the analysis continuing using the mode shapes selected up to that point. After the last frequency is calculated, CAESAR II uses the Sturm Sequence Check to confirm that no modes were skipped. If the check fails, you may either return to the dynamic input or continue with the spectral analysis. Sturm Sequence Check failures are usually satisfied if the frequency cutoff is set to a value greater than the last frequency calculated.
7-43
Eigensolver
After calculations are complete, control is passed to the Dynamic Output Processor. You can review natural frequencies and mode shapes in text format. You can also display the node shapes in and animated format.
Harmonic
For each forcing frequency listed in the dynamic input, CAESAR II performs a separate analysis. These analyses are similar to static analyses and take the same amount of time to complete. At the completion of each solution the forcing frequency, its largest calculated deflection, and the phase angle associated with it are listed on the screen. The root results for each frequency, and the system deflections, are saved for further processing. Only twenty frequencies may be carried beyond this point and into the output processor. When all frequencies are analyzed, CAESAR II presents the frequencies on the screen and allows the user to select those needed (in terms of frequency and phase angle) for further analysis. This choice can be made after checking deflections at pertinent nodes for those frequencies.
7-44
Selection of Phase Angles

Phased solutions are generated when damping is considered or when the user enters phase angles in the dynamic input. For all phased harmonic analyses, the user is given a choice of selecting from 18 separate phase angle solutions, (including the cycle maxima and minima) for each excitation frequency. Each separate phase angle solution represents a point in time during one complete cycle of the systems response. The primary difference between a solution with and without phase angles is when phase angles are entered, there is no way of knowing beforehand just when the maximum stresses, forces, and displacements are going to occur during the cycle. For this reason, the displacements and stresses are often checked for a number of points during the cycle for each excitation frequency. The user must select these points interactively when the harmonic solution ends. There will be a complete displacement, force, moment, and stress solution for each frequency/phase selected for output. In most cases the largest displacement solution will represent the largest stress solution, but this is not always guaranteed. The user is also presented with the option of letting CAESAR II select the frequency/phase pairs offering the largest displacements on a system basis. The displaced shapes for the remaining frequencies are then processed just like static cases with local force, moment, and stress calculations. Control then shifts to an output processor identical to the static output processor. The output processor also provides the user an animated display of the harmonic results. Users should remember that all harmonic results are amplitudes. For example, if a harmonic stress is reported as 15200 psi, then the stress due to the dynamic load, which will be superimposed onto any steady state component of the stress, can be expected to vary between +15200 psi and -15200 psi. The total stress range due to this particular dynamic loading would be 30400 psi.
Spectrum
The spectrum analysis procedure can be broken down into three tasks - 1) calculate the systems natural frequencies, mode shapes, and mass participation factors; 2) using the system frequencies, pull the corresponding response amplitudes from the spectrum table and calculate the system response for each mode of vibration; 3) combine the modal responses and directional components of the shock. The first part of the analysis proceeds exactly as with the modal analysis. After the natural frequencies are calculated, system displacements, forces, moments, and stresses are calculated on the modal level and combined. Once all the results are collected, the dynamic analysis output screen appears. The spectral results may be examined here, and the user may also review the natural frequencies and animated mode shapes.
Time History
The modal time history analysis follows steps similar to a spectrum analysis. The modes of vibration of the system are computed, the dynamic equation of motion is solved through numeric integration techniques for each mode at a number of successive time steps, with the modal results being summed, yielding system responses at each time step. The output processor displays one load case (and optionally, one load combination) with the maximum loads developed throughout the load application. There also are as many snap-shot cases as requested by the user.
Chapter 8 Dynamic Output Processing In This Chapter

Entry into the Processor ........................................................ 8-2 Report Types ......................................................................... 8-4 Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File ...................... 8-17 3D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation Processor ................ 8-18
8-2
Entry into the Processor

The dynamic output processor is accessed directly following completion of the dynamic analysis, or it may be accessed anytime subsequently from the Main Menu Output options.
Dyna mic Analysis Out put
There are four types of dynamic output results to process: Harmonic results Frequency/Modal results from a Mode-Only solution (this solution also exists if a spectrum solution was run). Spectrum results, from earthquake, waterhammer, and relief valve solutions Time History results Harmonic results are reviewed using the static output processor, which is discussed in Chapter 7 special notes on reviewing harmonic results are presented later in this chapter. The other 3solution types share the same dynamic output processor. After entering this processor, the Dynamic Processor screen appears:
Dyna mic Pr ocessor
Chapter 8 Dynamic Output Processing
8-3
The left-hand column shows the load cases that were analyzed. The top center column shows the reports available for those load cases. The right-hand column shows General Results, or reports that are not associated with load cases. For Spectrum analyses, the load cases listed constitute all of the Spectrum load cases as well as all of the static/dynamic combinations. For Time History analysis, the listed loads are the results maxima case and each of the snap-shot cases for the single Time History load case and each of the static/dynamic combinations. You can select the reports and the load cases you want to view by highlighting one or more load cases (if necessary) and simultaneously one or more reports (reports that display in the right-hand column do not require that the report is highlighted to print). (Select by clicking, CTRL clicking, and SHIFT clicking with the mouse.) You can send the reports to a printer, print to file, save to file or display. A number of commands are available from this screen:
Option Description
File-Open Print Save Animate
Opens a different job for output review. You are prompted for the file; Modal/Spectrum results are stored in *._s files, while Time History results are stored in *._t files. Prints the selected reports. Writes the selected reports to file, in ASCII format. Allows you to view animated motion. Modem and spectrum results allow animation of the mode shapes, while time history analysis provides an animated simulation of the system response to the force-time profile. Returns to the piping input processor. Allows you to enter report titles for this group of reports Provides a summary of each dynamic load case including the spectrum name, scale factor, direction cosines, and node range. Displays the selected reports on the terminal. Each report selected is presented, one at a time, for inspection. You may scroll through the reports where necessary. You can also locate and highlight specific node numbers or results with the FIND (Ctrl-F) command. To move to the next report click the right-arrow button. Provides the ability to send output reports directly to Word. This feature is activated when producing a report and enables the use of all of Words formatting (font selection, margin control, etc.) and printing features. You can append multiple reports to form a final report, by selecting the desired reports, clicking the button, closing Word, selecting the next report to be added, clicking the button again, etc. A table of contents, is displayed reflecting the cumulatively produced reports.
Input Title View Load Cases View Reports
Microsoft Word Output
8-4
Report Types
There are two types of reports available from the dynamic output processor. There are those associated with specific load cases (the Report Options shown in the center column) and those not associated with specific load cases (the General Results in the right column).
Note: For Modal analysis, there are no load cases, so the center column is blank
Reports associated with load cases are those associated with the spectral or time history displacement solution. The Report Options are displacements, reactions, forces, moments and stresses.
Displacements
This report gives the magnitude of the displacement for each load case. For spectral results, due to summing methodology, all displacement values in this report are positive. For time history analysis, the values are correctly signed. The displacement report gives the maximum displacement that is anticipated due to the application of the dynamic shock. For spectral analysis, note that all of the displacement values are positive. The direction of the displacement is indeterminate, i.e. there will be a tendency for the system to oscillate due to the potential energy stored after undergoing some maximum dynamic movement. The displacements printed are relative to the movement of the earth.
Restraints
This report gives the magnitude of the reactions for each load case. A typical entry is shown as follows: NODE FX 5 716 649 2X(1) The first line for each node contains the maximum load that occurred at some time during the dynamic event. The second line for each node contains the maximum modal contribution to the load, and the third line for each node tells which mode and loading was responsible for the maximum. This form of the report permits easy identification of the culprit modes. The mode identification line is broken down as follows: 2 mode X load direction (1) (load component)
8-5
For example, at node 5 the resultant dynamic load due to the shock was 716. The largest modal component (of the 716) was 649, due to mode 2, and produced by the first X direction component (either the first support motion set for displacement response spectrum analysis or the first force set for force response spectrum analysis). This form of dynamic output report allows us to know if there is a problem, and if there is, then which mode of vibration and load component is the major contributor to the problem. If the component shows up as a (P), then it was the pseudostatic (seismic anchor movement) contribution of the loading that resulted in the major component of the response. If the component shows up as an (M), this indicates that it was the missing mass contribution. A typical restraint report follows:
8-6
Local Forces
This report gives elemental forces and moments in the element local a-b-c coordinate system. The a-b-c coordinate system is defined as follows: For straight pipe not connected to an intersection: a is along the element axis (i.e. perpendicular to the pipe cross-section) b is axY, unless a is vertical and then b is along X c is axb. For bends and elbows, and for each segment end: a is along the element axis (i.e. perpendicular to the pipe cross-section) b is to the plane of the bend c is axb For intersections, and for each segment framing into the intersection: a is along the element axis (i.e. perpendicular to the pipe cross-section) b is to the plane of the intersection c is axb
Note: X indicates the vector cross product.

Force, moment, and stress reports are similar to restraint reports in that each has the maximum response, followed by the modal maximum, followed by the modal maximum load identifier. All force/moment reports are setup to represent the forces and moments that act on the end of the element to keep the element in equilibrium.
Gbool Forces
This report contains informali on identical to that given above for local forces except that it is oriented along the glob a! X, Y, and Z axes. A typical report follows:
t':jDynamic Output
GLOBAL FORCE REPORT, Fo<ces on Elements (OCC)SHOCK CASE # 1 NODE -----------Fo<ces(lb.)----------- ---------Moments(ft.lb.)-------TOTALS. ... FX FY FZ MX MY MZ MODE MAX. . FX/Mode FY/Mode FZ/Mode MX/Mode MY/Mode MZ/Mode In the epot below, each item consists of (3) lines of data: - Line 1 is the total esponse. - Line 2 is the cont ibution of the max cont ibutoto the total esponse. - Line 3 details the maximum cont ibuto : (a) the mode, the load component (di ection and sequence numbe ) (b) missing mass cont ibution and associated load (c) pseudo-static cont ibution and associated load. 160 89 9 Y(l) 160 89 9 Y(l) 147 86 9 Y(l) 147 86 57 2 Y(l) 57 2 Y(l) 88 57 2 Y(l) 88 57 172 104 11 Y(l) 172 104 11 Y(l) 164 102 11 Y(l) 164 102 878 457 2 Y(l) 524 389 2 Y(l) 524 389 2 Y(l) 951 425 1359 722 2 Y(l) 1168 643 2 Y(l) 1168 643 2 Y(l) 1094 659 621 263 Y(l) 423 216 Y(l) 423 216 Y(l) 471 228
..:.J
10
10 15
..:.J
Stresses
The stress report contains axial, bendinmaximwn octahedral, and code stresses as well as in-plane and out-of plane stress intensification factors. These reports contain mode, and modal maximum data as well. A typical report follows:
t':jDynamic Output
STRESS REPORT, St esses on Elements
(OCC)SHOCK CASE # 1
NODES ----------St<ess(lb./sq.in.)----------- TOTALS... AXIAL BENDING TORSION STRS INTNSTY MODE MAX.AX/Mode BND/Mode TOR/Mode SHR/Mode SIFI
SIFO
--(lb./sq.in.)- CODE STRS ALLOlJ STRESS/Mode
In the epot below, each item consists of (3) lines of data: - Line 1 is the total esponse. - Line 2 is the cont ibution of the max cont ibutoto the total esponse. - Line 3 details the maximum cont ibuto : (a) the mode, the load component (di ection and sequence numbe ) (b) missing mass cont ibution and associated load (c) pseudo-static cont ibution and associated load.
'l\''lt'l\''lt
'lt'l\''lt'l\'
B31.3 -2004, Ap<il 29, 2005 NO CODE STRESS CHECK PROCESSED @NODE @NODE @NODE @NODE @NODE 40 40 40 40 40 233 108 2 Y(l) 528 310 2 Y(l)
HIGHEST STRESSES: (lb. /sq. in.) CODE STRESS: 3903.7 BENDING STRESS: 3795.3 TORSIONAL STRESS: 872.8 AXIAL STRESS: 1348.6 3D MAX INTENSITY: 4279.7 228 105 2 Y(l) 523 310 2 Y(l) 143 76 2 Y(l) 22 Y(l)
10
2 Y(l) Y(l)
372 187 2 Y(l) 536 310 2 Y(l)
2.21
El
Forces/Stresses
This report is intended to be a brief summary of the forces and code stresses for a particular load case. This report contains maximwn responses only, the calculated stress, and it's allowable.
t':jDynamic Output
8-10
Cumulative Usage
This report is available only when there are one or more Fatigue Stress types present. Only one report is generated, regardless of the number of Fatigue load cases selected. The report shows, on an element-by-element basis, the impact of each load case on the total Fatigue allowable, as well as the cumulative impact of all simultaneously selected load cases. If the total Usage Factor exceeds 1.0; this implies Fatigue failure under that loading condition.
8-11
The General Results reports comprise the following and are independent of the load cases selected. They are as follows:
Mass Participation Factors

This report gives one number for each mode and load direction for each dynamic load case. This value provides the user with a feel for the effect the dynamic loading and the mass had on the particular mode. Neither the absolute magnitude nor its sign has any significance, only the relationship between values for a single load case is important.
8-12
Natural Frequencies
Calculated modal natural frequencies are reported in Hertz and radians per second; period is reported in seconds.
Modes Mass Normalized

A mass normalization procedure is used to compute valued magnitudes for mode shapes. A number of programs use this normalization procedure, and this report was generated to make it easier for CAESAR II users to compare their results to other programs results.
8-13
Modes Unity Normalized

This report scales the largest displacement in the mode shape to 1.0, with all other displacements and rotations scaled accordingly. This mode report is the easiest way to get a feel for the shape of the mode. The example shows two mode shapes from a small job. Users should note that in the first mode the largest single component is in the Y direction (which we would expect from the earlier participation factor report), and in the second mode the largest single component is in the Z direction.
Note Unity normalized means that the largest displacement component in the mode is set to 1.0 and all other displacement values are scaled accordingly.
8-14
Included Mass Data

The Included Mass Data report displays the percent of the total system mass/force included in the extracted modes, and the percent of system mass/force included in the missing mass correction (if any) for each of the individual shocks of each of the dynamic load cases. This value gives an indication of the accuracy of the total system response captured by the dynamic model, with 100% being the difficult to achieve ideal. The first 3 items displayed by the report are the Load Case, the Shock Description, and the direction cosines. The next item, the % Mass Included, shows the percentage of mass active in each of the X, Y, and Z directions. Following the % Mass Included is the % Force Active. This value is computed by taking the algebraic sum in each of the global directions, and then applying the SRSS method to each of the three directions. (The sums of the three directions are added vectorally.) The final column displays the % Force Added. This value is obtained by taking the % Force Active and subtracting from 100.
Input Listing
This report, which may be displayed or printed, lists the input for the piping model or for the dynamic input.
8-15
Mass Model
The Mass Model Report shows how CAESAR II lumped masses for the dynamic runs. The mass lumping report should show a fairly uniform distribution of masses. Large or irregular variations in the values shown should be investigated. Usually these large values can be reduced by breaking down exceedingly long, straight runs of pipe. The mass lumping report shown below is very uniform in distribution and should produce a good dynamic solution. Note that CAESAR II ignores rotational terms.
8-16
Boundary Conditions
The Active Boundary Condition Report shows the user how CAESAR II dealt with the nonlinear restraints in the job. It shows which directional supports were included, which gaps were assumed closed, and just how friction resistance was modeled.
c Output
DYNAMIC BOUNDARY CONDITION REPORT -------Cosines-------Z X Y 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 LOOO LOOO LOOO LOOO 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
(lb./in.)
NODE 5 30 45
STIFFNESS RIGID LOOOOOOe+OlZ LOOOOOOe+OlZ 4.500000e+OOZ 3.400000e+OOZ
DESCRIPTION Rigid ANC Rigid Y Rigid Y Pt::oq Design VSH Pt:oq Design VSH
zz zo
8-17
Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File

The tabular results brought to the screen may be sent directly to a printer. To print a hard copy of the reports click FILE-PRINT. To send reports to a file rather than the printer, click File-Save. After initial selection, the user is presented with a file dialog to select the name of the file. To change the file name for a new report, the user should select FILE-SAVE AS. Sends reports to Microsoft Word. The reports display in Microsoft Word where you can access Microsoft Words feature set. All reports that are to be saved in the output file need not be declared at one time. Subsequent reports sent to the file during the session are appended to the file started in the session. (These output files are only closed when a new output device, file or printer is defined.) After closing the report, a table of contents is added.
8-18
3D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation Processor

The Animation module allows users to view animated motion of the system for static displacements or various dynamic movements. The mode and spectrum results, for example, allow animation of the mode shapes, while time history analysis provides an animated simulation of the system response to the force-time profile. The animation options can be accessed from the CAESAR II Main Menu, by going to the OUTPUT/ANIMATION and selecting the appropriate animation type from the sub-menu choices. In addition, the animation processor can also be activated from each of the individual Static/Dynamic Output Processors by clicking the View Animation button. Animation of any type has identical set of buttons and menu choices (similar to ones described in the Piping Input Graphics Processor) that will be described herein. Any relevant differences will be described below for each corresponding animation type. Launching the Animation Processor causes the following dialog to display.
8-19
The piping model is shown in its default state (volume mode, isometric view, orthographic projection). For the convenience of the user, it can be displayed in any of the defined orthographic views Front/Back, Top/Bottom, Left/Right, or Isometric by clicking the corresponding buttons. Similar to the Input Processor Graphics, the model can be interactively rotated, zoomed, or panned. Zoom to Window and Zoom to Selection options are also available. Perspective or orthographic projections can also be set. Node numbers can be displayed by clicking the Nodes button. The desired load case or mode shape can be selected from the corresponding drop down list. The frequency of the load case associated with the animation is shown at the top of the view plot whenever the Titles option (available from the Action menu) is activated. The animated plot menu displays several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion are the commands to activate the animation. Motion uses the centerline representation while Volume Motion produces the volume graphics image. Each of the motion options causes the graphics processor to animate the current plot. If the Node Numbers button is clicked, the node number text is moved together with the corresponding node. Once the plot is moving on the screen, it may be sped up, slowed down, or stopped using appropriate toolbar button. After selecting a different load case or mode shape from the drop down list, the motion automatically stops. One of the motion buttons should be clicked again to activate the model movement. Print Motion option (available from the File menu) prints all of the vibration positions of the current mode. It is not available for the Time History animation. For clarity purposes, it is recommended to use the single line (Motion) option to generate the printouts. The Volume Motion option generates a printout which is often too cluttered to be useful.
Save Animation to File

The animated graphics can be saved to a file by clicking the Create an Animation File button. Alternatively, this option can be accessed from the dynamic plot menu FILE/SAVE ANIMATION. After activating this option, the standard Windows Save As dialog will display prompting the user to enter the file name and directory to save the files. By default the current file name and current data directory will be used. There will be two files created an *.HTML file and a *.HSF file. To view the saved animation, find the corresponding *.HTML file and double click on it within Windows Explorer. The corresponding *.HSF file containing the animation routines will be displayed. The *.HTML file contains buttons to play or pause the animation. The model can also be viewed at different orthogonal planes, or returned to the isometric view.
Note The *.HTML is an interactive file.

The first time a CAESAR II created .HTML file is opened with Internet Explorer or another internet browser, the user will receive a message requesting permission to download a control from Tech Soft 3D. The user should answer Yes to allow the download, after which the image will display. Once the model appears, right-clicking the model will show the available viewing options, such as orbit, pan, zoom, and/or different render modes. The image can be printed or copied to the clipboard as necessary.
8-20
Animation of Static Results - Displacements

CAESAR II allows the user to view the piping system as it moves to the displaced position for the basic load cases. To animate the static results, execute the Options/View Animation menu choice from the Static Output Menu. Alternatively, clicking View Animation allows the user to view graphic animation of the displacement solution. Static animation graphics has all the model projection and motion toolbar options described earlier. The load case can be selected from the drop down list. The title consists of the load case name followed by the file name and can be toggled on and off from the Action menu. The Static Animation processor allows viewing of the single line and volume motion, controls the speed of the movement, and the animation can be saved to a file as described above.
Note The static animation does not have much physical meaning behind it. This is just a one-time move produced from the CAESAR II calculated displacements (from temperature growth, initial SUS system sag and/or any other related loads). It is better to use the Deflected Shape button on the 3D/HOOPS Graphics view of the Static Output Processor toolbar. For more information refer to 3D/HOOPS Graphics Tutorial for Static Output Processor, Deflected Shape.
8-21
Animation of Dynamic Results Modal/Spectrum

This option allows the user to view the calculated modes of vibration that correspond to particular natural frequencies of the system. It is available from the Dynamic Output Processor after running the Modal analysis. After invoking the Modal animation type, the system is displayed in its default state. The animation screen display the same toolbar options described earlier. Natural frequencies can be selected from the drop down list to animate the corresponding mode shape. The title shows the natural frequency in Hz followed by the current file name and the date. Animated graphics for a particular mode shape (frequency) can be viewed in a single line or volume mode motion with speed control, and/or saved to an HTML file for later presentation as described above.
Animation of Dynamic Results Harmonic

During the harmonic analysis, CAESAR II calculates the system response to the excitation frequency. This response can be animated. The Harmonics Animation module can be launched from the Harmonic Output Processor by clicking View Animation. The system displays in its default isometric state. The animation screen displays the same toolbar options described earlier that allow single line and volume motion as well as speed up and slow down options. Occasional cases corresponding to the excitation frequencies may be selected from the drop down list. The title shows the currently selected frequency, file name, and the date. The title may be disabled from the Action menu. Animated graphics for each load case analyzed can be saved to an HTML file for later presentation.
Animation of Dynamic Results Time History

The Time History animation module can be launched from the CAESAR II Dynamic Output processor by clicking View Animation. The system displays in the centerline isometric mode. The model can be rotated, zoomed, or panned and can be set to different orthographic projections. The current time history time step and the job name are shown in the title on the top of the graphics view. Due to complexity of the time history calculations and to decrease the animation time, the animation is only available in centerline mode.
Note: Save Animation to File is not available in the time history animation for the same reason.
8-22
An additional feature of the Time History animation engine is the Element Viewer. The Element Viewer displays specific element information for a given time step. After clicking Element Viewer , the Element Info dialog appears displaying the nodal displacements, forces, moments, code stress, and SIF information provided for the current element at a current time step. Clicking Next >> or << Previous will change the information to correspond to the next or previous element in the system for the same time step. There are several ways to animate the model using the Motion button; clicking Next Step/Previous Step, jumping to the beginning or the end of the time history animation; or using the Time Slider. Clicking Motion starts the animation, the current time step is displayed in the title line, and the task bar at the bottom of the animation graphics view shows the progress. You can increase, decrease or stop the animation speed by clicking the correct toolbar buttons. Clicking Next Time Step or Previous Time Step while the Element Info dialog is active will update the dialog information for the current element for the next or previous time step. If the animation is stopped, this will advance or back space the animation one step. Clicking View Animation again after stopping the animation will continue the time history motion from the location (the time step) where the animation was stopped. Clicking the Plot the First Time Step or Plot the Last Time Step brings the animation to the beginning or the end correspondingly. Dragging the Time Slider to the appropriate time step. The position of the bar adjusts automatically as the animation progresses or you can click on the slider with the left mouse button and drag it along the time-line to find the time step you want or to see the displaced shape of the model. If the Element Info dialog is active, the highlighted element information is updated to correspond to the current time step.
8-23
Time Histor y Animation View with Element Viewer Dialog
Clicking the corresponding button can enable the node numbers however, it is recommended to have node numbering disabled when using the animation processor. As the animated elements move, the node numbers are redrawn for every position in the system creating a blinking effect that makes it hard to follow the animation.
Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler In This Chapter

Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II................ 9-2 3D/HOOPS Graphics ............................................................ 9-7 Sample Input ......................................................................... 9-10 Structural Steel Example #1.................................................. 9-11 Structural Steel Example #2.................................................. 9-18 Structural Steel Example #3.................................................. 9-31
9-2
Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II
Str uct ur al Steel Fr a me
Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler
9-3
Start the CAESAR II Structural Element Preprocessor from the Main Menu by first opening an existing (or new) structural file, and then using the Input-Structural command. The following screen appears:
Input - Str uctur al Steel
Note Structural file names should be limited to eight characters (with no embedded spaces) since CAESAR II currently is unable to include long file names in piping models. The structural file must also be located in the same directory as the piping model.
Input is a interactive/batch keyword. This is a method of input most familiar to the finite element/structural analyst and probably not so familiar to the piping engineer. Those users not already familiar with keyword type input should pay particular attention to the examples, and make liberal use of the help functions ([F1]). The general input format is:
<keyword>, <parameter #1>, <parameter #2>, ..., <parameter #n> or <keyword>, <key1=n1>, <key2 = n2>, ..., <key3 = n3> For example...... FIX 5 ALL Fixes node 5, all degrees of freedom SECID = 1,W10X49Defines properties for section #1.
9-4 EDIM 5 10 DY=12-0Define vertical member from 5 to 10.
Exa mple I nput
9-5
Since many structures have a considerable degree of repeatability, there are various forms, options, and deviations of the above commands to help the user generate large structural models quickly and easily. For the most part however, and albeit with a little more time and effort, the above method of single element generation is well suited to most pipers needs. The most commonly used keywords display below: EDIM Define structural element FIX Define structural anchor (ALL) or restraint LOAD Define concentrated forces UNIF Define uniform loads SECID Define cross section properties A full explanation of all keywords is included in the Technical Reference Manual. To delete a command highlight it and click Edit-Delete Card. New lines may be created by selecting a keyword command from the menu or from the toolbars. Certain commands set parameters that remain set for all further element generations. DEFAULT sets the default section and material ID, ANGLE sets the default element orientation, and BEAMS, BRACES, and COLUMNS set the default end connection type. The full AISC database with over 900 cross-sectional shapes is available on a per-member-name basis, additionally the user may define any arbitrary cross sectional shapes. The proper database (either AISC77.BIN, AISC89.BIN, UK. BIN, AUST90.BIN, SAFRICA.BIN, KOREAN.BIN, or GERM91.BIN) must be selected using the Configuration/Setup Module before starting the construction of a structural model. Sections may be selected from a tree structure, grouping sections by type.
9-6
Configur ation/Set up
AISC names should be keyed in exactly as shown in the AISC handbook with the exception that fractions should be represented as decimals to four decimal places, i.e. the angle L6X3-1/2X1/2 would be entered: L6X3.5000X0.5000. Member end connection freedom is a concept used quite frequently in structural analysis that has no real parallel in piping work. Several of the example problems contain free end connection specifications and should be studied for details. Structural models may be run alone, or may be included in piping jobs.
To run a structural model alone: 1 After selecting a job name, enter the Structural Input processor using Input-Structural from the Main Menu. 2 Enter the structural steel model and its loading use File-Save to exit model building, do error checking, and build CAESAR II Execution files if there are no errors. After completing these steps return to the Main Menu. 3 Start CAESAR II up at the analysis level. Select the load cases to be analyzed. Do not use CAESAR IIs recommendations unless a weight-concentrated load case is all that is needed. 4 When the analysis level finishes, enter the standard CAESAR II Output Processor. Displacements, forces, and moments will be available for each structural element. 5 Run the Analysis Program to ensure that the most heavily loaded members still satisfy the code.
9-7
To include a structural model (or models) in a piping job: 1 Enter the structural steel input processor as described above. 2 Enter the structural steel model and its loading. 3 Use FILE-SAVE to exit model building, do error checking, and build the CAESAR II Execution files if there are no errors. 4 Open the Piping Input file. After the piping model has been entered to the users satisfaction click Environment-Include Structural Files. 5 From the Include Structural Files dialog use the Browse button to select the structural files to include in the piping job. 6 Exit the preprocessor after all structural models have been properly included in the piping job. 7 Perform and error check of the model. Once error checking finishes without a fatal message, run the entire model. After analysis, the structural elements are included in the piping output processor as though they were pipe, except that stresses are not computed. Note: A stand alone AISC Code Check Program is available to verify that forces and moments on standard structural shapes do not exceed the various allowables as defined by the American Institute of Steel Construction.
9-8
3D/HOOPS Graphics
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics Engine in the Structural Steel Modeler is mainly used to verify the model geometry for completeness and accuracy. An Interactive Command Generator allows user-friendly entering and updating of the element data, along with a graphics view that instantly reflects any changes. The Structural Steel Modeler 3D Graphics Engine shares the same general capabilities as the Piping Input Processor's Graphics. It uses the same HOOPS Standard Toolbar that enables users to zoom, orbit, pan, and several other options among them the ability to switch orthographic views and volume to single line mode.
9-9
The Structural Steel Graphics Engine can also show or hide the supports and restraints, anchors, the compass, node numbers, and element lengths. The restraints may also be changed in size relative to the structural elements. The geometry displays on the screen to the right when the user defines enough information. For example, using Method 2 - Node/Element Specification Generator, if only NODEs (absolute coordinates of a point in space) are generated, nothing can be shown. However, when ELEM is defined (to specify a single element between two points in space), the corresponding graphical element displays. When using Method 1 - Element Definition EDIM (similar to defining elements in the CAESAR II Piping Input Processor), the corresponding graphical element displays after the EDIM command is completed. For more information and a comparison of the two methods, refer to the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual, Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler. The Structural Steel Command Generator may be resized and/or disabled to allow the graphics to fill the entire viewing area. It may also be docked on or off the main frame. Once docked off, it can be removed from the view or closed. To show/hide (open/close) the Structural Steel Commands Generator, click VIEW-INPUT. Just as the Piping Input Graphics does, the Structural Steel Modeler has a Change Display Option that enables users to change the default colors for all steel elements and restraints. For more information refer to the discussion in the Piping Input 3D Graphics Processor.
Note Loads, such as Uniform or Wind, are not available in plot/graphics mode in the Structural Steel Modeler.
An additional feature of the Structural Steel Modeler is its ability to flip the coordinate system, on the fly. All relevant user-entered data is also modified to comply with the newly selected coordinate system, either Y-up or Z-up.
9-10
Sample Input
This section contains three Structural Steel Examples. These examples are presented so that the user can enter them into the computer from the listed input. This is without question the best way to become familiar with the structural capability in CAESAR II.
9-11
Structural Steel Example #1

Determine the stiffness of the structural steel support shown below. Use the estimated rigid support piping loads from the piping analysis to back calculate each stiffness.
Str uct ur al Steel Exa mple #1
9-12
A U-bolt pins the pipe to the top of the channel at node 20. The piping loads output from the pipe stress program are: F x= -39.0 lbs. F y= -1975.0 lbs. F z= 1350.0 lbs. Select FILE-NEW from the CAESAR II Main Menu, click the Structural Input radio button and enter a job name (for example SUPP). Then enter the CAESAR II Structural Steel Processor by selecting option InputStructural from the CAESAR II Main Menu. This brings up the blank data entry screen, ready to define the units.
9-13
At this time the user enters the keywords and parameters that define the model input. Input for the example is as follows:
9-14
9-15
9-16
UNIT ENGLISH.FIL MATID 1 30E6 .3 11.6E6 36000. 0.283 SECID 1 W16X26 SECID 2 MC8X22.800 SECID 3 L6X4X0.5000 EDIM 5 10 DY=144. SECID=1 EDIM 10 15 DY=72. SECID=1 EDIM 15 20 DZ=70 SECID=2 EDIM 20 25 DZ=20 SECID=2 EDIM 25 10 DZ=-90 DY=-72 SECID=3 FIX 5 ALL ;SPECIFY SUPPORTS ;TRY A PLOT HERE LOAD 20 FX=-39 FY=-1975 FZ=1350 ;SPECIFY LOADS ;DEFINE ELEMENTS ;SPECIFY MATERIAL ;DEFINE CROSS SECTIONS
Input Str uct ur al Steel - Sa mple
9-17
The model can be checked and saved with the File-Save command. At this time the input is checked, and if no fatal errors are found, the CAESAR II Execution files are written, and the model may be used in a piping analysis or analyzed by itself. (For the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed by itself.) When error checking has completed successfully, the user is returned to the CAESAR II Main Menu. When this is done, the Analysis-Static menu option should be chosen. From this point, structural steel analysis is performed just like a piping analysis.
Note: Don't forget to include F1 in the SUS load case.

Output from a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments. The desired results from the analysis of SUPP are the displacements at node 20 of: x y z = = = -9.63 in. -0.44 in. 0.88 in.
These displacements are excessive for a support which is to be assumed rigid in another analysis. The translational stiffness for the support can be computed as follows: Kx = Ky = Kz= 39.0 lb. / 9.63 in. 1975.0 lb. / 0.44 in. 1350.0 lb. / 0.88 in. = = = 4.05 lb./in 4488.64 lb./in. 1534.09 lb./in.
9-18

A support must be designed to limit the loads on the waste heat boilers flue gas nozzle connection. The maximum allowable loads on the nozzle are: Fshear = Mbending = 500 lb. 5000 ft. lb. Faxial = 1500 lb. Mtorsion = 10000 ft. lb.
Check the piping and structure shown in the following four figures:
Piping Dimensions
9-19
Str uct ur e Nodes
Str uct ur e Dimensions
9-20
Select a job name (for example SUPP2) and enter the structural input processor as described earlier. The structural input screen appears:
9-21
At this time the user enters the keywords and parameters (using menu options and/or toolbars) that defines the model input, and adds them to the file using the Edit-Add command. Input for the example is as follows: UNIT ENGLISH.FIL SECID 1 W24X104 SECID 2 W18X50 MATID 1 YM=29E6 POIS=0.3 G=11.6E6 DENS=0.283 ANGLE=90 EDIM 230 235 DY=10EDIM 235 220 DY=13-10 EDIM 200 205 DY=10EDIM 205 210 DY=13-10 EDIM 245 250 DX=8.392- DY=10EDIM 260 255 DX=8.392- DY=10EDIM 250 220 DX=11.608- DY=13-10 EDIM 255 210 DX=11.608- DY=13-10 SECTION ;SLO PED COLUMNS ;DEFINE MATERIALS ;COLUMN ORIENTATION ;VERTICAL COLUMNS ;DEF INE SECTIONS
DEFAULT SECID=2;MAKE BEAMS DEFAULT EDIM 235 240 DZ=-2.5EDIM 240 205 DZ=-2.5EDIM 220 215 DZ=-2.5EDIM 215 210 DZ= -2.5EDIM 250 255 DZ=-5-
;THE FINAL SET OF HORIZONTAL BEAMS ALONG THE X AXIS HAVE A STANDARD ;STRONG AXIS ORIENTATION ANGLE=0.0 EDIM 250 235 DX=11.608EDIM 255 205 DX=11.608;ANCHOR THE BASE NODES FIX 245 ALL FIX 260 ALL FIX 230 ALL FIX 200 ALL At any time during input the user can generate plots of the model by executing OPERATIONS-PLOT. Once the user is satisfied that the model is correct, exiting with File-Save command checks and saves the model. If no fatal errors are found, then the CAESAR II Execution files are written. The model may now be used in a piping analyses or analyzed by itself. (For the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed with a piping model.)
9-22
When error checking has completed successfully, the user is returned to the CAESAR II Main Menu. The user should change the jobname to the name of the piping input filename (PIPE2 for this example) and enter the input for the piping system to be analyzed.
9-23
9-24
The input for this job is shown below:

c OutputProcessing
R EJ
Input Echo
PIPE DATA F<om 5 To 10 DX= 6-417 ft PIPE Dia= 30-000 in- Wall= -375 inInsul= -000 inGENERAL T2= 70 F T3= 70 F Pl= -0000 lb-/sq-inTl= 850 F Mat= (5)INT CHROMEMOLY 5%-9% E= 27,400,000 lb-/sq-in- v = -289 Density= -2894 lb-/cu-inBEND at "TO" end Radius= 45-000 in- (LONG) Bend Angle= 90-000 Angle/Node @1= 45-00 9 Angle/Node @2= -00 8 RESTRAINTS Node 5 ANC ALLOWABLE STRESSES B3L3 (2004) Sc= 20,000 lb-/sq-in- Shl= 18,000 lb-/sq-inF<om 10 To 15 DY= -8-000 ft-
Ft:om. 15 To 115 DX= -2-500 ftRIGID Weight= -00 lbRESTRAINTS Cnode 215 Node 115 X Node 115 2 Cnode 215 Node 120 X Cnode 240 Node 120 2 Cnode 240
F<om 15 To
20 DY= -13-833 ft-
F<om 20 To 120 DX= -2-500 ft RIGID Weight= -00 lb-
9-25
To connect the pipe to the structure, follow these procedures: 1 The user must tell CAESAR II the name of the structural steel file to include. From the Input Spreadsheet select the Environment-Include Structural Files Menu option. The Include Structural Files Dialog appears. 2 Enter the name of the structural steel model to be included (SUPP2), by typing or browsing for it. 3 Define the connectivity between pipe and structural nodes using restraints with connecting nodes. For the example problem, the node 115 in the pipe model should be tied to node 215 in the
9-26
structural model in the X and Z directions similarly; node 120 in the pipe model should be tied to node 240 in the structural model. These connecting nodes may be defined from the piping spreadsheet on any convenient element. Auxiliary field input for these two connections is shown as follows:
Restraint Auxiliary Data If the pipe and structure do not plot properly relative to one-another then either: a) The connecting nodes were not defined correctly. b) The CONNECT_GEOMETRY_THRU_CNODES directive was not set to YES in the Configuration/Setup module.
9-27
The properly plotted pipe and structure is shown below:
Str uct ur al Steel Exa mple #2 Plot
Once the pipe and structure are properly plotted relative to one-another, the piping input processor can be exited and error checking performed. The error checker includes the pipe and structure together dwing checking. The execution files that are written a!so include the structural data. In the output the pipe and structure are also plotted together and can only be separated via the plot RANGE command.
Reports Templates Dialog
+ + H bl .;,
6'-.f
CAESAR II Ver.4, 99, 0, (Build 050316) Date:JUN 28, 2005 Time: 9:43 Job: C:\CAESAR\PIPE2 Licensed To: CDADE ESL DEALER/EVAL COPY ID 10001 RESTRAINTS REPORT: Loads Dn Restraints CASE 1 (SUS) WT1 NODE 5 30 35 65 115 115 120 120 200 200 200 200 200 200 230 230 230 230 230 230 245 245 245 245 245 245 260 260 260 260 260 260
FX
lb.
FY
lb.
FZ
lb.
MX lt.lb.
MY lt.lb.
MZ lt.lb.
49242 58856 0 77547 0 0 9110 524 0 0 57479 0 0 0 17346 0 3792 0 0 36744 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4820 0 0 34476 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 22683 0 0 27007 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 26062 0 0 30887 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
19983 23259 212675 Rigid ANC 2200 0 0 0 0 Rigid +Y 0 0 0 0 Rigid +Y 7294 Rigid ANC 2338 253515 436949 854 0 0 0 RigidZ 0 0 0 0 Rigid X 5391 0 0 0 RigidZ 0 0 0 0 Rigid X 0 0 0 0 Rigid X 0 0 0 0 RigidY 1979 0 0 0 RigidZ 10554 0 0 0 RigidRX 0 0 B 0 RigidRY 13511 RigidRZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rigid X 0 0 0 0 RigidY 1601 0 0 0 RigidZ 0 9299 0 0 RigidRX 4 0 0 0 RigidRY 20040 RigidRZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rigid X 0 0 0 0 RigidY 741 0 0 0 RigidZ 0 5692 0 0 RigidRX 4778 0 0 0 RigidRY 1364 RigidRZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rigid X 0 0 0 0 RigidY 216 0 0 0 RigidZ 0 3992 0 0 RigidRX 0 0 3350 0 RigidRY 784 RigidRZ 0 0 0
9-29
The loads on the anchor at 5 are grossly excessive. The structural steel frame and pipe support structure as shown are not satisfactory. Some displaced shape plots from the analysis are shown in the next figure:
Plot Showing Displacement
In this example, displacement of the structure is small relative to the displacement of the pipe. The pipe is thermally expanding out away from the boiler nozzle and down, away from the boiler nozzle.
Plot Showing Displacement
Using the RANGE command the structure is plotted without the pipe. The displaced shape of the structure shows that the pipe is pulling the structure in the positive X direction at the top support and pushing the structure in the negative X direction at the bottom support. These displacements will only result in higher loads on the boiler nozzle. The vertical location of the structural supports should be studied more closely. Perhaps vertical springs at 30 and 35 would help, along with a repositioning of the structural supports vertically, i.e. the support at 120 should be moved down so that its line of action in the X direction more closely coincides with the center line of the pipe between 25 and 40.
9-31

Estimate the X, Y, and Z stiffness of the structure at the point 1000. (Note that, in general, the stiffness of a three-dimensional structure, condensed down to the stiffness of a single point, must be represented by a 6 6 stiffness matrix. As a first estimate, only the on-diagonal, translational stiffnesses are often estimated, as is being done here.)
Select a job name (for example SUPP3) and enter the structmal input processor as described earlier. The structmal input screen appears.
At this time the user enters the keywords and parameters (using menu commands and/or toolbars) that define the model input. Input for the example is shown below:
!":1CAESAR StructuralModeler - SUPP3.str

; Eile
!;.dit
:!_iew
111113
Insert
Corrll'lands
!::!elp
iD i .!ES. I:l i _f ,}l

Card Stack 8 Card Stack
i 10 .!'.
::..;:
kJ 1 A
i)
A \.
f.'loi:J
.!"!.
Q i . 0.
f N :::::; tX I
! I1b
E1 UNIT ENGLISH.Fil E1 MATID I El SECID=I W12X65 El SECID2 WIOX22 El ANGLE=90 E1 EDIM 5, 10 E1 EDIM 25, 30 E1 EDIM 45, 50 E1 EDIM 65, 70 E1 ANGLE=O El RELEASE Tt BEAM MC El DEFAULT 2,0 E1 Beams FREE E1 EDIM 10, 30 E1 EDIM 30, 50 E1 EDIM 50, 70 E1 EDIM 70, 10 El Beams FIX E1 EDIM 20, 1000 E1 EDIM 40, 1000 E1 FIX 5 All El FIX 25 ALL El FIX 45 ALL El FIX 65 ALL LOAD 1000
Card stack
Ready
IList Options I
EJ: mplc IDput
9-33
At any time during input the user can generate plots of the model executing Operations-Plot. Once the user is satisfied that the model has been entered properly, the model can be checked and saved with the File-Save command. If no fatal errors are found, then the CAESAR II execution files are written. The model may now be used in a piping analysis or analyzed by itself. (For the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed by itself.) The structural input processor generates a number of lists to be used for documentation and checking. Click the List Options tab for various list types. Of particular interest in this model is the element orientation data that shows that the columns strong axis was indeed rotated 90 degrees. Also the free-end-connection lists show that the specification entered for the beams produced the desired results.
Elements a nd Pr oper ties
!":jCAESAR Structural Modeler ; file dit

l!jew
1111EJ
!::!elp
Insert
Commands
l D e liiil :ft.ID Iii I I lJ i 10 ":;. :;..!: i A A )f .R. tN =:; G Ei,iJ 5I lliill l Iii 18 tI!:i! tD 11:J () l .R o;:. 0 + -+ !! :
Lrst Options (' Nodes
GQ J
N0DA -L -F I XIT I E -S -------------------------- L------! f H3 ,Index NODE FIX-X FIX-Y FIX-Z
L------------------------------ROT-X ROT-Y ROT-Z
r rr
Elements
Restraints
(' Loads Orientations
(' U nlorm Loads (' Free Ends (' Materiai iO's
r r
Section ID's Status
(' ALL
Card Stack list Options

For Help,press Fl
Nodal Fmitic
9-35
!":'jCAESAR Structural Modeler
I!I EJ
?
; file
dit
l!jew
Insert
Commands !::!elp
I lJ l lllil 18 I
l D e liiil !D iil kJ l>o

@
@l
:;..!:
til I!:J I ()
! f H3
l A A )f .R. tN =:; G Ei,iJ 5I lliill l .R a;:. () + -+ ,, II; :

NODAL LOADS Index NODE
1 1000 FOR-X 10000 FOR-Y 10000 FOR-Z 10000 ltOU-X
0
GQ J
lost Optoons
(' Nodes
umt-Y
r
r-
UOJ.l-Z
0
Elements
(' Restran i ts
Loads
Orientations
(' U nlorm Loads (' Free Ends

(' Materiaii O's
r r
Section ID's
Status
(' AUL
Card Stack list Options

For Help,press Fl
Nodal Loads
Element M ater ial Data
9-37
Element Geomet r y Data
Element of Or ient ation Dat a
9-39
r CAESAR StructuralModeler
i
Elle dlt '!jew Insert Commonds t!elp
1!1EJ
lost Optoons
f!lJ
From To
r r r r r
Nodes l E ements Restooints Loads Ooiena lilons Loods
Index 1 3 5
6
7 8
9
(o' Foee Ends
10 12 13
11
r r r r
Ma leoa i iiD 's SectionID's Stotus ALL
'FROll' ELEMEIIT EIID -----TRAII SL----FROM TO AX STR WEAK 10 30 FIX FIX FIX 15 H FIX FIX FIX 30 50 FIX FIX FIX 35 55 FIX FIX FIX 40 60 FIX FIX FIX 50 70 FIX FIX FIX 55 75 FIX FIX FIX 60 80 FIX FIX FIX 70 10 FIX FIX FIX 75 15 FIX FIX FIX 80 20 FIX FIX FIX 20 1000 FIX FIX FIX 40 1000 FIX FIX FIX
----BEIIDIIIG----TOR STR WEAK FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE
-----TRAIISL----AX STR WEAK FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX
----BEIIDIIIG----TOR STR WEAK FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE
Card Stack List Options For Help1 press Fl
When error checking has completed successfully, the user is returned to the CAESAR II Main Menu. The user should change the current jobname to that of the structural filename. When this is done the Analysis-Static menu option should be selected. From this point structural steel analysis is performed just like a piping analysis. Output from a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments. The displacement and force report for the (Force Only) load case follows. Note that the structure is stiffer in the X direction, even though the Z dimension is greater due to the orientation of the columns. The Force/Moment report is particularly interesting given that all of the beams have pinned ends. Note that most of the beams carry no load. This is because the transfer of the load to the beams in this model is due to rotations at the column ends, and not translations. (Cross-braces would eliminate this problem and cause the beams to pick up more of the load.) The 1000 end of the elements from 20-1000 and from 40-1000 carries a moment because it is not a pinned end connection. 1000 is just a point at midspan for the application of the load.
9-41
+ + H bl .;,
6'-.f
CAESAR II Ver.4, 99, 0, (Build 050316) Date:JUL 25, 2005 Time: 10:0 Job: C:\CAESAR\SUPP3 Licensed To: CDADE ESL DEALER/EVAL COPY ID 10001 GLOBAL ELEMENT FORCES REPORT: Forces on Elements CASE 2 (SUS) F1
FY
10 10
2503 2503 2492 2492 2507 2507 2503 2503 2492 2492 2507 2507 2497 2497 250B 2493 2493 2497 2497 250B 2493 2493
5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 0 0 0 0 0 0
5000 179999.9 5000 120000.0 5000 120000.0 5000 60000.0 5000 60000.0 5000 0.0 5000 179999.9 5000 120000.0 5000 120000.0 5000 60000.0 5000 60000.0 5000 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 90009.3 0.0 0.0 59979.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
20 25 30 30
0.0 90009.3 0.0 0.0 59979.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 60020.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 60020.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
40 45 50 50
60 70 70 75 75 10 30
t.:.J :
:d
+ + H Q.;,"-f
CAESAR II Ver.4, 99, 0, (Build 050316) Date:JUL 25, 2005 Time: 10:0 Job: C:\CAESAR\SUPP3 Licensed To: COADE ESL DEALER/EVAL COPY .. ID 10001 GLOBAL ELEMENT FORCES REPORT: Forces on Elements CASE 2 (SUS) F1
FY
10 30 0 30 50 11 15 40 60 50 70 75 60 70 10 75 2493 2493 0 0 0 11 15 2493 2493 5000 5000 5000 5000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0 0 0 5000 5000 5000 5000
0 0 0
20 20 1000 40 1000
5000 0.0 0.0 5000 35000.0 35000.0 5000 0.0 0.0 5000 35000.0 35000.0
[:j ,
Chapter 10 Buried Pipe Modeling In This Chapter

Modeler Overview ................................................................ 10-2 Using the Underground Pipe Modeler .................................. 10-3 Notes on the Soil Model........................................................ 10-9 Recommended Procedures .................................................... 10-17 Example ................................................................................ 10-18
Modeler Overview
The CAESAR II Underground Pipe Modeler is designed to simplify user input of buried pipe data. This processor will take an unburied layout and bury it. The Modeler performs the following functions for users:
Allows the direct input of soil properties. The Modeler contains the equations for buried pipe stiffnesses that are outlined later in this chapter. These equations are used to calculate first the stiffnesses on a per length of pipe basis, and then generate the restraints that simulate the discrete buried pipe restraint. Breaks down straight and curved lengths of pipe to locate soil restraints. CAESAR II uses a zone concept to break down straight and curved sections. Where transverse bearing is a concern for example near bends, tees, and entry/exit points soil restraints are located in close proximity. Breaks down straight and curved pipe so that when axial loads dominate, soil restraints are spaced far apart. Allows the direct input of user-defined soil stiffnesses on a per length of pipe basis. Input parameters include axial, transverse, upward, and downward stiffnesses, as well as ultimate loads. You can specify user-defined stiffnesses separately, or in conjunction with CAESAR IIs automatically generated soil stiffnesses.
Chapter10
Using the Underground Pipe Modeler

You can start the Buried Pipe Modeler by selecting an existing unburied job, and then choosing InputUnderground from the CAESAR II Main Menu. The Modeler is designed to read a standard CAESAR II Input Data File that describes the basic layout of the piping system as if it was not buried. From this basic input CAESAR II creates a second input data file that contains the buried pipe model. This second input file typically contains a much larger number of elements and restraints than the first job. The first job that serves as the pattern is termed the original job. The second file that contains the element mesh refinement and the buried pipe restraints is termed the buried job. CAESAR II names the buried job by appending a B to the name of the original job.
Note The original job must already exist and serves as the pattern for the buried pipe model building. The modeler removes any restraints in the buried section during the process of creating the buried model. Any additional restraints in the buried section can be entered in the resulting buried model. The buried job, if it exists, is overwritten by the successful generation of a buried pipe model. It is the buried job that is eventually run to compute displacements and stresses.
When the Buried Pipe Modeler is initially started, the following screen appears:
This spreadsheet is used to enter the buried element descriptions for the job. The buried element description spreadsheet serves several functions: allows you to define which part of the piping system is buried. allows you to define mesh spacing at specific element ends. allows the input of user-defined soil stiffnesses Typical buried pipe displacements are considerably different than similar above ground displacements. Buried pipe deforms laterally in areas immediately adjacent to changes in directions (i.e. bends and tees). In areas far removed from bends and tees the deformation is primarily axial. The optimal size of an element (i.e. the distance between a single FROM and a TO node) is very dependent on which of these deformation patterns is to be modeled. Not having a continuous support model, CAESAR II or the user, must locate additional point supports along a line to simulate this continuous support. So for a given stiffness per unit length, either many, closely spaced, low stiffness supports are added or a few, distant and high stiffness supports are added. Where the deformation is lateral, smaller elements are needed to properly distribute the forces from the pipe to the soil. The length over which the pipe deflects laterally is termed the lateral bearing length and can be calculated by the equation:
Lb = 0.75( ) [4EI/Ktr] 0.25
Where:
E = Pipe modulus of elasticity I = Pipe moment of inertia Ktr = Transverse soil stiffness on a per length basis, (defined later)
CAESAR II places three elements in the vicinity of this bearing span to properly model the local load distribution. The bearing span lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 1 lengths. The axial displacement lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 3 lengths, and the intermediate lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 2 lengths. Zone 3 element lengths (to properly transmit axial loads) are computed by 100*Do, where Do is the outside diameter of the piping. The Zone 2 mesh is comprised of up to 4 elements of increasing length; starting at 1.5 times the length of a Zone 1 element at its Zone 1 end, and progressing in equal increments to the last which is 50*Do long at the Zone 3 end. A typical piping system, and how CAESAR II views this element breakdown or mesh distribution is illustrated below. All pipe density is set to zero for all pipe identified as buried, so that deadweight causes no bending around these point supports.
Chapter10
Zone Definitions
Note: CAESAR II automatically puts a Zone 1 mesh gradient at each side of the pipe framing into an elbow. It is your responsibility to tell CAESAR II where the other Zone 1 areas are located in the piping system.
A critical part of the modeling of an underground piping system is the proper definition of Zone 1or lateral bearing regions. These bearing regions primarily occur:
On either side of a change in direction. For all pipes framing into an intersection. At points where the pipe enters or leaves the soil. Using any user-defined node within or near Zone 1.
The left side of the Buried Element Description Spreadsheet displays below:
Bur ied Element Descr iption Spr ea dsheet
Chapter10
There are 13 columns in this spreadsheet. The eight not shown above carry the user-defined soil stiffnesses and ultimate loads. The first two columns contain element node numbers for each piping element included in the original system. The next three columns Soil Model No, From End Mesh Type, To End Mesh Type, are discussed in detail below: Soil Model No.This column is used to define which of the elements in the model are buried. A nonzero entry in this column implies that the associated element is buried. A 1 in this column implies that the user wishes to enter user defined stiffnesses, on a per length of pipe basis, at this point in the model. These stiffnesses must follow in column numbers 6 through 13. Any number greater than 1 in the SOIL MODEL NO. column points to a CAESAR II soil restraint model generated using the equations outlined later under Soil Models from user entered soil data. From/ To End Mesh TypeA check in either of these columns implies that a Zone 1 should be placed at the corresponding element end. For example:
FROM NODE 5 TO NODE 10 SOIL 2 FROM TO MODEL MESH MESH
The element 5 to 10 is buried. CAESAR II will generate the soil stiffnesses from user-defined soil dataset #2, and the node 5 end will have a fine mesh so that lateral bearing will be properly modeled. Since CAESAR II automatically places lateral bearing meshes adjacent to all buried elbows, the user must only be concerned with the identification of buried tees and points of soil entry or exit. The figure below is illustrative:
Please note the following:
The user has separated the node numbers in the original piping system by varying the incremental range by 20. This is so CAESAR II can maintain the sequence of node numbers for the added nodes. This is not required but is useful in comprehending results. For very long runs, node increments of 100 may be helpful. From/To Lateral Bearing mesh specifications are not needed for nodes 30, 110 and 130, since CAESAR II places lateral bearing meshes on each side of a bend by default. A lateral bearing mesh is not needed at 90 because there is no tendency for the model to deflect in any direction NOT axial to the pipe. The tendency for lateral deflection must be defined for each element framing into an intersection (node 50).
Commands available in this module are:
Button Description
File Open File-Change Buried Pipe Job Name File- Print
Opens a new piping file as the original job. Renames the buried job (in the event that the user does not wish to use the CAESAR II default of B appended to the original job name). Prints the element description data spreadsheet.
Allows the user to specify soil data for CAESAR II to use in generating one or more Soil Models soil restraint systems. This is described in detail below. Convert Converts the original job into the buried job by meshing the existing elements and adding soil restraints. The conversion process creates all of the necessary elements to satisfy the Zone 1, Zone 2, and Zone 3 requirements, and places restraints on the elements in these zones accordingly. All elbows are broken down into at least two curved sections, and very long radius elbows are broken down into segments whose lengths are not longer than the elements in the immediately adjacent Zone 1 pipe section. Node numbers are generated by adding 1 to the elements FROM node number. CAESAR II checks before using a node number to make sure that it will be unique in the model. All densities on buried pipe elements are zeroed to simulate the continuous support of the pipe weight. A conversion log is also generated, which details the process in full.
Chapter10
Notes on the Soil Model

The following procedures for estimating soil distributed stiffnesses and ultimate loads should be used only when the analyst does not have better data or methods suited to the particular site and problem. Our soil restraint modeling algorithms are based on the ideas presented by (1) The CAESAR II Basic Model L.C. Peng in his paper entitled Stress Analysis Methods for Underground Pipelines, published in 1978 in Pipeline Industry and (2) Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation from the Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe by the American Lifelines Alliance http://www.americanlifelinesalliance.org/pdf/Update061305.pdf. Soil supports are modeled as bi-linear springs having an initial stiffness, an ultimate load, and a yield stiffness. The yield stiffness is typically set close to zero, i.e. once the ultimate load on the soil is reached there is no further increase in load even though the displacement may continue. The two basic ultimate loads that must be calculated to analyze buried pipe are the axial and transverse ultimate loads. Many researchers differentiate between horizontal, upward, and downward transverse loads, but when the variance in predicted soil properties and methods are considered, this differentiation is often not warranted. Note that CAESAR II allows the explicit entry of these data if so desired. Once the axial and lateral ultimate loads are known, the stiffness in these directions can be determined by dividing the ultimate load by the yield displacement. Researchers have found that the yield displacement is related to both the buried depth and the pipe diameter. The ultimate loads and stiffnesses computed are on a force per unit length of pipe basis.
Button Description
The user enters soil data by executing the Soil Models Command. This option allows the user to specify the soil properties for the CAESAR II Buried Pipe Equations.
Note Valid soil model numbers start with 2. Soil model number 1 is reserved for user-defined soil stiffnesses. Up to 15 different soil models may be entered for a single job.
Upon entry, the soil modeler dialog appears. Select either the CAESAR II Basic Model (Peng) or the American LifeLines Alliance.
CAESAR II Basic Model (Peng)

Either the friction coefficient or the undrained shear strength may be left blank. Typically for clays the friction coefficient would be left blank and would be automatically estimated by CAESAR II as Su/600 psf. Both sandy soils and clay-like soils may be defined here.
Chapter10
The soil restraint equations use these soil properties to generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses. The TEMPERATURE CHANGE is optional. If entered the thermal strain is used to compute and print the theoretical virtual anchor length.) These equations are:
Axial Ultimate Load (Fax) Fax = D[ (2sH) + ( pt) + ( f)(D/4) ] Where:
= Friction coefficient, typical values are:

0.4 for silt 0.5 for sand 0.6 for gravel 0.6 for clay or Su/600 Su = Undrained shear strength (specified for clay-like soils) D = Pipe diameter Soil density H t = = = Buried depth to the top of pipe Pipe density Pipe nominal wall thickness Fluid density
p = f
s =
Transverse Ultimate Load (Ftr) Ftr = 0.5s (H+D)2[tan(45 + /2)]2OCM
If Su is given (i.e. has a clay-like soil), then Ftr as calculated above is multiplied by Su/250 psf.
Where:
= Angle of internal friction, typical values are:

27-45 for sand 26-35 for silt 0 for clay
Notes on the Overburden Compaction Multiplier (OCM)

The OCM is an artificial CAESAR II term used to allow you to take a conservative approach when modeling uncertain soil response. Since a higher stiffness will generally produce conservative results, you may wish to increase the transverse soil stiffness, CAESAR II uses the OCM to serve this purpose. Users have reduced the OCM (from its default of 8) to values ranging from 5 to 7, depending on the degree of compaction of the backfill. There is no theory which suggests that the OCM cannot equal 1.0. For a strict implementation of Peng's Theory as discussed in his articles (April 78 and May 78 issue of Pipeline Industry) you should use a value of 1.0 for the OCM.
Yield Displacement (yd): yd = Yield Displacement Factor(H+D)
Note: The Yield Displacement Factor defaults to 0.015(suggested for H = 3D).
Axial Stiffness (Kax) on a per length of pipe basis: Kax=Fax / yd Transverse Stiffness (Ktr) on a per length of pipe basis: Ktr=Ftr / yd
Once you click OK, the soil data is saved in a file entitled .SOI.
American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model

The following information references the American Lifelines Alliance document "Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe " Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation http://www.americanlifelinesalliance.org/pdf/Update061305.pdf. This document provides bilinear stiffness of soil for axial, lateral, uplift and bearing. Each stiffness term has a component associated with sandy soils (subscripted q) and a component associated with clays (subscripted c). Data can be entered for pure granular soils and pure clays. Soil stiffness for both clay and sand (cohesive and granular soils, respectively) are defined through the following parameters supplied by the user:
c=
H =
soil cohesion representative of the soil backfill soil depth to top of pipe (this is converted by C2 to depth to pipe centerline in ALA calculations) effective unit weight of soil total dry unit weight of fill coefficient of earth pressure at rest (can be calculated based on internal friction angle of soil)
= =
K0 =
f =
coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle at the soil-pipe interface
internal friction angle of soil
Chapter10
Elastic range of soil is either fixed or a function of D & H with limits based on D.
Yield Displacement Factor Entry Limited by
t (dT) Axial p (dP) Lateral qu (dQu) Upward qu (dQu) Upward qd (dQd) Downward
Length units Multiple of D Multiple of H Multiple of D Multiple of D
0.04(H+D/2) Minimum
Axial:
Tu = Dc +
DH (1 + K0 ) tan
transmitted to pipe)
Tu = peak friction force at pipe-soil interface maximum axial soil force per unit length that can be
D=
pipe OD adhesion factor (for clays only)
0.274 0.695 = 0.608 0.123c 2 + 3 c + 1 c + 1 where c is in ksf c = soil cohesion representative of the soil backfill (undrained shear strength)
H = depth of cover to pipe centerline
effective unit weight of soil
K 0 = coefficient of earth pressure at rest

The ratio of the horizontal effective stress acting on a supporting structure and the vertical effective stress in the soil at that point. At rest indicates the pipe does not move for this calculation.
interface angle of friction for pipe and soil,
= f
the soil-pipe interface
f = coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle at
Pipe Coating
Concrete Coal Tar Rough Steel Smooth Steel Fusion Bonded Epoxy Polyethylene
1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.6
Chapter10
= internal friction angle of soil

t = axial displacement to develop Tu = 0.1 inch for dense sand
= 0.2 inch for loose sand = 0.3 inch for stiff clay = 0.4 inch for soft clay
Lateral:
Pu = N ch cD + N qh HD
maximum horizontal soil bearing capacity (maximum lateral soil force per unit length that can be transmitted to pipe)
Pu =
N ch = horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)

N qh =
horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for sand (0 for =0)
N ch = a + bx +
c d 9 2 + ( x + 1) ( x + 1) 3
N qh = a + b( x) + c( x 2 ) + d ( x 3 ) + e( x 4 )
Factor x a b c d e
Nch Nqh Nqh Nqh Nqh Nqh Nqh
0 20 25 30 35 40 45
H/D H/D H/D H/D H/D H/D H/D
6.752 2.399 3.332 4.565 6.816 10.959 17.658
0.065 0.439 0.839 1.234 2.019 1.783 3.309
-11.063 -0.03 -0.090 -0.089 -0.146 0.045 0.048
7.119 1.059E-3 5.606E-3 4.275E-3 7.651E-3 -5.425E-3 -6.443E-3
--1.754E-5 -1.319E-4 -9.159E-5 -1.683E-4 -1.153E-4 -1.299E-4
Nqh can be interpolated for between 20and 45
p =
horizontal displacement to develop
Pu
= 0.04( H +
D ) 0.01D 2 to 0.15D
Vertical Uplift:
Qu = N cv cD + N qv HD
that can be transmitted to pipe)
Qu = maximum vertical upward soil bearing capacity (maximum vertical uplift soil force per unit length N cv = vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0) N qv =
vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for sand (0 for
N qv = (
H ) Nq 44 D )
N cv = 2( N qv = (
H ) 10 D applicable for (H/D)10 ) Nq
H
44 D
Nq = exp( tan ) tan 2 (45 + ) 2

qu =
vertical displacement to develop
Qu
= 0.01H to 0.02H for dense to loose sands < 0.1D = 0.1H to 0.2H for stiff to soft clays < 0.2D
Vertical Bearing:
D2 Qd = N c cD + N q HD + N 2 Qd = maximum vertical bearing soil force per unit length that can be transmitted to pipe N c , N q , N = vertical downward soil bearing capacity factors N c = [cot( + 0.001)]{exp[ tan( + 0.001)] tan 2 (45 +
N q = exp( tan ) tan 2 (45 + ) 2
2.5) N = e( 0.18
+ 0.0 01 1} ) 2
total dry unit weight of fill vertical displacement to develop
qd =
Qd
= 0.1D for granular soils = 0.2D for cohesive soils
Chapter10
Recommended Procedures
The recommended procedure for using the buried pipe modeler is outlined below:
1 Select the original unburied job and enter the buried pipe modeler. The original job must already exist, and will serve as the basis for the pipe model. The original model need only contain the basic geometry of the piping system. The modeler will remove any existing restraints in the buried portion. Add any additional underground restraints ( e.g. thrust block) to the buried model. Rename the buried job if the CAESAR II default name (JOBNAME B) is not appropriate. 2 Enter the soil data using Soil Models or collect any user-defined soil data. 3 Describe the sections of the piping system that are buried, and define any required fine mesh areas using the buried element data spreadsheet or enter user-defined soil data (columns 6-13). 4 Convert the original model into the buried model by clicking Convert Input. This step produces a detailed description of the conversion. 5 Exit the Buried Pipe Modeler and return to the CAESAR II Main Menu. From here the user may review and edit the buried model and perform the analysis of the buried pipe job.
A buried-pipe example problem is shown in the following section. This example illustrates the features of the modeler and should in no-way be taken as a guide for recommended underground piping design.
Example
The following input listing represents the unburied model shown above.
Chapter10
Terminal nodes 100 and 1900 are above ground. Nodes 1250 and 1650 (on the sloped runs) mark the soil entry and exit points. Soil Model Number 2, a sandy soil, is entered.
Elements 1250-1300 through 1600-1650 are buried using soil model number 2. Zone 1 meshing is indicated at the entry and exit points.
Chapter10
Clicking Convert on the toolbar to begins the conversion to a buried model.

E. ile
!;.dit
:tiew
Buried Pipe
Iiii i
.
:
[9.
db
8 I&i!ICM.
lJ
I I
E lement
8asic Soil Properties Buried Element Descriptions
13
of
120
.........
ELEMENT 900 NOT BURIED... ELEMENT 000 NOT BURIED... ELEMENT

00
000
............ ............ ............ ............
00
200
NOT BURIED... ELEMENT 200 NOT BURIED... ELEMENT 250

Buried S oi. 300
Mo de
250
'Virtua Ancho r Lengeh (in.) Axial. Sei fness ( 1b. /in. / in. ) Trans Sei.fness ( 1b. /in. / in. ) Yie l. d Di.spl.acem.ene (in.) = Direceion
CAESAR
s oi.
m. ode
eype
No.
= =
.2600
0 ?5 62 29?6
COMPUTED STIFFNESSES:
AXIAL TRANS UP DOWN

Lateral. Bearing
--
Stiffness ( l.b _ / in. /in. ) 62 29?6 29?6 29?6
Ul.ti.m.at e Load
( l.b. /in. )
?8 3?49 3?49 3?49
Lengeh (in.)
298.0471
----
OK
Cancel
The screen listing can also be printed.
Chapter10
The original unburied model is shown along with the "buried" model below. Note the added restraints around the elbows and along the straight runs.
"Unburied Pipe" - note above ground restraints
"Buried Pipe" - note added restraints and their location
Note the bi-linear restraints added to the nodes.

: Ell dit t:!odel
En lronment Qptlons yjew tools
ried model. The stiffness used is based upon the distance between
t1olp
:EE I
f'i tl EHHH a<
iD bli I:DI
il l
a - MJ
Llli1]
i\.. 1:\1. 1
<".>I]-+ I tt I
: :R' -
ti
e 111
i!IPI!r l ll iii i J I -'
CJ@E)I -;r I ID I [P I M -
a i l ilOl i DI e.l i "i) i Classic Piping Input

c liD
Q)
From: To: r Nam
OX:
- 0 - J J;. r:o -
$,.<il,;;.OO *
))
,..
DY: I DZ 1311. 3000 in r Offsets
jr
))l
r Bend r Rigid Expnsion Joint
r Reducer
r SIFs Uees
Code: 18318
:.:J
F1:1J F2
f'iil
Hengers d r r Nozzles
m m
(J
Diameler:
Iii
..
WIISch:
po 0000
"1
P' Restraints
r Displacements
r Flenge
... ir
177000.000 T1: T2
J;;J
r F01ces/Moments
r Uniform Loeds
r Seem Welded +Mill Tol %:112.5000 Mill Tol %:112.5000 Conosion:
f0:65oO
r Wind/Wave
l
>-;i}
i!!
113
T3 F3R T4: 1.000 F4: T5 TS T? TS: 1.000 T9 Ell F5 Fs iJ F? R FS: FS Fee:
..:J))l
Meleriel: I1306).:1P I 5L X65
P' Allowable Stress

Eleslic Modulus (C): I2.95 00E+007 Elastic Modulus (H1): I2.9260E+007
"
i
;;!.
,-
1;;;"
zAx
.hl.J
...
y
/}.X
6':
l!!.
l '""iil
..
;Restraints
lnsul Thk: [O:OOoO
Eleslic Modulus (H2): I2.9500E+007
_j
STIFFNESS
lb.Jin.
.-.
y:-
I D
QjJ
FROM NODE 1 2 3
4
TO NODE 200 200 200 200 500 500 500 500 700 700 700 700 800 800
RfSTR NODE 100 ANC 200 +Y 500 +YROD
TVPE
or
5
6
6 9
10 11 12 13 14 Reedy
100 100 100 100 400 400 400 400 600 600 600 600 700 700
....
24.0000
q
[jjl
....J
1 0zo
700 +V
C'llJ
800 +Y CAP NUM SCRL
..:J
A
Chapter10
Note that the first buried element, 1250-1251, has no density.
The buried job can now be analyzed.
Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance In This Chapter

Equipment and Component Evaluation ................................ 11-2 Intersection Stress Intensification Factors ............................ 11-3 Bend Stress Intensification Factors ....................................... 11-6 WRC 107 Vessel Stresses ..................................................... 11-10 WRC Bulletin 297................................................................. 11-17 Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations...................................... 11-18 Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines B31G ................ 11-27 Expansion Joint Rating ......................................................... 11-31 Structural Steel Checks - AISC............................................. 11-38 NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) ........................................... 11-46 API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) ............................................... 11-53 API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) ..................................... 11-59 API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) ............................... 11-61 Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed Feedwater Heaters ............................................................................................... 11-66 API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services) ....... 11-67
Equipment and Component Evaluation

The CAESAR II Equipment and Component Compliance Analytical Modules are executed from the CAESAR II Main Menu using the Analysis Menu. Vessels, flanges, turbines, compressors, pumps and heat exchangers can be checked for excessive piping loads in accordance with appropriate standards. Input is via tabbed spreadsheets, and help screens are available for each data cell (launched with [F1] or the ? key). Output reports can be sent to the printer, terminal or files. Often suction (inlet), discharge (exhaust), and extraction lines are analyzed for forces and moments in separate runs of a pipe stress program. Once all of the loadings for a particular piece of equipment are computed, the equipment program is executed to determine if these loads are acceptable in accordance with the governing code. The user enters the equipments basic geometry and the loads on its nozzles computed from the piping program. The equipment analysis determines if these loads are excessive. One convenient feature of the CAESAR II Equipment programs is that nozzles on equipment can be analyzed separately. Often times a user will only have suction side loads, and often the particular dimensions of the pump are unknown, or are difficult to obtain. In these cases, CAESAR II accepts zeros or no-entries for the unknown data and will still generate a single-nozzle equipment check report. Therefore, while overall compliance may not be evaluated, the user can still check the individual nozzle limits. This is a valuable tool to have, as in this case the user is looking more for load guidance, rather than for some fixed or precise limit on allowables.
Analysis M enu
All of these program modules share the same interface for easy transition. The individual modules are described following section.
11
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors

With this module, intersection stress intensification factors (SIFs) can be computed for any of the three-pipe type intersections available in CAESAR II:
Inter section Types
A sample input spreadsheet is shown below.
Inter section Str ess Int ensification Fa ctor s
11
Stress intensification factors are reported for a range of different configuration values.
Inter section Str ess Int ensification Fa ctor s Repor t
Bend Stress Intensification Factors

This module provides a scratch pad for determining stress intensification factors (SIFs) for various bend configurations under different codes. Bend stress intensification factors can be computed for
Pipe bends without any additional attachments. These calculations are done exactly according to the piping code being used. Mitered pipe bends. These calculations are done exactly according to the piping code being used. Pipe bends with a trunnion attachment. These calculations are taken from the paper Stress Indices for Piping Elbows with Trunnion Attachments for Moment and Axial Loads, by Hankinson, Budlong and Albano, in the PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
The bend stress intensification factor input spreadsheet is shown below:
Bend Str ess I ntensification Spr ea dsheet
11
Input here is fairly straight forward; if there is a question about a particular data entry, the help screens should be queried. In most cases data that does not apply is left blank. For example, to review the SIFs for a bend that does not have a trunnion, the three trunnion related input fields should be left blank.
Bend Str ess I ntensification F act or s - Tr unnion
Pressure Stiffening
The pressure stiffening option in the input is provided so you can see the effect that pressure stiffening has on the bends flexibility factor and stress intensification factor. This option is controlled by you in CAESAR II via the setup file, but is most commonly left to the default condition. The default is different for each piping code because some of the codes mention pressure stiffening explicitly and some do not. Pressure stiffening has its most significant effect in larger diameter bends adjacent to sensitive equipment (compressors). Including pressure stiffening where it is not included by default will draw more of the system moment to the nozzle adjacent to the bend.
Flanges Attached to Bend Ends

This is the number of rigid fittings that are attached to the end of the bend preventing the ovalization of the bend. It is the ovalization that provides for a large amount of the bends flexibility. BS-806 The British Power Piping Code recommends that flanges or valves (or any rigid cross-sectional fitting) that are within two diameters of the ending weld point of the bend be considered as being attached to the end of the bend for this calculation.
Bends with Trunnions

There are limits that must be satisfied before SIFs can be calculated on trunnions. These limits come directly from the paper by Hankinson, Budlong and Albano, and they are:
t/T D/T d/D
0.2 20 0.3
and and and
t/T D/T d/D
2.0 60 0.8
Where:
t = Wall Thickness of the Trunnion T = Wall Thickness of the Bend d = Outside Diameter of the Trunnion D = Outside Diameter of the Bend
11
Stress Concentrations and Intensification

The stress intensification calculation for bends with trunnions is based on the relationship between the ASME NB stress indices C2, K2, and the B31 code i factor or stress intensification factor. That relationship has long been taken to be
(m)(i) = (C2)(K2)
Where:
m i C2 K2 = = = = multiplier, usually either 1.7 or 2. B31 stress intensification factor ASME NB secondary stress index ASME NB peak stress index
The peak stress index (K2) is commonly known as the stress concentration factor, and is so-called in CAESAR II. Simply put, this factor is the ratio of the highest point stress at an intensification (i.e. at an intersection or an elbow) and the nominal local computed stress at the same point. Peak stresses typically only exist in a very small volume of material, on the order of fractions of the wall thickness of the part. Because most piping components are formed without crude notches, gross imperfections or other anomalies, the peak stress index is kept well in control. Where a smooth transition radius is provided which is at least t/2, where (t) is the characteristic thickness of the part, the peak stress index is typically taken as 1.0. At unfinished welds, sockets, and where no transition radius is provided the peak stress index approaches values of 2.0.
Note If you enter a trunnion (where there will be a weld between the trunnion and the elbow), and you do not enter a stress concentration factor (the third input for the trunnion), CAESAR II assumes a stress concentration factor of 2.0.
WRC 107 Vessel Stresses

The Welding Research Council Bulletin 107 (WRC 107) has been used extensively since 1965 by design engineers to estimate local stresses in vessel/attachment junctions. There are 3 editions of the WRC 107 bulletin available in the program, set the default using Configure/Setup. The WRC 107 Bulletin provides an analytical tool to evaluate the vessel stresses in the immediate vicinity of a nozzle. You can use this method to compute the stresses at both the inner and outer surfaces of the vessel wall, and report the stresses in the longitudinal and circumferential axes of the vessel/nozzle intersection. The convention adopted by WRC 107 to define the applicable orientations of the applied loads and stresses for both spherical and cylindrical vessels display below.
11
Spherical Shells Defining WRC Axes: P-axis: Along Nozzle centerline and positive entering vessel. M1-axis: Perpendicular to nozzle centerline along convenient global axis. M2-axis: Cross P-axis into M1 axis and the result is M2-axis. Defining WRC Stress Points: uupper, stress on outside of vessel wall at junction. llower, stress on inside of vessel at junction. A-Position on vessel at junction along negative M1 axis. B-Position on vessel at junction along positive M2 axis. C-Position on vessel at junction along positive M2 axis. D-Position on vessel at junction along negative M2 axis.
Cylindrical Shells Defining WRC Axes: P-axis: Along Nozzle centerline and positive entering vessel. MC-axis: Along vessel centerline and positive to correspond with any parallel global axis. M2-axis: Cross the P-axis with MC axis and result is ML-axis. Defining WRC Stress Points:
u-upper, stress on outside of vessel wall at junction.

l-lower, means stress on inside of vessel at junction. A-Position on vessel at junction along negative MC axis. B-Position on vessel at junction, along positive MC axis. C-Position on vessel at junction, along positive ML axis. D-Position on vessel at junction, along negative ML axis. Note: Shear axis "VC" is parallel, and in the same direction as the bending axis "ML." Shear axis "VL" is parallel, and in the opposite direction as the bending axis "MC."
It has also been a common practice to use WRC 107 to conservatively estimate vessel shell stress state at the edge of a reinforcing pad, if any. The stress state in the vessel wall when the nozzle has a reinforcing pad can be estimated by considering a solid plug, with an outside diameter equal to the O.D. of the reinforcing pad, subjected to the same nozzle loading.
Note: Before attempting to use WRC 107 to evaluate the stress state of any nozzle/vessel junction, you should always verify that the geometric restrictions limiting the application of WRC 107 are not exceeded. These vary according to the attachment and vessel types, you should refer to the WRC 107 bulletin directory for this information.
WRC 107 should probably not be used when the nozzle is very light or when the parameters in the WRC 107 data curves are unreasonably exceeded. Output from WRC 107 includes the figure numbers for the curves accessed, the curve abscissa, and the values retrieved. You should check these outputs against the actual curve in WRC 107 to get a feel for the accuracy of the stresses calculated. For example, if parameters for a particular problem are always near or past the end of the figures curve data, then the calculated stresses may not be reliable.
Enable WRC 107 by clicking ANALYSIS - WRC 107/297 from the Main Menu. The WRC 107/297 window appears.
Analysis-WRC 107
The WRC 107/297 Analysis module allows multiple analyses to be saved inside the same file. The Job Explorer window lists each analysis contained in the job, sorted by analysis type: WRC-107 or WRC-297. The items in the list are created by combining the items description and item number, which can be changed in the data input window. The Job Explorer window is a docking window that can be hidden and pinned open by clicking the Pushpin in the upper right corner. The WRC 107/297 Toolbar enables users to select a specific analysis type, launch an analysis of data, or output analysis results to MS Word.
Button
Description
11
Enables you to define a data set as a WRC-107 analysis. Enables you to define a data set as a WRC-297 analysis. Starts the analysis and displays the results in the programs window. Performs the initial WRC 107 calculation and summation and sends the result to MicroSoft Word New analyses can be added to the job by clicking the appropriate analysis type button 107or 297 on the toolbar. An analysis can be removed from the job by selecting it in the Job Explorer window, then clicking the Pencil Eraser button on the toolbar. To display an analysis in the Data Input window (the grid-like window on the right) select it from the list in the Job Explorer window on the left. You can navigate through the Data Input window by clicking on a cell with the mouse, or by using the keyboard. The Tab key moves the cursor from the left cell (label) to the right cell (value), then to the next left cell label, and so on. The Up/Down Arrow keys move through the cells. You can enter data when the focus is either on a label or value. When a cell has a list selection such as an attachment type, display the list by clicking on the cell, and using the Alt + Down Arrow key combination, or by clicking the drop list arrow with the mouse. The analysis results and the graphical representation display on the Analysis and Drawing tabs on the right side of the Data Input window. These two tabs are also docking panes that can be opened or hidden by clicking on the Pushpin in the upper right corner. The two tabs automatically update after each change in the Data Input window, even if they are hidden.
Below displays a sample Analysis report, you can undock, move, and resize the report according to preference.
Analysis Repor t
Nozzle curves in the WRC Bulletin 107 cover essentially all applications of nozzles in vessels or piping; however, should any of the interpolation parameters, i.e. Beta, etc. fall outside the limits of the available curves, some extrapolation of the WRC method must be used. The current default is to use the last value in the particular WRC table. If you wish to control the extrapolation methodology interactively, you may do so by changing the WRC 107 default from USE LAST CURVE VALUE to INTERACTIVE CONTROL on the Computation Control tab located inside the Configure-Setup module of the Main Menu or directly in the WRC 107 input file, on the Vessel Data tab.
11
WRC 107 Stress Summations

Because the stresses computed by WRC 107 are highly localized, they do not fall immediately under the B31 code rules as defined by B31.1 or B31.3. Appendix 4-1 of ASME Section VIII, Division 2 Mandatory Design Based on Stress Analysis does however provide a detailed approach for dealing with these local stresses. The analysis procedure outlined in the aforementioned code is used in CAESAR II to perform the stress evaluation. In order to evaluate the stresses through an elastic analysis, three stress combinations (summations) must be made:
Pm P m + P l + Pb Pm + Pl + Pb + Q
Where Pm is defined as the general membrane stress due to internal pressure removed from discontinuities, and can be estimated for the vessel wall from the expression (PD) / (4t) for the longitudinal component and (PD) / (2t) for the hoop component, where P is the design pressure of the system. The allowable for Pm is kSmh where Smh is the allowable stress intensity (See the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for definition). The value of k can be taken from Table AD-150.1 of the code (which ranges from 1.0 for sustained loads to 1.2 for sustained plus wind loads or sustained plus earthquake loads). Pl is the local membrane stress at the junction due to the sustained piping loads, Pb is the local bending stress (defined as zero at the nozzle to vessel connections per Section VIII, Division 2 of ASME Code), while Q is defined as the secondary stress, due to thermal expansion piping loads, or the bending stress due to internal pressure thrust and sustained piping loads. The allowable stress intensity for the second stress combination is 1.5kSmh, as defined by the Figure 4-130.1 of the Code, while Smh is the hot stress intensity allowable at the given design temperature. Both Pl and Q will be calculated by the WRC 107 program. The third combination actually defines the range of the stress intensity, and its allowable is limited to 1.5(Smc+Smh). See the Technical Reference Manual for a detailed discussion. This summation is done automatically following the WRC 107 analysis. This calculation provides a comparison of the stress intensities to the entered allowables, along with a corresponding PASS-FAIL ruling. Failed items display in red.
WRC 107 Analysis M odule - Dr awing Tab
11
WRC Bulletin 297

Published in August of 1984, Welding Research Council (WRC) 297 attempts to extend the existing analysis tools for the evaluation of stresses in cylinder-to-cylinder intersections. WRC 297 differs from the widely used WRC 107 primarily in that WRC 297 is designed for larger d/D ratios (up to 0.5), and that WRC 297 also computes stresses in the nozzle and the vessel. (WRC 107 only computes stresses in the vessel.) The CAESAR II WRC 297 module shares the same interface with WRC 107. To enable the WRC 297 analysis, click the 297 button located near the upper-left corner of the window. The module provides spreadsheets for vessel data, nozzle data, and imposed loads. Vessel and Nozzle data fields function the same way as those in WRC 107. Currently WRC 297 supports one set of loads. The loads may be entered in either Global CAESAR II convention, or in the Local WRC 107 coordinate system. If Global CAESAR II convention is selected vessel and nozzle direction cosines must be present in order to convert the loads into the Local WRC 297 convention as discussed in the WRC 297 bulletin. The CAESAR II version of WRC 297 also adds the pressure component of the stress using Lames equations, multiplied by the stress intensification factors found in ASME Section VIII, Div. 2, Table AD-560.7. The pressure stress calculation is not a part of the WRC 297 bulletin, but is added here as a convenience for the user.
Note CAESAR II also uses, through the piping input processor, the nozzle flexibility calculations described in WRC 297 refer to Chapter 3 of the Technical Reference Manual.
When provided with the necessary input, CAESAR II calculates the stress components at the four locations on the vessel around the nozzle and also the corresponding locations on the nozzle. Stresses are calculated on both the outer and inner surfaces (upper and lower). These stress components are resolved into stress intensities at these 16 points around the connection. Refer to the WRC 107 discussion for more information on the allowable limits for these stresses and output processing.
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations

The Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations are started by selecting the Main Menu option ANALYSIS-FLANGES. There have been primarily two different ways to calculate stress and one way to estimate leakage for flanges that have received general application over the past 20 years. The stress calculation methods are from the following sources:
ASME Section VIII ANSI B16.5 Rating Tables

The leakage calculations were also based on the B16.5 rating table approach. Leakage is a function of the relative stiffnesses of the flange, gasket and bolting. Using the B16.5 estimated stress calculations to predict leakage does not consider the gasket type, stiffness of the flange, or the stiffness of the bolting. Using B16.5 to estimate leakage makes the tendency to leak proportional to the allowable stress in the flange, i.e. a flange with a higher allowable will be able to resist higher moments without leakage. Leakage is very weakly tied to allowable stress, if at all. The CAESAR II Flange Leakage Calculation is our first attempt to improve upon the solution of this difficult analysis problem. Equations were written to model the flexibility of the annular plate that is the flange, and its ability to rotate under moment, axial force, and pressure. The results compare favorably with three dimensional finite element analysis of the flange junction. These correlations assume that the distance between the inside diameter of the flange and the center of the effective gasket loading diameter is smaller than the distance between the effective gasket loading diameter and the bolt circle diameter, i.e. that (G-ID) < (BC-G), where, G is the effective gasket loading diameter, ID is the inside diameter of the flange, and BC is the diameter of the bolt circle. Several trends have been noticed as flange calculations have been made:
The thinner the flange, the greater the tendency to leak. Larger diameter flanges have a greater tendency to leak. Stiffer gaskets have a greater tendency to leak. Leakage is a function of bolt tightening stress.
11
Input for the Flange Module is broken into four sections_ The first section describes flange geometry_
!":".!Flange leakage/Stress Calculat1ons -[C:\CAESAR\tutor) E.ile dit Iools A_ iew t:!elp
1111J
Flange ) Bolts and Gasket ) MaterialData ) Loads )
,--------------- Flange Type ---------------, lnteg1al Weld Neck lnteg1al Slip On

IntegralRing
Loose Slip On
r.
Loose Ring
r r
Lap Joint
Blind
r r
Reverse
Flange Class :1300 Flange G1ade: j1.2000 Flange Outside Oiamete1[AJ: 141.5000 Flange Inside Oiamete1 IBJ: j30.5600 Flange Thickness ltJ: 14.0600 Flange Face 00 01 Lapjt cnd34.5000 Flange Face 10 01 Lapjt cnt 10: j33.0000 Small End Hub Thickness igOJ:11.6900 La1ge End Hub Thickness lgl J: j3.4400 Hub Length lhl: 16.6200
:.:J
Ready
Flu.ae AAalyair
The second section contains data on the bolts and gasket.
Bolts and G asket
11
The third section is used to enter material and stress-related data.

t":".!Fiange leakage/Stress Calculatoons -[C:\CAESAR\tutor) Eile dit Iools
Jl
l!jew
t[elp
Flange ) Bolts and Gasket Material Data ) Loads )
Flange Material:f.1r.l$(i;,fjl #fi1i jjl

Bolt Mateoial: SA-193 B7
Browse... Browse...
Design Tempeoatuoe:1650.0000 Flange Allowable @Design Tempeoatuoe: 11BBOO.OOOD Flange Allowable @Ambient Tempeoatuoe: j2oooo.OOOD Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Design: j27900000.DOO Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Ambient: j27900000.DOO Bolt Allowable @Design Tempeoatuoe: 11BBOO.OOOD Bolt Allowable @Ambient Tempeoatuoe: 11BBOO.OOOD Flange Allowable Stoess Multiplieo: 1 1.0000 Bolt Allowable Stoess Multiplieo [VIII DIV 21 f:" l."o '"o 'oo :--- ]
Ready
Mlltwielcd Btn11Deta
The fourth section contains the imposed loads.

!'!.!Flange leakage/Stress Calculatoons -[C:\CAESAR\tutor) Eile dit Iools
Jl
lijew
t[elp
Flange ) Bolts and Gasket ) MaterialData
Loads )
Exteonal Loads ---------------------,

Design Pressure IPJ: Jtmmu!llml
Axial Fooce (Optional): j1000.0000 Bending Moment (Optional): j2400.0000
Disable Leakage Calculations
r Disable Stress Calculations r Disable ANSI 816.5 Check r
Ready
lapa114Loa4
Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance
11-23
Bolt Tightening Stress Notes

This is a critical item for leakage determination and for computing stresses in the flange. The ASME Code bases its stress calculations on a prespecified, fixed equation for the bolt stress. The resulting value is however often not related to the actual tightening stress that appears in the flange when the bolts are tightened. For this reason, the initial bolt stress input field that appears in the first section of data input, Bolt Initial Tightening Stress, is used only for the flexibility/leakage determination. The value for the bolt tightening stress used in the ASME Flange Stress Calculations is as defined by the ASME Code:
Bolt Load = Hydrostatic End Force + Force for Leaktight Joint
If the Bolt Initial Tightening Stress field is left blank, CAESAR II uses the value
where 45,000 psi is a constant and d is the nominal diameter of the bolt (correction is made for metric units). This is a rule of thumb tightening stress that will typically be applied by field personnel tightening the bolts. This computed value is printed in the output from the flange program. It is interesting to compare this value to the bolt stress printed in the ASME stress report (also in the output). It is not unusual for the rule-of-thumb tightening stress to be larger than the ASME required stress. When the ASME required stress is entered into the Bolt Initial Tightening Stress data field, a comparison of the leakage safety factors can be made and the sensitivity of the joint to the tightening torque can be ascertained. Users are strongly encouraged to play with these numbers to get a feel for the relationship between all of the factors involved.
11-24
Using the CAESAR II Flange Modeler

Only the following input parameters are required to get a leakage report. These parameters include
Flange Inside Diameter Flange Thickness Bolt Circle Diameter Number Of Bolts Bolt Diameter Effective Gasket Diameter Uncompressed Gasket Thickness Effective Gasket Width Leak Pressure Ratio Effective Gasket Modulus Externally Applied Moment Externally Applied Force Pressure
The help screens (press [F1] or ? at the data cell) are very useful for all of the input items and should be used liberally here when there are questions. Unique input cells are discussed as follows:
Leak Pressure Ratio

This value is taken directly from Table 2-5.1 in the ASME Section VIII code. This table is reproduced in the help screens. This value is more commonly recognized as m, and is termed the Gasket Factor in the ASME code. This is a very important number for leakage determination, as it represents the ratio of the pressure required to prevent leakage over the line pressure.
Effective Gasket Modulus

Typical values are between 300,000 and 400,000 psi for spiral wound gaskets. The higher the modulus the greater the tendency for the program to predict leakage. Errors on the high side when estimating this value will lead to a more conservative design.
Flange Rating
This is an optional input, but results in some very interesting output. As mentioned above, it has been a widely used practice in the industry to use the ANSI B16.5 and API 605 temperature/pressure rating tables as a gauge for leakage. Because these rating tables are based on allowable stresses, and were not intended for leakage prediction, the leakage predictions that resulted were a function of the allowable stress for the flange material, and not the flexibility, i.e. modulus of elasticity of the flange. To give the user a feel for this old practice, the minimum and maximum rating table values from ANSI and API were stored and are used to print minimum and maximum leakage safety factors that would be predicted from this method. Example output that the user will get upon entering the flange rating is shown as follows: EQUIVALENT PRESSURE MODEL Equivalent Pressure (lb./sq.in.) 1639.85 ANSI/API Min Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1080.00
11-25
ANSI/API Max Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1815.00 This output shows that leakage, according to this older method, occurred if a carbon steel flange was used, and leakage did not occur if an alloy flange was used. (Of course both flanges would have essentially the same flexibility tendency to leak.) The following input parameters are used only for the ASME Section VIII Division 1 stress calculations:
Flange Type Flange Outside Diameter Design Temperature Small End Hub Thickness Large End Hub Thickness Hub Length Flange Allowables Bolt Allowables Gasket Seating Stress Optional Allowable Multipliers Flange Face & Gasket Dimensions
The flange type can be selected from the icons on the first spreadsheet. Material allowables may be acquired from the Section VIII, Division 1 material library that is accessed from the pull-down list.
11-26
An input listing for a typical flange analysis is shown below:

CA E S A R I I MISCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO Flange Inside Diameter [B](in.) Flange Thickness [t](in.) Flange Rating (Optional) Bolt Circle Diameter (in.) Number of Bolts 32.000 Bolt Diameter (in.) 1.500 Bolt Initial Tightening Stress(lb./sq.in.) Effective Gasket Diameter [G] (in.) 33.888 Uncompressed Gasket Thickness (in.) 0.063 Basic Gasket Width [b0] (in.) 0.375 Leak Pressure Ratio [m] 2.750 Effective Gasket Modulus(b./sq.in.) 300,000.000 Externally Applied Moment (optional)(in.lb.) 24,000.000 Externally Applied Force (optional)(lb.) 1,000.000 Pressure [P](lb./sq.in.) 400.000 The following inputs are required only if you wish to perform stress calcs as per Sect VIII Div. 1 Flange Type (1-8, see ?-Help or Alt-P to plot) 1.000 Flange Outside Diameter [A](in.) 41.500 Design TemperatureF 650.000 Small End Hub Thickness [g0](in.) 1.690 Large End Hub Thickness [g1](in.) 3.440 Hub Length [h](in.) 6.620 Flange Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000 Flange Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000 Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Design(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08 Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Ambient(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08 Bolt Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000 Bolt Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000 Gasket Seating Stress [y](lb./sq.in.) 3,700.000 Flange Allowable Stress Multiplier 1.000 Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier (VIII Div 2 4-1411.000 Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt OD(in.) 34.500 Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID(in.) 33.000 Gasket Outer Diameter (in.) 36.000 Gasket Inner Diameter (in.) 33.000 Nubbin W idth (in.) Facing Sketch 1.000 Facing Column 2.000 Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N 4.060 300.000 38.500 30.560
11-27
Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines B31G

The B31G criterion provides a methodology whereby corroded pipelines can be evaluated to determine when specific pipe segments must be replaced. The original B31G document incorporates a healthy dose of conservatism and as a result, additional work has been performed to modify the original criteria. This additional work can be found in project report PR-3805, by Battelle, Inc. The details of the original B31G criteria as well as the modified methods are discussed in detail in this report. CAESAR II implements these B31G computations from the Main Menu select ANALYSIS-B31G. The user is then presented with two spreadsheets on which the problem specific data can be entered. CAESAR II determines the following values according to the original B31G criteria and four modified methods. These values are
the hoop stress to cause failure the maximum allowed operating pressure the maximum allowed flaw length
The four modified methods vary in the manner in which the corroded area is estimated. These methods are
.85dLThe corroded area is approximated as 0.85 times the maximum pit depth times the flaw length. ExactThe corroded area is determined numerically using the trapezoid method. EquivalentThe corroded area is determined by multiplying the average pit depth by the flaw length. Additionally, an equivalent flaw length (flaw length * average pit depth / maximum pit depth) is used in the computation of the Folias factor. EffectiveThis method also uses a numerical trapezoid summation, however, various sub lengths of the total flaw length are used to arrive at a worst case condition. Note that if the sub length which produces the worst case coincides with the total length, the Exact and Effective methods yield the same result.
The input screens from the B31G processor are shown below. All input cells have associated help text for user convenience. Note that most of the data required by this processor is acquired through actual field measurements.
11-28
Data Spr ea dsheet
11
A maximum of twenty pit measurements may be entered on the Measurements spreadsheet.

t":".!Pipehne Rema1n1ng Strength Calculatoons (B31G) -[C:\CAESAR\tutor)
i Eile
Data
dit Iools
Jl
I!I EJ
l!jew
t[elp
Measurements )
r Measurements are (in.)...-----, Pits
r. r Thicknesses
liW!J!M
2.1o 1360 3. 0.1880 4. 0.2610 5.102190
6.1o 1880 7.1o 1570 8. 0.1780 9. 0.1780 10.10.1570
11.10.1360 12.1o.oooo 14.
13 h
-II
Jl
16 1 17 1
II
II
18R 19. -II 20 1

Jl
151
Ready
MM-tiiUIIIa Sprndllhttt
11-30
Once the data has been entered, the Analyze menu option initiates the computations. A typical output report is shown as follows.
The data in the input and the resulting output are consistent with the example from the PR-3-805 report on page B-19. For additional information or backup on these computations, an intermediate computation file is generated. For additional information on this processor, please refer to either the B31G document or the Battelle project report PR-3-805.
11
Expansion Joint Rating

CAESAR II provides a computation module which computes a limit for the total displacement per corrugation of an expansion joint. According to EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association), the maximum permitted amount of axial movement per corrugation is defined as erated where ex + ey + eq < erated The terms in the above equation are defined as: ex = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed axial movements. ey = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed lateral deflections. eq = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed angular rotation, i.e. bending. erated= The maximum permitted amount of axial movement per corrugation. This value should be obtained from the Expansion Joint Manufacturers catalog. In addition, EJMA states, Also, [as an expansion joint is rotated or deflected laterally] it should be noted that one side of the bellows attains a larger projected area than the opposite side. Under the action of the applied pressure, unbalanced forces are set up which tend to distort the expansion joint further. In order to control the effects of these two factors a second limit is established by the manufacturer upon the amount of angular rotation and/or lateral deflection which may be imposed upon the expansion joint. This limit may be less than the rated movement. Therefore, in the selection of an expansion joint, care must be exercised to avoid exceeding either of these manufacturers limits. This CAESAR II computation module is provided to assist the expansion joint user in satisfying these limitations. This module computes the terms defined in the above equation and the movement of the joint ends relative to each other. These relative movements are reported in both the local joint coordinate system and the global coordinate system. The expansion joint rating module can be entered by selecting MAIN MENU ANALYSIS -EXPANSION JOINT RATING option. The user is then presented with two input spreadsheets on which the joint geometry and end displacements are specified.
11-32
Geometr y Spr ea dsheet
11
Displa cements and R otation
EHpanston
Rattng
D [I}. I
Ejle dit
II!I EJ
JL
lijew
t!elp
Allowables
J
Geometry ) Displacements and Rotations
Per Convolution --------, Axiai: Jm!I!I!:

Latetal: jo.0625 Bending: jo.0200 Totsional: jo.0050
Jl Jl
_jl
Jl
-Total -----------, Axial jo 1600 Latetal: jo.2500 Bending: jo.OBOO Totsional: jo.0200
_II
Jl Jl
_jl
Ready
11
A report displaying both the input echo and the output calculations are shown as follows. The units used for the coordinate and displacement values are the length units defined in the active units file. Rotations are in units of degrees.
Rat10g
Ejle
dit
JL
16
lijew t!elp
II!I EJ
Geometry ) Displacements and Rotations ) Allowables Output )
AXIAL DISPLACEMENTS (TOTAL)
Axial Axial Axial Axial
Displacement Displacement due to Late al Displacement due to Rotation Displacement TOTAL
(in.) (in.) (in.) (in.)
0.401 0.532 0.066 0.999
UNITY CHECK FAILED ON A "TOTAL LENGTII" BASIS (axial) + ( late<al) + (bending) 1.0 < 0.4010 0.1578 1.5106 22.0195 0.1600 0.2500 0.0800
(tot:sional)
0.0190 0.0200
and
<
1.0 0.9495
Equivalent Axial Movements (Total)

(axial)
0.4010
(late<al)
0.5319
(bending)
0.0659
<
0.1600 0.9987
Ready
11-36 C A E S A R II MISCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO
EJMA EXPANSION JOINT RATING Node Number for FROM end 120.000 Node Number for TO end 125.000 Number of Convolutions 4.000 Flexible Joint Length (in.)4.447 Effective Diameter(in.)4.996 X Coordinate of from end (in.).000 Y Coordinate of from end (in.).000 Z Coordinate of from end (in.).000 X Coordinate of to end (in.)4.447 X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z Displacement of from end (in.).300 Displacement of from end (in.).250 Displacement of from end (in.).000 Rotation of from end (deg).000 Rotation of from end (deg)1.222 Rotation of from end (deg).030 Displacement of to end (in.)-.100 Displacement of to end (in.).120 Displacement of to end (in.).000 Rotation of to end (deg).000 Rotation of to end (deg)-.020 Rotation of to end (deg).890
OUTPUT: AXIAL DISPLACEMENTS PER CONVOLUTION Axial Axial Axial Axial Displacement.100 Displacement due to Lateral .133 Displacement due to Rotation.016 Displacement TOTAL.250
RELATIVE MOVEMENTS OF END i WITH RESPECT TO END j (Local Joint Coordinate System) Relative Relative Relative Relative Axial Displacement, x.401 Lateral Displacement, y.158 Bending, theta (deg)1.511 Torsion (deg) .019
RELATIVE MOVEMENTS OF END i WITH RESPECT TO END j (Global Piping Coordinate System) Relative Relative Relative Relative Relative Relative X Displacement-.399 Y Displacement-.132 Z Displacement.095 Rotation about X (deg).000 Rotation about Y (deg)-1.242 Rotation about Z (deg).860
11-37
In the previous output, the axial displacement total in the report is the total axial displacement per corrugation due to axial, lateral, and rotational displacement of the expansion joint ends. This is the value that would be compared to the rated axial displacement per corrugation. If e(total) is greater than the rated axial displacement per corrugation, then there is the possibility of premature bellows failure. Be sure that the displacement rating from the manufacturer is on a per corrugation basis. If not then multiply the axial displacement total by the number of corrugations and compare this value to the manufacturers allowable axial displacement. Note that most manufacturers allowed rating is for some set number of cycles (often 10,000). If the actual number of cycles is less, then the allowed movement can often be greater. Similarly, if the actual number of cycles is greater than 10,000, then the allowed movement can be smaller. In special situations manufacturers should almost always be consulted because many factors can affect allowed bellows movement. The y in the report is the total relative lateral displacement of one end of the bellows with respect to the other, and theta is the total relative angular rotation of one end of the bellows with respect to the other. (Note that CAESAR II does not include x into the denominator for the lateral displacement calculations as outlined in EJMA.
11-38
Structural Steel Checks - AISC

Code compliance for structural steel shapes is performed according to the AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) code. This code check uses the forces and moments at the ends of the structural members, computes stresses, and allowables, and determines a unity check value. If the unity check value is less than 1.0, the member is acceptable for the given loading conditions. CAESAR II performs the AISC unity check according to either the 1977 or the 1989 edition of the AISC code.
Note Member properties are obtained from the AISC database and used to compute the actual and allowable stress values for the axial and bending terms comprising the unity check equations. The specific database is set using the Configure-Setup module. The database must be either AISC77.BIN or AISC89.BIN.
To perform unity check calculations from the Main Menu click Analyze - AISC.
Global Parameters
After launching this module, the user is presented with the Global Input spreadsheet.
Global Input Spr ea dsheet
11-39
This screen is used to enter data that applies to all members being evaluated. Particular fields are:
Structural Code
The entry in this field should be either AISC 1977 or AISC 1989 respectively. Users should set this entry to match the database in use.
Allowable Stress Increase Factor

The Allowable Stress Increase Factor is a multiplication factor applied to the computed values of the axial and bending allowable stresses. Typically this value is 1.0. However, in extreme events the AISC code permits the allowable stresses to be increased by a factor. Normally a 1/3 increase is applied to the computed allowables, making the Allowable Stress Increase Factor = 1.33. Examples of extreme events are earthquakes and 100 year storms. For more details see the AISC code, section 1.5.6.
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz

Cmy and Cmz are interaction formula coefficients for the strong and weak axis of the elements (in-plane and out-of-plane).
0.85 for compression members in frames subject to joint translation (sidesway). For restrained compression members in frames braced against sidesway and not subject to transverse loading between supports in the plane of bending: 0.6 - 0.4(M1/M2); but not less than 0.4 Where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the ends, of that portion of the member unbraced in the plane of bending under consideration. For compression members in frames braced against joint translation in the plane of loading and subject to transverse loading between supports, the value of Cmy may be determined by rational analysis. However, in lieu of such analysis, the following values are suggested per the AISC code:
0.85 for members whose ends are restrained against rotation in the plane of bending 1.0 for members whose ends are unrestrained against rotation in the plane of bending
Youngs Modulus
The slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this value is usually 29,000,000 psi.
Material Yield Strength

The specified minimum yield stress of the steel being used.
Bending Coefficient
The bending coefficient Cb shall be taken as 1.0 in computing the value of Fby and Fbz for use in Formula 1.61a. Cb shall also be unity when the bending moment at any point in an unbraced length is larger than the moment at either end of the same length. Otherwise, Cb shall be Cb = 1.75 + 1.05(M1/M2) + 0.3(M1/M2)2 but not more than 2.3 where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the ends.
Form Factor Qa
11-40
The form factor is an allowable axial stress reduction factor equal to the effective area divided by the actual area. (Consult the latest edition of the AISC code for the current computation methods for the effective area.)
Allow Sidesway
The ability of a frame or structure to experience sidesway (joint translation) affects the computation of several of the coefficients used in the unity check equations. Additionally, for frames braced against sidesway, moments at each end of the member are required. Normally sidesway is allowed (i.e., the box is checked).
Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . .

This check box determines whether or not the AISC program attempts to resize specific members as a result of the unity check computations. Activating this option requires the user to specify a desired minimum unity check and a desired maximum unity check. If the computed unity check falls outside this range, the program resizes the member appropriately. The final member size is shown in the output report.
Minimum Desired Unity Check

This is a required entry if the redesign option has been activated. This entry defines the minimum acceptable unity check allowed. If a unity check falls below this point, the element is resized to a smaller shape.
Maximum Desired Unity Check

This is a required entry if the redesign option has been activated. This entry defines the maximum acceptable unity check allowed. If a unity check falls above this point, the element is resized to a larger shape.
11-41
Local Member Data

Local Member Data must be entered for each member being evaluated.
Local M ember Dat a Spr ea dsheet
11-42
Particular fields are the following:
Member Start Node

The member start node is the i end of a structural element. The node number entered should be an integer value between 1 and 32,000. This is a required entry.
Member End Node

The member end node is the j end of a structural element. The node number entered should be an integer value between 1 and 32,000. This is a required entry.
Member Type
The member type is the AISC shape label found in the AISC manual. The shape label is used to acquire the member geometric properties from the database. The label entered in this field must match exactly the label in the database for properties to be obtained. Use the on line help to list typical member designations. Since many of the angle labels can be found in the single angles, the double angles (long legs back to back), and the double angles (short legs back to back), require an angle type to tell them apart. This cell should contain a D for double angles with equal legs, and double angles with long legs back to back. This cell should contain a B for double angles with short legs back to back.
In- And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz

The coefficients used to compute the strong and weak axis slenderness ratios, respectively are
End Conditions Theoretical K Recommended Design K
fixed-fixed fixed-pinned fixed-sliding pinned-pinned fixed-free pinned-sliding
0.5 0.7 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0
0.65 0.8 1.2 1.0 2.1 2.0
11-43
Unsupported Axial Length

This length is the length used to determine the buckling strength of the member. Typically, this is the total length of the member.
Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending)

This length is the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the strong axis of the member.
Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending)

This length is the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the weak axis of the member.
Double Angle Spacing

Double angles normally have a gap or space separating the adjacent legs. The spacing as defined in the AISC manual must be 0.0, .375, or .75 inches.
Youngs Modulus
The slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this value is usually 29,000,000 psi. This value of Youngs modulus overrides the value specified on the global input spreadsheet.
Material Yield Strength

The specified minimum yield stress of the steel being used. This value of the material yield strength overrides the value specified on the global input spreadsheet.
Axial Member Force

This is the force (tension or compression) which acts along the axis of the member. The sign of the number is not significant, since a worst case load condition will be assumed, i.e. all positive loads.
In-Plane Bending Moment

The maximum bending moment in the member (when sidesway is permitted) which will cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member. The sign of the number is not significant, since a worst case load condition will be assumed, i.e. all positive loads.
Out-of-Plane Bending Moment

The maximum bending moment in the member (when sidesway is permitted) which will cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the member. The sign of the number is not significant, since a worst case load condition will be assumed, i.e. all positive loads.
In-Plane Small Bending Moment

For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the smaller of the two in-plane bending moments which cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member.
In-Plane Large Bending Moment
11-44
For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the larger of the two in-plane bending moments which cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member.
Out-of-Plane Small Bending Moment

For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the smaller of the two out-of-plane bending moments which cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the member.
Out-of-Plane Large Bending Moment

For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the larger of the two out-of-plane bending moments which cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the member.
AISC Output Reports

The output reports can be directed to either the terminal or a printer. The output report begins with a one page summary describing the current global data and units. This summary is shown on the following page:
AISC Out put Summa r y
11-45
The remaining pages in the output report show the data for the individual members. The last column of the report contains the most important data (namely the unity check value) and the governing AISC equation. Two sample member output reports are shown in the following figures. The first report is applicable to jobs where sidesway is allowed, the second report is applicable to jobs where sidesway is prevented.
M ember O utput Repor t, Sidesway Per mitted
Differences Between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Codes

There are a few differences between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Code Revisions that affect unity check computation. The most noticeable difference between these two revisions is that the 1989 code provides a method for computing the unity check on single angles. This procedure (which was not addressed in the 1977 code) can be found in a special code section following the commentary. The steps necessary to compute the unity check for single angles can be followed by reviewing the message file (generated upon user request). The other differences between these two code revisions deal with members in compression. Several constants for Qs have been altered, and a new factor kc has been added. kc is a compression element restraint coefficient defined in the 1989 edition of the code. Because of these code differences, CAESAR II stores the name of the active database in the input file for the AISC Program when the data file is first created. Attempting to switch databases or compute unity checks on angles using the 1977 code will generate error messages and the program will abort. Users are urged to consult the applicable AISC Manuals when using this program.
11-46
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines)

There are two types of force/moment allowables computed during a NEMA run: Individual nozzle allowables. Cumulative equipment allowables. Each individual suction, discharge, and extraction nozzle must satisfy the equation:
3F + M < 500De
Where:
F M De = = = resultant force on the particular nozzle. resultant moment on the particular nozzle. effective nominal pipe size of the connection.
A typical discharge nozzle calculation is shown as follows:
11-47
For cumulative equipment allowables NEMA SM23 states "the combined resultants of the forces and moments of the inlet, extraction, and exhaust connections resolved at the centerline of the exhaust connection", be within a certain multiple of Dc; where Dc is the diameter of an opening whose area is equal to the sum of the areas of all of the individual equipment connections. A typical turbine cumulative (summation) equipment calculation is shown as follows:
SFX, SFY, and SFZ are the respective components of the forces from all connections resolved at the discharge nozzle. FC(RSLT) is the result of these forces. SMX, SMY and SMZ are the respective components of the moments from all connections resolved at the discharge nozzle. Dc is the diameter of the equivalent opening as discussed above.
NEMA Turbine Example

Consider a turbine where node 35 represents the inlet nozzle and node 50 represents the outlet nozzle. The output from a CAESAR II analysis of this piping system includes the forces and moments acting on the pipe elements that attach to the turbine:
NODE FX FY FZ MX MY MZ
30 35 50 55
-108 108 -192 192
-49 67 7 -63
-93 93 -11 11
73 162 369 78
188 -47 -522 117
603 -481 39 -56
11-48
To find the forces acting on the turbine at points 35 and 50 simply reverse the sign of the forces that act on the piping: LOADS ON TURBINE @ 35 -108 -67 -7 -93 11 -162 -369 47 522 481 -39 LOADS ON TURBINE @ 50 192
Aside from the description, there is only one input spreadsheet for the NEMA turbine. Applied loads should be entered in global coordinates or extracted directly from the CAESAR II output file (using the on-screen button). This interface enables iterative addiction of an arbitrary number of nozzles to the model. To add a nozzle, click Add Nozzle.
NEM A Input I nlet
11-49
NEM A Input Exhaust
The first page of the output is the input echo, the second and some of the remaining pages display the individual nozzle calculations while, the last page displays the summation calculations.
Note The actual number of output pages will vary and depends on the number of nozzles defined in the input.
11-50
NEM A Input Echo Repor t
11-51
The NEMA output report for the above turbine example shows that the turbine passed. The highest summation load is only 56% of the allowable. If the turbine had failed, the symbol **FAILED** would have displayed, in red, under the STATUS column opposite to the load combination that was excessive.
NEM A Output Nozzle C alculations
11-52
NEM A Output Summa tion Calcs
11-53
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps)

In August of 1995, API released the 8th edition of API 610 for centrifugal pumps for general refinery service. The API 610 load satisfaction criteria is outlined below: If clause F.1.1 is satisfied, then the pump is O.K. Clause F.1.1 states that the individual component nozzle loads must fall below the allowables listed in the Nozzle Loadings table (Table 2) shown below:
11-54
If clause F.1.1 is NOT satisfied, but clauses F.1.2.1, F.1.2.2, and F.1.2.3 ARE satisfied then the pump is still O.K. Clause F.1.2.1 states that the individual component forces and moments acting on each pump nozzle flange shall not exceed the range specified in Table 2 by a factor of more than 2. Referring to the API 610 report, the user can see if F.1.2.1 is satisfied by comparing the Force/Moment Ratio to 2. If the ratio exceeds 2, the nozzle status is reported as FAILING. The F.1.2.2 and the F.1.2.3 requirements give equations relating the resultant forces and moments on each nozzle, as well as on the pump base point respectively. The requirements of these equations, and whether or not they have satisfied API 610, are shown on the bottom of the report. The following example is taken from the API 610 code and shows the review of an overhung end-suction process pump in English units. The three CAESAR II input screens are shown, followed by the program output.
API 610 Input Data
11-55
API 610 Suction Nozzle
11-56
API 610 Dischar ge Nozzle
11-57
11-58
Vertical In-Line Pumps

Note that on the first screen there is a check box for a vertical in-line pump. This is to be used when the pump is the vertical in-line type supported only by the attached piping. API states that if this is the case then 2.0 times the loads from Table 2 can be used. However, even if the pump fails the 2.0 Table 2 criteria, it may still pass. If the principal stress on the nozzle is less than 6,000 psi, then that nozzle passes. If the principal stress on either nozzle is greater than 6,000 psi, the overall status will be reported as Failed. In API 610 there is an example problem which illustrates the way stresses are computed on these in-line pump nozzles. The two basic equations for determining stress are
Stresses (s) = Force / Area + Moment / Section Modulus Shear Stresses (t) = Force / Area + Torque * distance / J
Where J is the polar moment of inertia. In the second equation, both terms of the equation will always add together. On the other hand, the Force/Area term in the first equation will depend on the sign of the force (tension or compression) that the user enters in the force and moment spreadsheet. The sign of the force is determined from the user-entered Centerline Direction Cosine, which for vertical in-line pumps should be entered in the direction extending from the discharge to the suction nozzle. The distances that are usually entered for pedestal mounted pumps can be left blank since they are not used.
11-59
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors)

The requirements of this standard are similar to those of NEMA SM-23 (1991). The allowable load values for API-617 are approximately 85% higher than the NEMA allowables. The input screens for this evaluation display below:
API 617 Input
11-60
API 617 Suction/Discha r ge Input
11-61
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers)

This calculation covers the allowed loads on the vertical, co-linear nozzles (item 9 in the figure) found on most single, or multi-bundled air cooled heat exchangers. The several figures from API 661 illustrate the type of open exchanger body analyzed by this standard.
API 661 Heat Exchanger s
11-62
The input for API 661 is self-explanatory. The Heat Exchangers figure and the Resultant Force/Multiplier inputs for Spreadsheet #1 are optional (default equals 1). The two requirements needed for API 661compliance: 5.1.11.1 - Each nozzle in the corroded condition shall be capable of withstanding the moments and forces defined in Heat Exchangers figure. 5.1.11.2 - The sum of the forces and moments on each fixed header (i.e. each individual bundle) will be less than 1,500 lb. transverse to the bundle, 2,500 lb. axial to the bundle, and 3,000 pound axial on the nozzle centerline. The allowed moments are 3,000, 2,000, and 4,000 ft.lb. respectively. This recognizes that the application of these moments and forces will cause movement and that this movement will tend to reduce the actual loads.
API 661 Input Data
11-63
API 661 Inlet Nozzle Data
11-64
API 661 Outlet Nozzle Data
11-65
A typical API 661 report is shown as follows:
11-66
Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed Feedwater Heaters

This module of the CAESAR II Rotating Equipment program provides a method for evaluating the allowable loads on shell type heat exchanger nozzles. Section 3.14 of the HEI bulletin discusses the computational methods used to compute these allowable loads. The method employed by HEI is a simplification of the WRC 107 method, where the allowable loads have been linearized to show the relationship between the maximum permitted radial force and the maximum permitted moment vector. If this relationship is plotted (using the moments as the abscissa and the forces as the ordinate), a straight line can be drawn between the maximum permitted force and the maximum permitted moment vector, forming a triangle with the axes. Then for any set of applied forces and moments, the nozzle passes if the location of these loads falls inside the triangle. Conversely, the nozzle fails if the location of the loads falls outside the triangle. The CAESAR II HEI output has been modified to include both the plot of the allowables and the location of the current load set on this plot. The HEI bulletin states that the effect of internal pressure has been included in the combined stresses; however, the effect of the pressure on the nozzle thrust has not. This requires combination with the other radial loads. CAESAR II automatically computes the pressure thrust and adds it to the radial force if the Add Pressure Thrust check box is enabled. A sample input for the HEI module is shown below. Note that since the pressure is greater than zero, a pressure thrust force will be computed and combined with the radial force.
HEI Nozzle/Vessel Input
11-67
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services)

This module of the CAESAR II Rotating Equipment Program provides a method for evaluating the allowable loads on Fired Heaters. Input consists of the tube nominal diameter and the forces and moments acting on the tube, as shown in the figure below:
API 560 Input Data
11-68
Upon execution of the analysis, CAESAR II compares the input forces and moments to the allowables as published in API 560 Example output is shown below.
API 560 Equip ment Repor t
Index
3
3D Graphic Highlights 4-80 Diameters, Wall, Insulation, Cladding & Refractory Thickness, Materials, Piping Codes 4-56 3D Graphics Configuration 4-74 3D Graphics Highlights Corrosion and Densities 4-81 Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, Wind/Wave Loads 4-59 Temp.and Press. 3-9 Temperature and Pressure 3-9 3D Graphics Interactive Feature Walk Through 4-89 3-D Modeler 4-69 3D/HOOPS Graphics 9-7 3D/HOOPS Graphics Animation Processor 8-16 3D/HOOPS Graphics Static Output Processor6-34 3D/HOOPS in the Animation Processor 8-16
Analysis Menu 3-7 Analyzing the dynamics job Eigensolver 7-36 Mode shapes 7-36 Performing a harmonic analysis For 7-37 Pha 7-37 Performing a modal analysis Eigens 7-36 Freque 7-36 Modes 7-36 Natura 7-36 Sturm 7-36 Performing a spectral analysis Mas 7-38 Selection of phase angles Harmonic 7-37 Angle spacing, double 11-36 Animation Motion 6-38 Animation Dynamic Result Modal Spectrum 8-17 Animation of Dynamic Results-Harmonic 8-17 Animation of Dynamic Results Time History 8-17 Animation of static results 6-38 Animation of Static Results Displacements 8-17 Animation of Static Results Notes 6-38 Announcing Builds 1-8 ANSI B16.5 11-20 API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services) 11-62 API 605 rating tables 11-20 API 610 Centrifugal pumps Load Satisfaction Criteria, API 610 11-48 API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) 11-48 API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) 11-54 API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) 11-56 Application guide 1-5 Applications of CAESAR II 1-3 Archive 5-19 Archiving and Reinstalling an Old, Patched Version 1-9 ASCE #7 wind loads 5-16 ASCE7 7-12 Auxiliary Data Area 4-11 Auxiliary data fields
A
About the CAESAR II Documentation 1-5 ABS 5-28 ABS Method 7-30 Actual cold loads 5-30 Adjust Deflection Scale 6-34 Advanced 7-23, 7-35 Advanced Parameters 7-31 Advanced Parameters Show Screen 7-23 Advanced PCF Import (APCF) 4-40 AISC code comparisons 11-40 AISC database 9-2 AISC Output Reports 11-39 AISC unity checks Allow sidesway 11-34 Allowable stress increase factor 11-34 Bending coefficient 11-34 Double angle spacing 11-36 Fixity coefficients 11-36 Form factor qa 11-34 Member type 11-36 Stress reduction factors 11-34 Structural code 11-34 Algebraic 5-28 Allowable stress increase factor 11-34 Allowable Stresses 4-21 Alpha tolerance 4-7 Ambient temperature 4-7 American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model 10-10
Index
Auxiliary screens 4-11 Expansion joint Effective diameter of b 4-15 Pressure thrust in expa 4-15 Axial length, Unsupported 11-36 Axial member force 11-36
B
B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force Response Spectrum 7-17 Backfill 10-8 Backfill efficiency 10-8 Bandwidth 5-19 Basic Load Cases 5-21, 5-23 Basic Operation 2-6 Batch run 5-2 Bend Data 4-12 Bend Stress Intensification Factors 11-6 Bending coefficient 11-34 Bending moment, In-plane 11-36 Bending moment, Out-of-plane 11-36 Bending stress 11-12 Bends with Trunnions 11-8 Bilinear springs 10-8 Bolt Tightening Stress Notes 11-19 Bolts and gasket 11-15 Boundary Conditions 4-9, 8-4 BS-806 11-8 Building Load Cases 2-11 Building Static Load Cases 5-8 Building the load cases 2-11 Builds, Version 1-8 Buried pipe displacements 10-3 Buried pipe example 10-16 Buried Pipe Modeling 10-1 Buried pipe restraints 10-3
Cold loads 5-30 Column reports 6-2 Combination load cases 5-21 Combination Method 7-30 Combination Methods 5-28 Concentrated forces 7-2 Connecting nodes 9-17 Construction element 4-8 Control Parameters 7-3, 7-23, 7-26, 7-31, 7-35 Corroded pipelines, B31G Calculating corroded area 11-23 Flaw Lengt 11-23 Cumulative usage 8-4 Cumulative Usage Report 6-26 Custom Reports 6-9 Custom Reports Toolbar 6-8, 6-14 Customizable Toolbar 4-3, 4-4 Customize Toolbar 4-3 Cutoff frequency 7-23 Cyclic stress range 7-2
D
Damping 7-26 Data Fields 4-4 Definition of a Load Case 5-21 Definition of a load case 5-21 Deflected Shape 6-34 Densities 4-10 Design CADWorx/PIPE 1-4 Detecting/Checking Builds 1-9 Diagnostics Menu 3-16 Differences Between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Codes 11-40 Disp 5-26 Disp/Force 5-26 Disp/Force/Stress 5-26 Disp/Stress 5-26 Displacement load case 5-29 Displacements 4-16, 6-14, 8-4 DLF/Spectrum Generator 7-8 DLF/Spectrum Generator Spectrum Wizard 7-8 Double angle spacing 11-36 Driving frequencies 7-3 Dynamic amplitude 7-2 Dynamic analysis input processor 7-5 Dynamic analysis types 7-5 Dynamic input commands 7-5 Initiating dynamic input 7-5 Prerequisites for dynamic inp 7-5 Dynamic Analysis Input Processor Overview 7-5 Dynamic capabilities
C
C2Isogen Export 3-12 CADWorx/Plant 1-4 CAESAR II Basic Model (Peng) 10-9 CAESAR II Quick Reference 2-2 CAESAR II, About 1-2 Can Builds Be Applied To Any Version? 1-8 Center of gravity report 2-9 Tutorial 2-9 Code compliance 7-3 Code Compliance Report 6-25 Code Stress Colors by Percent 6-34 Code Stress Colors by Value 6-34 Code stresses for dynamics 8-4
Index
Harmonic analysis 7-2 Concentrated forces 7-2 Cyclic stress range 7-2 Dynamic amplitude 7-2 Equipment start-up 7-2 Fluid pulsation 7-2 Forcing frequencies 7-2 Phase angle 7-2 Rotating equipment 7-2 Vibration 7-2 Modal analysis 7-2 Mode shapes 7-2 Natural frequency 7-2 Spectrum analysis 7-2 Impulse analysis 7-2 Relief valve 7-2 Response spectrum meth 7-2 Response vs. frequency 7-2 Sustained stresses in 7-2 Time history analysis 7-2 Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II 7-2 Dynamic imbalance 7-24 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-1 Dynamic load case number 7-30 Dynamic load factor 7-32 Dynamic load specification 7-3 Dynamic Output Processing 8-1 Dynamic output processor 8-2
Boundary conditions 8-4 Friction resista 8-4 Nonlinear restra 8-4 Forces/stresses, dynamics 8-4 Global forces, dynamics 8-4 Harmonic results 8-2 General results 8-2 Included mass data 8-4 % Force active 8-4 % Force added 8-4 % Mass included 8-4 Extracted modes 8-4 Missing mass corr 8-4 System response 8-4 Local forces, dynamics 8-4 Mass model 8-4 Lumped masses 8-4 Mass participation factors 8-4 Modes mass normalized 8-4 Modes unity normalized 8-4 Natural frequencies 8-4 Report types, dynamics Displacements 8-4 Report option 8-4 Restraints, dynamics 8-4 Maximum load on 8-4 Maximum modal c 8-4 Mode identifica 8-4 Spectrum results 8-2 Static/dynamic comb 8-2 Stresses, dynamics 8-4 Code stresses for 8-4 Stress intensific 8-4 Stress report 8-4 Time history results 8-2
E
Earthquake (Spectrum) 7-27 Earthquake input spectrum
Index
Spectrum definitions 7-27 Response spect 7-27 Shock definiti 7-27 Spectrum data 7-27 Spectrum name 7-27 Spectrum load cases Earthquake 7-29 El Centro earth 7-29 Independent sup 7-29 Spectrum load cases example 7-29 Static/dynamic combinations ABS 7-30 Combina 7-30 Hanger 7-30 Occasio 7-30 Piping 7-30 SRSS 7-30 Sustain 7-30 Earthquakes 7-21 Edit Dynamic Load Case 4-30 Edit Menu 4-30 Edit Static Load Case 4-30 Effective diameter 4-15 Effective gasket modulus 11-20 Eigensolution 7-3 Eigensolver 7-36 EJMA (expansion joint manufacturers association) 11-27 El centro 7-27 Element Direction Cosines 4-6 Element length 10-3 Element Lengths 4-4 End connections 9-2 Entering the Dynamic Analysis Input Menu 7-5 Entering the Static Output Processor 6-2 Entry into the processor 8-2 Entry into the Processor 8-2 Environment Menu 4-38 Equipment and component evaluation 11-2
Bend SIFs Trunnion 11-6 Bends with trunnions Trunn 11-8 Equipment checks 11-2 Flanges attached to bend en 11-8 Intersection SIFs 11-3 Pressure stiffening Flexib 11-7 Stress 11-7 Stress concentrations and i 11-8 Equipment and Component Evaluation 11-2 Equipment Checks/Screening 4-16 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-1 Equipment start-up 7-2 Error Check 5-2 Error checking 5-2 Errors, warnings, and notes 5-2 Error Checking 5-2 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-1 Error Checking the Model 2-9 Error Handling and Analyzing the Job 7-36 Errors Errors and warnings 2-9 ESL 7-36 ESL Menu 3-17 Example 10-16 Excitation frequency 7-24 Executing Static Analysis 2-12 Execution of Static Analysis 5-19 Expansion Joint 4-8, 4-15, 4-35 Expansion joint rating 11-27 Ejma 11-27 Maximum axial movement 11-27 Maximum lateral deflection 11-27 Maximum rotation 11-27 Output 11-27 Expansion Joint Rating 11-27 Expansion load cases 2-11, 5-29 Exporting Displacements To A File 4-42 External software lock ESL updating 3-17 Extracted modes 8-4
F
Fatal error dialog 5-3 Fatal Error Message 5-3 Fatigue (FAT) 5-5, 5-21 Fatigue curve 4-21 Fatigue curve data 4-21
Index
Fatigue curve dialog 4-21 Fatigue failure 8-4 Fatigue load cases 8-4 Fatigue loadings 6-26 Fatigue stress types 5-5, 7-24, 7-29, 8-4 Fatigue-type load cases 6-26 File Menu 3-3, 4-28 Filtering Reports 6-12 Limiting the Amount of Displayed Info 4-61 Fixity coefficients ky and kz 11-36 Fixity coefficients, AISC 11-36 Flange Checks - Equipment Screening 4-11 Flange leakage/stress calculations 11-15 Flange leakage 11-15 Methodology 11-15 Flange rating ANSI B16.5 11-20 API 605 11-20 Rating Table 11-20 Leak pressure ratio Gasket 11-20 Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations 11-15 Flange modeler 11-20 Flange rating 11-20 Flange Reports 6-20 Flanges Attached to Bend Ends 11-8 Flaw length 11-23 Flexible Nozzles 4-24 Fluid pulsation 7-2 Force 5-26 Force Sets 7-3, 7-21, 7-33, 7-34 Force spectrum methodology 7-32 Force Stress 5-26 Forces 4-18 Forces/stresses 8-4 Force-time profiles 7-33, 7-34 Forcing frequency 7-2, 7-37 Form factor QA 11-34 Frequency 7-24 Frequency cutoff 7-36 Friction Multiplier 5-26 Friction resistance 8-4 Full Run 1-10
Global Parameters 11-34
H
Hanger 4-25, 5-30 Hanger Design 5-26 Hanger design control data 4-35 Hanger selection Actual cold loads 5-30 Additional hanger 5-30 Design load cases 5-30 Hanger sizing load cases 5-30 Hot load 5-30 Operating load cases 5-30 Recommended load cases 5-30 Restrained weight 5-30 Spring hanger design 5-30 Hanger sizing 5-30, 7-30 Hanger Stiffness 5-26 Hanger Table with Text 6-28 Hangers 4-25 Harmonic 7-24, 7-37 Harmonic analysis 7-2, 7-3 Harmonic analysis input Harmonic displacements 7-24 Harmonic forces 7-24 Harmonic load definition 7-24 Excitation f 7-24 Phasing of harmonic loads Damping 7-26 Frequency 7-24 Harmonic co 7-26 Harmonic fo 7-24 Pressure wa 7-24 Reciprocati 7-24 Rotating eq 7-24 Harmonic control parameters 7-26 Harmonic displacements 7-24 Harmonic force 7-24 Harmonic loads 7-24 Harmonic results 7-37, 8-2 Harmonic stress 7-37 Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed Feedwater Heaters 11-61 Heat exchangers 11-56 HEI standard for closed feedwater heaters 11-61 Help menu 3-19 Help Menu 3-19
G
Gasket factor 11-20 General Computed Results 6-27 Global Element Forces 6-21 Global forces 8-4
Index
HOOPS Toolbar Manipulations 4-79 Hot load 5-30
I
IBC 7-13 Identifying Builds 1-8 IGE/TD/12 4-6 Importing Displacements From A File 4-42 Impulse 7-22 Impulse analysis 7-2 Included mass data 8-4 Incore solution 5-19 Independent support motion 7-29 Index numbers, structural steel input 9-2 In-plane bending moment 11-36 In-plane large bending moment 11-36 In-plane small bending moment 11-36 Input Echo 6-28 Input listing 8-4 Input Menu 3-6 Input overview based on analysis category 7-7 Input Overview Based on Analysis Category 7-7 Installing Builds 1-9 Insulation density 4-10 Intersection Stress Intensification Factors 11-3 Introduction 1-1
K
Kaux menu items Include Piping Input Files 4-38 Include structural input files 4-38 Review sifs 4-38 Review SIFs at Bend Node 4-38 Special execution parameters 4-38 Kaux-include structural files 9-2
Load cases 2-2, 2-13, 4-7, 4-9, 4-25, 4-28, 5-5, 5-19, 5-21, 5-30, 6-2, 6-26, 6-32, 6-38, 722, 7-24, 7-27, 7-38, 8-2, 8-4, 9-2, 9-28, 11-9 Basic load cases 2-11 Combination load cases 2-11, 5-21 Example of load cases 5-21 Expansion load case 5-29 Occasional load cases 5-29 Operating load cases 5-29 Recommended load cases 2-11 Stress category 5-21 Stress types 5-21 Sustained load case 5-29 Types of load cases 2-11 Types of loads 5-21 Load Cases for Other Types of Occasional Loads 5-11 Load Cases with Hanger Design 5-9 Load Cases with Pitch and Roll 5-10 Load Cases with Thermal Displacements 5-9 Load Cases with Thermal Displacements and Settlement 5-10 Load cycles 5-21 Load, Ultimate 10-8 Loading Conditions 4-9 Local Element Forces 6-22 Local forces 8-4 Local member data 11-36 Local Member Data 11-36 Lumped masses 7-7
M
Main menu 3-2 Analysis Menu items 3-7 File 2-2 Default data directory 3-3 Input file types 3-3 New command 3-3 Open command 3-3 Select an existing job file 3-3 Input Data entry 2-6 Input menu items 3-6 Main Menu 3-1 Major Steps in Dynamic Input 7-4 Mass and stiffness model 7-3
L
Lateral bearing length 10-3 Leak pressure ratio 11-20 Lease 1-10 License types Full run 1-10 Lease 1-10 Limited run 1-10 Limited Run 1-10 Limiting the Amount of Displayed Info. Find Node, Range, Cuttin 4-85 Line Numbers 4-5 Load Case Definition in CAESAR II 5-8 Load case list 5-5 Load Case Options Tab 5-26 Load Case Report 6-27
Index
Mass and stiffness model, Modifying 7-22, 7-25, 7-31, 7-33, 7-35 Mass correction, Missing 8-4 Mass model 7-7, 8-4 Mass participation factors 7-38, 8-4 Material Elastic Properties 4-10 Material fatigue curve 4-21 Material name 4-9 Material number 4-9 Material yield strength 11-34, 11-36 Max 5-28 Maximum Code Stress 6-34 Maximum desired unity check 11-34 Maximum Displacements 6-34 Maximum Restraints Loads 6-34 Member data, Local 11-36 Member end node 11-36 Member start node 11-36 Member type 11-36 Membrane stress 11-12 Menu Commands 4-28 Mexican Response Spectrum 7-15 Min 5-28 Minimum desired unity check 11-34 Miscellaneous Data 6-29 Missing mass correction 8-4 Modal 7-7 Modal analysis 7-2 Modal analysis input Control parameters Cutoff frequency 7-23 Modes of vibration 7-23 Lumped masses 7-7 Modes of vibration 7-7 Natural frequencies 7-7 System response 7-7 Mass model 7-7 Modes of vibration 7-7 Natural frequencies 7-7 System response 7-7 Mode identification line 8-4 Mode shapes 7-2, 7-36 Model Menu 4-35 Model menu items
Expansion joints 4-35 Hanger design control data 4-35 Title 4-35 Valve 4-35 Model modifications for dynamic analysis Control parameter 7-3 Dynamics 7-3 Conversion 7-3 Mass and st 7-3 Specifying loads 7-3 Cod 7-3 Dri 7-3 Dyn 7-3 For 7-3 Har 7-3 Loa 7-3 Nat 7-3 Occ 7-3 Poi 7-3 Sho 7-3 Sta 7-3 Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis 7-3 Modeler Overview 10-2 Modes 7-36 Modes mass normalized 8-4 Modes of vibration 7-7, 7-23, 7-36 Modes unity normalized 8-4 Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model 7-22, 7-25, 7-31, 7-33, 7-35 Modifying Mass and Stiffness Models 7-35 More 6-2 Motion 6-38
N
Natural frequencies 7-3, 7-7, 7-36, 8-4 NEMA SM23 Steam turbines Cumulative equipment calculations, N 11-41 NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) 11-41 NEMA turbine example 11-42 NEMA Turbine Example 11-42 Node Names 4-26 Node Numbers 4-4 Nominal pipe size 4-6 Nonlinear restraints 5-19, 8-4
Index
Note dialog 5-8 Note Message 5-5, 5-8 Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases 5-21 Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File 632, 8-15 Notes on the Soil Model 10-8 Nozzle Check Report 6-19 Nozzle data 11-9 Nozzle flexibility 11-14 Nozzle loads 11-9 Nozzle screen 11-14
O
Obtaining Builds 1-8 Occasional dynamic stresses 7-30 Occasional load cases 5-29 Occasional stress 7-2, 7-3, 7-30 Offsets 4-27 Operating conditions Temperatures and pressures 4-7 Operating Conditions Temperatures and Pressures 4-7 Operating load cases 5-29 Out-of-plane bending moment 11-36 Out-of-plane large bending moment 11-36 Out-of-plane small bending moment 11-36 Output Menu 3-10 Output Type 5-26 Output Viewer Wizard 6-31 Ovalization, bends 11-8 Overstress 6-34 Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II 9-2
P
PCF Import 4-40 Peak stress index 11-8 Performing the analysis 7-36 Performing the Analysis 7-36 Phase angle 7-2, 7-24, 7-37 Phasing 7-24 Pipe modeler 10-3 Pipe section properties 4-6 Pipe Section Properties 4-6 Piping codes for earthquakes 7-30 Piping dimensions 9-17 Piping input 2-6
Alpha tolerance 4-7 Ambient temperature 4-7 Construction element 4-8 Densities 4-10 Expansion joints 4-8 Input spreadsheet 4-2 Insulation density 4-10 Material name 4-9 Material number 4-9 Nominal pipe size 4-6 Rigid elements 4-8 Sif & tees 4-8 Specific gravity 4-10 Stress intensification factors 4-8 Thermal strains 4-7 Piping Input 4-1 Piping Input Generation 2-6 Piping job 9-2 Piping Material 4-9 Piping System Loads 5-21 Plot 4-46 Plotting Static output review 2-13 Tutorial 2-6 Point loads 7-3 Pressure Stiffening 11-7 Pressure thrust 4-15 Pressure vs. elevation table 5-16 Pressure wave 7-24 Printing or saving reports to a file 8-15 Printing or Saving Reports to File Notes 6-32 Proctor number 10-8 Produced Results Data 5-26 Program support 1-6 Technical support phone numbers 1-6 Training 1-6 Program Support/User Assistance 1-6 Providing Wind Data 5-16 Pulse TableDLF Spectrum Generation 7-33, 7-33
Q
Quick reference 2-2 Quick Start and Basic Operation 2-1
R
Reciprocating pumps 7-24 Recommended Load Cases 5-29 Recommended Load Cases Hanger Selection 5-30 Recommended Procedures 10-15 Relief Load Synthesis 7-32 Relief load synthesizer 7-33 Relief loads (spectrum) 7-32
Index
Relief Loads (Spectrum) 7-32 Relief loads spectrum Force sets for relief loads Earthquakes 7-21 Relief valv 7-21 Skewed load 7-21 Water hamme 7-21 Relief load synthesis Dynamic load fact 7-32 Force spectrum me 7-32 Relief valve 7-32 Thrust loads 7-32 Spectrum definitions DLF spectrum gener 7-20 Spectrum data 7-20 Spectrum load cases Impulse 7-22 Time history 7-22 Relief valve 7-2, 7-21, 7-32, 7-33 Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines B31G 11-23 Report Options 6-14 Report Template Editor 6-9 Report types 8-4 Report Types 8-4 Reports Navigation Toolbar 6-6 Resize members 11-34 Resize Model/Element Stretch 4-5 Response spectrum method 7-2 Response spectrum table 7-27 Response vs. frequency spectra 7-2 Restrained weight 5-30 Restraint auxiliary data 9-17 Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates 6-16 Restraint summary 6-18 Restraint Summary 6-18 Restraints 4-14, 6-15, 8-4 Review Current Units 4-30 Review Units 4-30 Rigid elements 4-8 Rigid weight 4-13 Rigid Weight 4-13 Rotating equipment 7-2, 7-24
S
Sample Input 9-9 Save Animation to File 8-17 Save As Graphics Image 4-61 Scalar 5-28 Screens 4-11 Seismic analysis 7-2 Select by Single Click 6-34 Select Case Names 6-2 Selection of Phase Angles 7-37 Shape factor, wind 5-16 Shock definition 7-27 Shock results 7-3 Shock spectra 7-2 Show Event Viewer Gr 6-34 Sidesway 11-34 Sidesway, AISC 11-34 SIFs & tees 4-8 SignMax 5-28 SignMin 5-28 Skewed load 7-21 Slug flow Specifying the load Force sets, slug flow 7-33 Force-time profile 7-33 Load cases, slug flow 7-33 Relief load synthesizer 7-33 Relief valve 7-33 Water hammer 7-33 Slug flow analysis 7-2 Snubbers 7-7 Snubbers Active 5-26 Software Revision Procedures 1-8 Soil model 10-8 Soil model numbers 10-8 Soil Models 10-3 Soil properties 10-2 Soil stiffnesses 10-2 Soil supports 10-8 Special element information 4-8 Special Element Information 4-8 Special execution parameters 4-38 Specific gravity 4-10 Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters 5-18 Specifying loads, dynamics 7-3 Specifying the Load 7-33 Specifying the Load 7-34
10
Index
Specifying the loads 7-7, 7-24, 7-27, 7-32, 7-33, 7-34 Specifying the Loads 7-24, 7-27, 7-32 Spectrum 7-38 Spectrum analysis 7-2 Spectrum data 7-20, 7-27 Spectrum Definitions 7-20, 7-33 Spectrum load cases 7-22, 7-29, 7-33, 8-2 Spectrum Load Cases 7-29, 7-33 Spectrum name 7-27 Spectrum results 8-2 Spectrum/Load Cases 7-22 Spreadsheet Overview 4-2 Spring hanger design 5-30 SRSS 5-28, 7-30 Start, CAESAR II 2-2 Starting CAESAR II 2-2 Static Load Case Editor 5-6 Static load case number 7-30 Static load cases Building static load cases 5-5 Limitations of the load case editor 5-5 Recommended load cases 5-5 Static output plot 9-17 Static output processor 132 column reports 6-2 Animation of static solution 6-2 Commands in static output 6-2 Initiating the static output processor 6-2 Plotting statics 6-2 Report options 6-2 Report titles 6-2 View-reports 6-2 Static Output Processor 6-1 Static output review 2-13 Plotting static output 2-13 Static Output Review 2-13 Static results 7-3 Static Seismic Load Cases 5-12 Static solution methodology 5-19 Archive 5-19 Incore solution Bandwidth 5-19 Nonlinear restrai 5-19 Static analysis Stiffness matrix 5-19 Static/Dynamic Combinations 7-22, 7-30, 7-33, 7-35 , 8-2 Stiffness matrix 5-19 Stiffness model, Modifying 7-22, 7-25, 7-31, 733, 7-35
Stress 5-26 Stress category 5-21 Stress concentration factor 11-8 Stress Concentrations and Intensification 11-8 Stress increase factor AISC 11-34 Stress increase factor, Allowable 11-34 Stress intensification factors 4-8, 8-4 Stress Intensification Factors/Tees 4-23 Stress reduction factors cmy and cmz 11-34 Stress reduction factors, aisc 11-34 Stress report 8-4 Stress Summary 6-24 Stress types 2-11, 5-5, 5-21, 7-29 Stresses 6-23, 8-4 Stresses, Allowable 4-21 Structural capability in CAESAR II 9-2 Structural code 11-34 Structural code, AISC 11-34 Structural files, Include 4-38 Structural Steel Checks - AISC 11-34 Structural steel example 9-10, 9-17, 9-28 Structural Steel Example #1 9-10 Structural Steel Example #2 9-17 Structural Steel Example #3 9-28 Structural steel input 9-2 AISC database, structural steel input 9-2 Connecting pipe to structure 9-17 Connectin 9-17 Displaced 9-17 Editing structural steel input 9-2 End connections,structural steel input 9-2 Format of structural steel input 9-2 Include in piping job 9-2 Include a struct 9-2 Kaux-include str 9-2 Index numbers, structural steel input 9-2 Initiate structural steel input Struct 9-2 Initiating structural steel input 9-2 Help 9-2 Keywords in structural steel input 9-2 Running structural steel input 9-2 Static output plot 9-17 Range command 9-17 Structural Steel Modeler 9-1 Structure dimensions 9-17 Structure nodes 9-17 Sturm sequence check 7-36
Index
11
Sustained load cases 5-29 Sustained stresses 7-2, 7-30 Sustained sustained load cases 2-11 System response 7-7, 8-4
Bilinear supports 10-8 Bilinear sprin 10-8 Soil supports 10-8 Ultimate load 10-8 Yield displace 10-8 Yield stiffnes 10-8 Convert input command 10-3 Element length 10-3 Buried pipe displ 10-3 Lateral bearing l 10-3 Meshing Lateral bearing meshes 10-3 Overburden Compaction Multiplier 10-8 Soil model numbers 10-8 Spreadsheet Buried element descr 10-3 Underground pipe modeler 10-2 Buried 10-3 Soil pr 10-2 Soil st 10-2 Zones 10-3 Lateral bearing regions 10-3 Uniform Loads 4-19 Unsupported axial length 11-36 Unsupported length (in-plane bending) 11-36 Unsupported length (out-of-plane bending) 11-36 Updates and License Types 1-10 Usage factor 8-4 User assistance Technical support phone numbers 1-6 Training 1-6 User Control of Produced Results Data 5-26 User Defined Time History Waveform 7-18 User-Controlled Combination Methods 5-28 Using the CAESAR II Flange Modeler 11-20 Using the Underground Pipe Modeler 10-3
T
Technical reference manual 1-5 Technical support phone numbers 1-6 The CAESAR II Main Menu 3-2 The Spectrum Wizard 7-8 Thermal load case 5-29 Thermal strains 4-7 Thrust loads 7-32 Time history 7-22, 7-34, 7-38 Force-time profiles 7-34 Vibration 7-34 Time History 7-34, 7-38 Time history analysis 7-2 Time history load cases 7-29, 7-35, 8-2 Time History Load Cases 7-35 Time History Profile Definitions 7-34 Time history results 8-2 Time vs. force 7-34 Title 4-35 Tools Menu 3-11, 4-63 Training 1-6 Trunnion 11-6, 11-8 Tutorial Center of gravity report, tutorial 2-9 Plotting, tutorial 2-6 Sample model input, tutorial 2-6
U
UBC 7-9 Underground pipe modeler 10-2, 10-3 Underground pipe/buried pipe
V
Valve 4-35 Velocity vs. elevation table 5-16 Vertical in-line pumps 11-53 Vertical In-Line Pumps 11-53 Vessel attachment stresses/WRC 107
12
Index
Input data, WRC 107 11-9 Nozzle data, WRC 107 11-9 Nozzle loads, WRC 107 11-9 Curv 11-9 Inte 11-9 Reinforcing pad 11-9 Stress summations, WRC 107 11-12 Vessel data 11-9 Vibration 7-2, 7-34 View Menu 3-18 View Output 4-30
Yield stiffness 10-8 Young's modulus 11-34, 11-36
Z
Zone definitions 10-3
W
Warning Message 5-4 Warnings 6-30 Water hammer 7-21 Specifying the load Force sets, slug flow 7-33 Force-time profile 7-33 Load cases, slug flow 7-33 Relief load synthesizer 7-33 Relief valve 7-33 Slug problems 7-33 Water hammer analysis 7-2 Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum) 7-33 Welding Research Council Bulletin 297 11-14 What are the Applications of CAESAR II? 1-3 What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe Stress Packages? 1-4 What is CAESAR II? 1-2 What is Contained In A Specific Build? 1-8 Wind data ASCE #7 wind loads 5-16 Methods of wind loading 5-16 Pressure vs. elevation table 5-16 Shape factor 5-16 Velocity vs. elevation table 5-16 Wind/Wave 4-20 WRC 107 Stress Summations 11-12 WRC 107 Vessel Stresses 11-9 WRC 297 Nozzle flexibility 11-14 Nozzle screen 11-14 WRC axes orientation 11-9 WRC Bulletin 297 11-14
Y
Yield displacement 10-8

C 2 UG

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

C 2 UG

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

CAESAR II 2011 R1 User Guide

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Warranties and Liabilities

Quick Start and Basic Operation

Error Checking and Static Load Cases

Static Output Processor

Dynamic Input and Analysis

Dynamic Output Processing

Structural Steel Modeler

Buried Pipe Modeling

Equipment Component and Compliance

Chapter 1 Introduction In This Chapter

What is CAESAR II?

What are the Applications of CAESAR II?

What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe Stress Packages?

About the CAESAR II Documentation

Program Support/User Assistance

Software Revision Procedures

Can Builds Be Applied To Any Version?

What is Contained In A Specific Build?

Archiving and Reinstalling an Old, Patched Version

Updates and License Types

Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation In This Chapter

Quick Start and Basic Operation

CAESAR II Quick Reference

Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation

Quick Start and Basic Operation

File Open / Job Roll-Back:

Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation

Quick Start and Basic Operation

Ar chive Passwor d Dialog

Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation

Piping Input Generation

Piping Input Spr eadsheet

Quick Start and Basic Operation

Entering the First Element (Element 10-20) of a Simple Model:

Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation

Quick Start and Basic Operation

CAESAR II Input Gr a phics Scr een

Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation

Error Checking the Model

Quick Start and Basic Operation

Center of Gr avity Repor t

Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation

Building Load Cases

Loa d Case Builder

Quick Start and Basic Operation

Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation

Executing Static Analysis

Quick Start and Basic Operation

Static Output Review

Load Cases Analyzed 1 [OPE) W+Tl+P1 2[SUS)W+P1 3 [EXP) L3=L112

Show these1epo1ts in this o1de1:

CAESAR IIOutput Processor

CAP NUM SCRL

Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation

Out put Gr a phics Scr een

Chapter 3 Main Menu In This Chapter

The CAESAR II Main Menu

CAESAR II M ain M enu

Chapter 3 Main Menu

File New Dialog Box